Home

SERVICE MANUAL - Daikintech.co.uk

1. F Ei Buzzer Ssss z 2 Buzzer The intelligent Manager on sites monitoring PCs periodically call the Watchdog PC in office and send the records Filtering of records sent is configurable on each site Watchdog is a stand alone application Except the installation of a modem on the PC in office no setup is needed However the setup of intelligent Manager on sites to send the records must have been performed beforehand on the monitoring PCs and is not covered in the present manual Please refer to the intelligent Manager Remote Options Engineering manual for installation on site and in the office and to the intelligent Manager Operation Manual for configuration on sites Note Site1 Site Site1 Site1 Site1 Site Site Note 2 6 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual i72 301 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 1 2 Starting and Stopping the Watchdog 1 2 1 Starting the application Locate and double click the Watchdog exe file At the beginning the start button is enabled and the stop button is disabled grayed out since no line is open The Online diode is dark red and the Receiving Call diode is dark green as shown below OI x Messages Help Sie Time Name ID PORT ADDR CODE sitet 2001 6 22 18 34 46 Levell Easti 1 1 1 1 00 Start Site1 20017 6 22 18 34 53 Emergenc 01 195 Fire alarm Site
2. Guide Present Status 2001 4 11 Wed 18 02 Status Stop Filter Sign new 4C1 Main Operation Mode Cooling 270C Baan nn Operation F Set Filter Sign RC restriction C gia oe E Cleat Set se Sien SOR Start Stop EN OperationMode T Set l Set aa Setaaint C Aio 2 Fan Heat Operation Mode Prohibited Stop Only Poerniited G Permitted In Maintenance New Control directions amp Swing I leniporaniy Wot Wionitored Contraled Prohibited eae qe Set Temperature x C Pernnited Prohibited Buzzer E 32 Design Guide Si72 301 4 System Architecture System Architecture 4 1 Requirement Spec and the Recommendation of Other Equipment System Diagram 6 es Modem T Requirement Specifications iPU It is provided from DIL II Indoor Unit Indoor Unit Recommendations Remarks 1 Hardware CPU Pentium 300MHz minimum 500MHz or above recommended Memory 64MB or above HDD 4GB minimum 8GB or above Keybord Mouse Network 10Base T SVGA 800x600 Monitor 15 17 Sound amp Speaker Software Windows NT 4 0 SP4 Windows 2000 Other equip LBP not indispen
3. The color of the message display varies according to the type of history The color of a message that has been confirmed is indicated in brackets Malfunction Red purple Warning Blue gray Release Green Other Black 5 5 Emergency Stop Interlocking Control in case of fire When an Emergency Stop signal is received the state of the fire icon will change During an emergency clicking on the fire icon will display the dialog for carrying out forced release Forced Release If the Emergency Stop signal turns out to be a false alarm such as test run or under maintenance a forced release function can be used If the Emergency Stop program is specified from the monitoring software and the forced release performed manually the Emergency Stop program will be canceled irrespective of the release mode automatic manual setup In the case of a program monitoring multiple input even if a separate monitoring signal appears after forced release has been carried out the emergency stop will not be started up If all signals have not been turned off following the forced release the emergency stop will not be restarted up Operation authority is required to carry out release forced manual operations Please refer to 5 10 3 Configuring user Login p 245 196 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual S i72 301 Operation Details Change of icon state Emergency stop Compulsory release Signal OFF by In progre
4. Jump Back Help 2001 1091 1 Thu 5 4 2 Logging Out Logs out from login status Login While logged in click on Logout button of the menu button A dialog box will appear as shown in the above figure Click on OK button to log out Present Status Service Logout User Password i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 173 Operation Details i72 301 5 Operation Details 5 1 Moving Between Screens It is possible to move between screens at will and there are two ways of doing so simple movement and movement by the reservation button Moreover if the automatic circular sequence function is used multiple registered screens will be displayed and automatically switched over at a predetermined frequency Click the Jump button intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help 2a jo Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Help intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help x Psa oO Q i aa eve AA cama ae Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Types of screens that may be go anonim moved to mo Screen jump 5 Main P Screen of the management m Screens List P Mng point list openlist points of management groups F Indoor Units g P Digital Inputs am G Screen of the management points of control groups Sp
5. e On the PC screen double click the My Computer icon then double click the Dial up Networking icon the Dial up Networking dialogue displays e Create a new phonebook entry to dial click the New button then follow the New Phonebook Entry Wizard or e Select an existing phonebook entry to dial 160 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual Si72 301 e Click the Dial button the Connect to dialogue appears Configuring intelligent Manager Remote e Enter the User Name and Password as they have been set up in the User Admin of the monitoring PC then click the Ok button e Wait for the connection to be made then the Remote Access Service Monitoring window displays e Start the intelligent Manager on the remote PC e End of procedure Note error messages can appear on dialing time Please differentiate installation error case 1 from normal use error Case 1 installation error case 2 Error Connecting to iManager Remote iN Registering your computer on the network Error 20 No PPP control protocols configured i Cancel More Info Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual Case 1 communication error Error Connecting to ifanager Remote Ei ES AN Dialing 0 00161 Error 676 The line ts busy Cancel More Info 161 Notes Si72 301 6 Notes 1 Illegal reproduction of this document or of any part therein is strictly prohibited 2 Any part of this document may be ch
6. S Screen related to the system DETaiediintg P Analogue Inputs P Digital Input Output setup G Control group list y sm G1 3nd Finnr Bd Report P Mng Gr G Ctrl Gr pm F Free Layout _ S System Register JUMP ay Restore Fire m Auto Alternation Register Start JE Pwr Limit Buzzer 5 5 1 1 Simple Movement 174 A list of the screens that may be moved to is displayed Select the screen to be moved to from the screen list and click on Jump button to move to this screen i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Screens to be moved to T Screen jump Screens List P 1st 2nd Floor F 3th 4th Floor P Gutdoor Units F Analogue Inputs F Digital Input Output G Control group list ial 2rd Floor F Wing Gr a Ctrl Gr F Free Layout S System Register Auto Alternation Register Start 5 1 2 Movement by Reservation Button Operation Details intelligent Manager Fie Menu Operation Help 3 Elal a Ja Blo a Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System ump Back elp Guide Mng point list 2001 10 11 Thu 16 46 usr Main Open list ojs Restore Fire 4 Pwr Limit Buzzer 3 Click the Register button to display the following dialog box Select the screen to be reserved from the screen list and click the Add gt gt button to register it in the list of reserved screens T
7. File Menu Operation Help 3 xA Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Guide Jump Back Help 2001 9 25 Tue 15 07 z Interlocking Emgey Stop usr Main m Program Type Open list C Interlocked Ctrl Emergency Stop Ctrl Activat No Program name Activation Enable Disable m Edit Name Setup x C Cancel Repon Restore Fire 4E Pwr Limit Buzzer o Select the Emergency Stop Program from the interlocking menu at the top of the screen Click the Create button to newly register the program The name setup screen will appear Enter the name and click the OK button To cancel the name setup click the Cancel button Hame Setup Pump carcel The newly registered program name is displayed on the screen Next set up the contents by clicking on the program name click the scroll bar if necessary to enable the operation buttons on the right hand side Click the Modify Program button to display the Emergency Stop Program setup screen An interlocking program name or contents registered previously can also be modified via the same procedure However the program to be modified should be disabled Refer to next page for details of enabling disabling switchover i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details WHET NEL WETAN EO INTGY
8. cccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 2 6 1 2 Starting and Stopping the Watchdog cccccecsseeeseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeesees 277 TS IPORUSING Records veciet ac tieit Bencnaideas A tee 279 t4 SFOUBDISSMOOUN Gute sevinehrsSetavascrndnctuctaticdahese nic A E eeeees 282 2 Intelligent Manager Remote ccccceecseceseeeseceeeeeeeeeneeeneeeseeeneeeeaes 283 2 1 Introducing intelligent Manager ReEMote ccccssccseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 283 2 2 Starting and Stopping the intelligent Manager Remote 008 284 2 9 UT FOUDISS IOC TING erresa wenetnewiens salem trcce cmatinte thanndennseniewed acest 286 4 NOTO Saoer toddi eea neared ie reetateaadds 287 Part 7 Troubleshooting s ss 22 LOD i HSCTORC INStAN ATION soniri en sted tee tateceataieces 290 2 AMET instalation sareen ele ana i aals luna a alata che Sunol 295 2 1 iManager Can Not be Started ccccccccccseseeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeessaeeeees 295 2 2 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware cccccsseceeeeseeeeeeeeeseees 296 2 3 Can Not be Connected to iPU Software Setting ccsseeeeeeeseeees 297 2 4 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware Malfunction 008 298 2 5 Some of the Air Conditioners Have Communication Error 299 2 6 CPU Alive LED is Turned off or Lighting Up cccecceeseeeeeeeseeeeeees 300 227 Ether GNKEED IS OM sasttee
9. 2 Automatic Inspection of Meter Automatically cumulates pulses of electrical power meters water amount totals and gas meter Data that is inspected is reflected in the tenant s monthly cost calculations optional A measuring instrument with a pulse generator of a minimum of 100 ms pulse width is necessary Number of management items 1 meter 1 item Meters can be connected to the Pi port on the main unit 3 2 5 Management Running History Management Report Creation Including the proportion of electric power 1 Running History Management You can print the changes in the status of the equipment start stop See the section on Detailed History Display on page 13 Stores up to 10 000 items of error history data of the equipment occurrence of errors and recovery in memory Allows you to display and to print the error history for each specific management item and to display and to print the histories of all management items Also you can set the period targeted for display or printing for each and set whether to display or print the errors and recoveries 2 Report Creation Accumulates and manages the data for integration running time of equipment start stop count meters pulse integration by the Pi on the main unit and the power consumption amount in units of indoor equipment by the proportion of electrical power of the VRV It can also be searched and displayed using Excel software Customers can f
10. Login Setup x usr Registered Users List For logout Name new Password User Information Remarks Authority Start Stop Setup Setup Central Ctrl M Regist Schedule l Regist Users T Reg IntLock Ctrl M Inspection Mode l Reg Emcy Intlock M Regist Pwr Limit Ctrl l Emcy Stop Release Regist Save Energy Control M Operate History Setup System Change Password x User Name new gt Tenant 1 Current pooo Password New p Password Retype new Password Screen access restriction P Delete All screens can be opened The authority set up becomes effective from the next log in OK Cancel soli If the Set Login button from the System Setup menu is clicked again the user will be seen to have been added as shown in the above figure 1 Click the Create button the fields for input enable 2 Input the profile of the user Name as used for Login Password idem Remarks freely describes the profile of the user Authority check the boxes for the operation which this user can perform Screen Access Check the All Screens box Click the Regist Screen button the Screen Selection screen appears then Select the screens which you want the user to have access to from the left side list and click the Add button Select the screens which you want the user NOT to have access to from the right side list and click the Remo
11. Registers a maximum of 100 management items in one group and a maximum of 100 groups 6 Design Guide Si72 301 Design Guide Functions 4 Schedule control Automatically performs starting and stopping of any control group and management items according to the set time schedule Creating and registering a year calendar and a week schedule will automatically create an execution schedule and the specified management items and control groups are controlled according to that execution schedule Also by editing the execution schedule the schedule for the next coming week can be specially changed A maximum of 128 programs can be registered The year calendar week schedule and execution schedule are in parity of 1 to 1 and schedule operations can be executed by combining each one Year Calendar 13 month calendar Can set for regular days holidays or special days for each day and allows creation of customized calendars for each tenant Week Schedule Registers the times for performing control from the intelligent Manager for any control group or management item individually for each day holiday or special day of the week Specify either of the instructions run stop enable remote controller disable remote controller fan cool heat operation mode or set point Registers up to 20 actions per day Execution Schedule Daily schedule for the coming week The actual schedule runs according to this Automatically created based on yea
12. Select the System Setup entry Check the types of alarms to be sent as shown below Close the filter dialogue oystem Setup x Watchdog Fillter The checked item is notified J System Error IY Equipment error W Equipment warning IY Communication error If Emergency stop Power failure Power Limit Control Prediction Part Running Status Running Temporary stop x C 4 2 Configuring the Watchdog PC This procedure should be performed on the remote PC of Watchdog only 4 2 1 Installing the intelligent Manager Watchdog application The intelligent Manager Watchdog software is a separate executable module Insert the resource CD ROM in the remote PC in MS Windows Explorer copy the file Watchdog exe in the target folder 4 2 2 Configuring the TAPI device See detailed procedure above 154 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote 5 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote This configuration is performed in 2 steps e Step 1 on the monitoring PC configuring the Remote Access Server facility and the user access permission of Windows NT or 2000 so that intelligent Manager can accept requests from the intelligent Manager Remote client and perform related operations e Step 2 on the remote PC configuring the intelligent Manager Remote client and the Remote Access Client facility of Windows NT so that intelligent Manager Remote will
13. Troubleshooting Si72 301 Operation Troubleshooting Before Installation The icon is not displayed on the management group screen if you don t set the management group The management point was not displayed in the list when I tried to add the management points to the management group Please confirm the following items Did you make management points and send it to the iPU by Mng Point Tool Did you restart the iPU after you sent the management point data to the iPU The icon of the indoor unit is blue on the iManager screen Please check the following items Is the D3 net connected to the iPU Is the indoor unit connected to the D3 net Does the indoor unit have power Is the indoor unit D3 address set Is the D3 address the same between the indoor unit and the management point Can the indoor unit start or stop by CRC System cannot be started Cannot load DLL message appears DLL file missing or setup tool path not correct All users logged in cannot log in Log in as service and create a new user Warining included in check Management points have been changed displays on iManager This error will pop up every time if the points list has been modified in the iPU This is not an error just a notice UPS Di cable How to connect this the UPS and add the point Please connect a 2 core wire from Di1 on master iPU and the other end to COM1 and NO1 on the Relay I O m
14. 5 tyle terminal _ Use a proper Crimp style terminals tool to securely clamp 2 A4 Attaching the outside temperature sensor Securing the sensor Always secure the sensor downwards aS Shown in the diagram Insta where the unit will not be Subject to direct rain or sunlight Sunlight it might detect a temperature higher than the actual t 56 in a well ventilated location f the unit receives direct mperature l e Ce DI Ai T Secure the copper thermistor piping for the outside temperature facing Upwards The lead line length for the outside thermometer is approximately 50 cm from the bottom of the device C 1P108833 1 2 Design Guide i72 301 Outdoor Temperature Sensor DIll Ai DAM101A51 2 5 Setting the dipswitches and cutting the jumper line Dipswitch and jumper location Meaning of each dipswitch and jumper line Number Weaning roe Dipswitches ee DI NET Communication address last digit DS1 to DS4 aa DIL NET Communication address first digit Enabling and disabling the Sensor Jumper line to cut Switching sensor uses when Using multi purpose sensors JP6 JP6 When using multi purpose Sensors cut the main jumper line C DSI and DS2 DIL NET communication address settings Setting DSI and DS2 sets the DI NET communication address Set the DIL NET communication address between 1 00 and 4 15 Normally only one addre
15. 6 7 1 3 Checking a Digital Output point e Click the icon of the digital output point the border color turns purple e Click the Start button of the action menu then check that the color turns red after a few seconds e Wait for confirmation from the E I that the digital output point has started e Click the Stop button of the action menu then check that the color turns green after a few seconds e Wait for confirmation from the E I that the digital output point has stopped 6 7 1 4 Checking a Pulse Input point 100 e E I reads out the current value of the pulse input point e Check that the value displayed on the screen is the same then notify E l i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Note Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application Depending on the requirements of the project other parameters can be checked Current Value Multiplier Unit Abbreviation and Rate Backup Interval and Signal period 6 7 2 Checking the Control Groups Important Important Note This procedure checks each control group This procedure can be performed only when the checking of all management points of the groups has been successfully performed For this procedure all management points should be first stopped their icon color is green If their color is gray yellow or blue then please refer to the Appendix D Trouble Shooting intelligent Manager initialization 1 Click the C
16. Click the Schedule button from the menu buttons intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a Be fa xaj Bis Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout e AatErlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a xE xal e Login Ming Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide 2001 10 11 Thu 18 02 usr Main Activation Schedule Programs List Enable Wisable Open list Renewal date Edit stari Ena test 2002 10 Create HOH Copy Detailed ita Delete A Rename Schedule Repon Edit Execute Schedule A a PrinvExport Restore Fire System Base Calendar ul 4E Pwr Limit Buzzer 5 8 1 Schedule fundamentals 216 A schedule Program is a set of time stamped actions These Actions are grouped in a Weekly Schedule organized in daily patterns Sunday to Saturday Day Off and Special Day These weekly schedules are repeated in a Yearly Schedule The yearly calendars can be shared between programs using the Base Calendar facility As well schedules and programs management is facilitated by editing functions Copy etc i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 8 2 Managing Base Calendars A base calendar may be given the name of your choice The name can be a row of up to 32 characters Up to 6 base calendars can be created
17. Confirm that the distance with the watthour meter intelligent Manager is within 200 m Design Guide 37 Wiring Image i72 301 5 Wiring Image 5 1 System Connection Parallel Page Printer Up to 4 iPUs can be connected lt Use of Printers gt 1 Standard Setting With only the page printer Parallel port connection Printing of daily monthly annual reports and cost calculations Automatically prints at the set time Display of errors and changes of states etc Printer at error or at determined build up of data or freely 2 2 Units of Page Printer and Line Printer Optional Page printer Network connection Daily monthly annual reports Automatically prints at the set time Cost calculation Connecting to iPU Wiring varies according to the equipment to be connected as shown below DIII NET Compatible Air Conditioners DII NET non polar dual core Per 1 DIJII NET line Up to 10 outdoor units Up to 64 indoor units 38 Design Guide i72 301 Wiring Image 1 Bus Method DIII NET non polar dual core IPU AE a N VRV VRV VRV Up to 64 management items per 1 line VRV VRV VRV VRV VRV VRV NS Up to 16 branches NY Sub branches a branch from S N an existing branch are not possible 2 Star Method VRV VRV VRV iPU SS ee VRV VRV VRV VRV VRV VRV Up to 64 management items per 1 line Di Unit 8 items 4 Dio Unit 4 or 2 items Up to 16 branches Pi Unit 8 items Sub
18. During Stop 0 000 Kwn 0000 Kwn During Stop 0 000 mwh Faacoor une 1 0 ce Storage Oniy Daytime 0000 Kh Nighttime 0000 Kwh Pulse Dt Pi1 Total 0 Pulse Night Part 0 Pulse Exception Period Total 0 Puse Venification Data x PowerGroup GF Time 11 00 1200 Save File Name ecooooo oo eooooecdcoo ecooeeeceo oocooooooo oooo0oo0oo0oo0oo0 This procedure performs configuration of groups of units related to the same distribution power source Click the Setup Groups button of the top menu The Groups Setup screen displays Note The Total of Indoor Unit in Present Calculated Value is the total amount of power consumed since the start of calculation Note The values of Indoor Unit Data Outdoor Unit Data and Pulse Data are internal information intended for developers only Therefore they should be used only to confirm result increasing Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual 143 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution 1 3 3 8 Other trial functions DCU Trial Monitor SetupDCU x AN Really want to finish SETUP step Heating Invalid 1 01 OK OK On Cooling 251 Invalid OFF 1 02 OK OK On Cooling 251 Invalid OFF Permit Permit Permit 1 03 OK OK On Cooling 251 Invalid OFF Permit Permit Permit 1 04 OK OK On Cooling 26 0 Invalid OFF Permit Permit Fermit 1 05 OK OK On Cooling 26 0 Invalid OFF Permit Permit Permit 1 06 OK OK On Cooling
19. Printed in Japan 04 2003 AK
20. Prohibit Manual operation User cannot Start Stop this point available only for output points Indoor Units D3Dio Do BIFE Nb i 2 nNa Pn Type mena Co Mng Ft PEN Nains NoNar r Shot Mec inname ia ch i net amp j OMUNO Error Monitoring Level display only or recorded InN Cur m n Monto Messe Cuat Mier l History D3 net or iManager iPU issued an error code Monitoring all types Equipment Error Monitoring Level idem the equipment issued an error code Time Limit Monitoring idem how many seconds after an action should the errors be monitored os Ya 5 0202 arez Nng l ont Attributes Ei e Measure for I U D3 Dio Di Do Seo hs se Name uane Sort herrea N_Ner leon i0fioz at Operation Time Warning not monitored if 0 how many hours before ee ea ee Timz tz vaio cpe eticn tine Joo hcu Det OIFN ne recording a warning we Operation Time adjust the current value i Me Nb of Start Stop Warning not monitored if 0 how many times On Off before recording a warning Nb of Start Stop adjust the current value VerE 0000 x Cereal e Other for I U O U D3 Dio Di Do see below e Indoor for I U only see below e Click the OK button to update the information of the currently selected management point and close the screen e Click the Check button to validate the modifications if the result message indicates an error ver
21. Seu Motta ary First select the detection condition 9 S iaa in S Otier eontro roup Select a management point control group Click the scroll bar if necessary When satisfactory click the Add gt gt button A list of the input management points registered will appear on the right Input management points can be removed by selecting the points to be removed from the list on the right hand side click to roll down and clicking the Remove lt lt button The previous interlocking program setup screen see below will be restored i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 233 Operation Details i72 301 Output is then registered Click the Modify button in the Output frame Management Points Selection E4 Available Points Selected Points Water Pure Evel WYS Level4 Est1 Level4 Est Level4 Esta Leveld Shart Leveld Share Leveld Shara Leveld Shard Leveld Vi st1 Leveld Vist leved st A Listed Paints AlL Indoor Unit Equipment C Other Control Group Cc oK p Cancel Select a management point from the available list Click the scroll bar if necessary When satisfactory click the Add gt gt button A list of the input management points registered will appear on the right Input management points can be removed by selecting the points to be removed from the list on the right hand side click the scroll bar if necessary and clicking the Remove
22. Wattmeter Electric energy Electric energy at each port 305 96 03 Si72 301 Design Guide Si72 301 Outdoor Temperature Sensor DIll Ai DAM101A51 11 Outdoor Temperature Sensor DIIIl Ai DAM101A51 11 1 Component parts The components of the kit are as follows Before installing be Sure to check whether they are supplied Quantity Name Quantity Name u Ferrite core large Hole cover large i i Ferrite core small Hole cover small Installation Manual Harness for multi purpose sensor Harness pressure terminal Clamping material 11 2 Attachment Design Guide Attachment location Install this device outside in a location out of direct sunlight and rain The set height Should have at least 30 cm between the floor and the device The pull out length of the outdoor thermometer from the bottom of the device is approximately 50 cm The installation location for the device should be Selected with the above in mind 2 1 Installing the main unit First remove the lid from the main unit 5 screws Do not lose the removed screws You will need them when you close the lid after all work is done Screws This device is mounted with 4 screws Open the four indentations for the screw holes with self tapping screws or drill them and secure them with the 4 screws The recommended screw Size is M4 Screws should be procured locally Ys 210 Ys 15 YY SLL LLL LLY N The
23. a3 aaja s x x SHEMET o WETANE OTTO SEH epom m d y T O w USer OeInIGh Ser OenniiGn 2 USer OPA S ISET AENG 4 The reports are created in two steps each with one of the modules of the application e Step1 configure the tenants this step can be performed once and then be reused Create the tenants Associate to each tenant management points which data will be included in his report e Step 2 retrieve the report data this step can be performed on a regular basis on demand For each tenant select the report limit dates and retrieve the operational data from the intelligent Manager database The two modules of the Tenant report Management execute under Microsoft Excel Therefore the figures below are from this environment i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 7 2 Configuring the tenants Click the Tenant Setup button to launch the tenant configuration module The tenants with their information and management points configuration setup are stored within the intelligent Manager database Therefore it is important to click the Save Setup button before exiting with the Exit button Tenants Name Code four comments free editing Nb of points Add Tenant Modi enant Exit Renae ieratik 5 7 2 1 Creating a Tenant 1 Click the Add Tenant button that will display the tenant configuration dialogue Add Tenant Cave Setup Df ema oat Name In Out kodit enart
24. click the Start button bottom left on the PC screen selct the Run entry and type regsvr32 exe lt filename ocx gt repeat this with the name of each ocx module distributed with intelligent Manager i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 123 Workflow Overview Appendix B Trouble shooting installation of the iPU Operating System Si72 301 In case of problems of communication between the PC and the iPU please check as explained below and reload the operating system file if necessary first using the FTP connection and if this failed then check using the Serial connection 1 FTP Connection step 1 Check the IP addresses of the PC and iPU step 2 check the connection cables between the PC Hub and iPU step 3 check the communication between the PC and iPU on the PC open a Command Prompt window Type ping lt IP address of iPU gt as shown in the figure below if an error message displays ex Request timed out check the network settings on the PC Step 4 Check the iPU settings in the setup program VRVSetup exe 10 Important It is necessary to save the initialization data and transfer them in the iPU before starting the intelligent Manager application a Command Prompt Microsoft CR Windows NICTM CG Copyright 1985 1996 Microsoft Corp C gt ping 192 168 09 1 Pinging 192 168 80 1 with 32 bytes of data C gt ping 192 168 6 1 out out out out Hinging 192 168 0 1 with 32 bytes of
25. o Times 0 No Monitoring of Limits Cancel Modify the name short name and maximum values as required Click OK to return to the management point setup dialog box Other Ctrl Group If the cumulative maximum value is set to 0 it may not be possible to monitor maximum values When all modifications have been completed click the OK button of the dialogue box for the management point setup 5 10 5 Setting up Central control It is possible to set centralized control for permission prohibition for every Dlllnet port Central control permission prohibition is used to indicate whether or not permission is to be granted for an operation from a connected Daikin centralized control unit for example remote controller etc System setup authority is required to operate it i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 251 Operation Details i72 301 252 Operational Procedure Central Control Setup Central Control Setup Ei DSnet Ports Danet Ports iPU Nb Enable Disable Enable Disable Winge Et hing Ft E LE Cancel Cancel The state of permission or prohibition of the Station numbers and Port numbers connected to the main system is displayed Permission prohibition is used to define whether or not permission is to be granted for an operation from a connected Daikin centralized control unit If permission is granted for the Start Stop operation priority will be given
26. 4 st 2nd Floor See n o E ire Signa ire evell Es eer Indoor Te IntT Level1 Wstt ie Digital Inputs Levell Estt Levell yvst2 i Digital Input Output Levelt Y st3 Add Level VWst4 a Level2 Est1 Digital Outputs Level Est z Analogue Inputs Level Est3 Outdoor Units Level Mor1 Level Mor2 E Level Mor3 Level 2 VYystt Level2 Vist Level 2 VyWst3 am Leyel3 Estl Level3 Est Level3 Ests Level3 Shart Level3 Shar2 Leyel3 Shara Level3 Shard ae r Level Up Level Down Edit Group Create Group Delete Group Set Attribute PrintiExport G Group OS esa Indoor unit Equip Other Close eahicel When all registrations have been completed click the Close button Additionally if a management point group needs to be deleted select the management point group to be deleted and click the Delete Group button If a management point group needs to be renamed select the management point group to be modified and click the Set Attributes button A group registration dialog box will appear thereby allowing name and arrangement specification to be modified Screen Group Registration X Screen group name group 1 Arrangement Cell Size Cell Arrangement C Large f Regular C Small HEE Line HEE Column M Automatic Setting i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 241 Operation Details i72 301 5 10 2 Configuring Control Groups 242 Control groups can be named at will
27. Cancer authority only Please do NOT use in any other case as operation safety could NOT be longer A type contact guaranted C B type contact Host name IP address 192 168 0 1 Default Gateway Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 CAUTION This tool is reserved for use with servicing Ver1 0 Revi6 Exit Locale info Time Blas s40 min 720 720 l R E Finsh Jan fist fSun gt f zinou Time to save Option info of Bo E lii control ass T I Valid Eco Mode Specifies 0 minute in principle a iM anager5 000 fai oun Tool selection Mng Points setting Staion setting PC setting Ver 5 0000 Exit IP Address Settings xi Aee Cance r Valid power propfrtional division Ver2 0 Rev6 e jni E iManager5 000 cf oun Fienane Save as type BIPS initial information Files bid bd Cancel You can click the Load button and specify the path to an initialization file extension bid or and input as follows when necessary e Select the iPU from the dropdown list the Valid iPU field appears e Type the Host Name free name for FTP e Type the IP address as in the following table 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 3 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 4 255 255 255 0 e Type the Sub net Mask idem e Type the Default Gateway IP address of the connectable PC o
28. Display Made f All C Unregistered Type tf All Indoor unit Control Group Edit List Attributes Create Group Delete Group Printfexport set Attributes Time Interval Select loon f Equip Other When all registrations have been completed click the Close button Additionally if a control group needs to be deleted select the control group to be deleted and click the Delete Group button If a control group needs to be renamed select the control group to be modified and click the Set Attributes button A group registration dialog box will appear thereby allowing name and arrangement specification to be modified 5 10 3 Configuring user Login 5 10 3 17 Fundamentals A user s execution authority may be set up in order to restrict the range of operation and consultation Note Administrators only can perform this procedure An administrator is an operator whose profile includes authorization to Regist Users i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 245 Operation Details i72 301 246 User Management e By logging in a user may operate within the range of authority granted to him e A single user may not log in simultaneously from more than one connected monitoring PC e The items for which authority can be set up are shown as follows Authority If authority is granted If authority is not granted Start Stop Setup Start Stop Setup operation is possible Start Stop Setup operation is not possible Schedule C
29. IN Start Please confirm Cancel p Setup 27 C Level2 Nor1 za p Setup 27 C N2 Lewel2 Nor3 a Setup 27 C N3 Lewel2 Wst 1 a Setup 27 C Level2 Wist2 ce Setup 27 C Detailed info Stop button Setup Report 6 Restore Fire 46 Setup 27 C q Setup 27 C q Setup 27 C Lid Pwr Limit Buzzer First select the management point to be started up Then click on the cell of a management point If the management point has Start Stop capability the Start and Stop buttons will be enabled Click the Start button to display the confirmation dialog box Click OK to start the operation or Cancel to cancel Similarly if the Stop button is clicked the confirmation dialog box will be displayed Click OK to stop the operation and Cancel to cancel If a management point without startup capability is selected the Start and Stop buttons will gray out that is clicking has no effect on them and Start Stop operation cannot be performed i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 2 3 Displaying detailed Information This displays detailed information on management points To check detailed information click on the management point you wish to check followed by a click on Detailed Information In the example below click on the cell of a management point followed by a click on the Detailed Info button
30. Smart Ues 1000 SU1LOO0U0LTNET Africa Western Foro Asin Australia 3254 Se a G ee South Pacific Product Overview i Description APC Smart UPs 1000Y A670 Input 230V Output 230V Hot swap Batteries Inteligent Battery Management Overload Gereral Features Indicator Replace Batt Indicator smartslot Software Automatic Voltage Regulation AYER User replacable batteries Includes User Manual Smart UPS signalling Ra 234 cable CD with software Documentation User Manual Technical Specifications Output Rated Powrer 1 000 VA Output power capacity T Watts Hominal output voltage 230 W Output Voltage Note Configurable for 220 230 or 240 nominal output voltage Output Connections HIEC S20 C13 dd Waveform type mine wave Smart UPS is registered trademark of APC Design Guide 35 System Architecture 36 Input Nominal input voltage Input frequency Input Connection Type Input voltage range for main operations Input voltage adjustable range for main operations Batteries Typical backup time at half load Battery type Typical recharge time Replacement battery cartridge Si72 301 230 V 3060 Hz 3 Hz auto sensing IEC 3240 C14 inlet 174 260V l g 302 V 20 1 minutes Mantenance free sealed Lead Acid battery with suspended electrolyte leakproof 4 howts D RBC surge Protection and Filtering nurse energy rating Filtering Physical Marmum height dimensions
31. Watthour meter with output Power supply O SZ x A 3 phase y y m Outdoor unit i 7 Power supply single phase Power supply O single phase C1 VWF A 7 7 pas EE 7 PC iPU mn m m Indoor units a maximum of 64 units To other iPU E Previously the general way for requesting the electricity charge at rental buildings was that a management staff read a watthour meter and billed the tenants by manual account based on the operation time which were counted through time counters However this method takes a lot of time for the management staff In addition as airconditioning consumes much different electricity for either the operation of airconditioning thermostat on or the operation of fan only thermostat off it might cause to give unfair sense to the tenants inhabited in the spaces with different heat load though operation time itself is the same For instance even if a certain higher preset temperature is applied in summer for energy saving fee for airconditioning may equal to the fee without preset temperature so far as it is counted based on the operation time E Electric energy distributing function of intelligent Manager carries out the proportional division computation in consideration of those thermostat on and thermostat off operations and saves time for building management staffs to read watthour meters and also supplies tenants printed data useful
32. amp S User Name PC Card Regional SCSI Adapters PCMCIA Settings Password m E d oK Cancel i o Custer i Garver Configures network hardware and software Network 2 x Microsoft TCP IP Properties 21x Network 2 Identification Services Protocols jepson Me ee IP Address DNS WINS Address Routing Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings Network Adapters einem patacas An IP address can be automatica h his network card XX by a DHCP server If pour bei das l hans a DHCP server E 1 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI NIC 3C905C T ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below aim erLink 10 100 PEI NIC 3C905C T Add Remove Properties Ler Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server Add Remove Properties Update Description Specify an IP address ltem Notes Transport Control Protocel Internet Protocol The default wide IP Address 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI For Complete PC Management NIC area network protocol that provides communication across SS 132 168 0 101 3C905C TX diverse interconnected networks Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Advanced coe el Caneel The setup procedure of Windows 2000 is applicable with Windows NT Click the PC start button point to Settings Control Panel and then double click the Network icon DAIKIN 192 168 0
33. e Select the icon arbitrary symbol is allowed Selection of an animated icon is possible but only in a Visual Navigation screen Icon Initialization Dialgue Size N Large ff Regular C Small F Show Animation When Startin Modify e Select Target Point Group Select Size 6 5 2 3 3 Creating a new Auxiliary information e Select the management point or control group designated by the info e Select which attribute of the selected point group the available list depends on the type of the point group i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 97 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application Select the number of characters and their size between 3 options Small Regular Large Auxiliary information Initialization Dialogue Select info Select Target Point Group Text Info Configuration Management Pint Displayed Item Mng point name Size C Large Regular C Small Nb of Characters 12 oane Select Size amp nb of characters 6 5 2 3 4 Creating a screen button e Select the Jump screen designated by the button Si72 301 e Input the label of the button arbitrary input allowed or select the option that displays automatically the Jump screen name e Select a size between 3 options Small Regular Large Button Initialization Dialogue Input Label or auto naming Screen Buttons Select Target
34. intelligent Manager WHET NSE i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 183 Operation Details i72 301 The detailed information dialog box will appear Detailed Information x Ming Point Name Level1 Est1 ID 5 Maker DAIKIN iPU 1 Port 1 z Z Mng point Level1 Est1 Equipment Name FXYS4OKV1 Address 1 00 Control Information Equipment Model FXY S40K 1 Status gt gt Schedule control program The automatic control is carried out on the following days of the week Installation Date popo 1 1 Mon 08 00 test Start Mon 18 00 test Stop Installation Place Level 1 East Tue 08 00 test Start Tue 18 00 test Stop vVed 08 00 test Start Used for Years stop Characteristics WVed 18 00 test Stop Thu 08 00 test Start Thu 18 00 test Stop Frij08 00 test Start Cumulated switching Nb of times 0 times i Frij18 00 test Stop Time Oh Time control of Power restoration None Communication error monitoring level 1 Failure monitoring level 2 Running time limit monitoring none Heating Mode Optimization desabled gt lInterlocking control is not active gt gt Emergency stop control is not active gt gt Power Limit control is not active Print Export Close Selection x Print Export Auto Ctrl Info Output PrintExport Print Out C Export Cancel Click on the Print Export button
35. Disable group be careful of registering in this same group the E indoor unit with Cool Heat selector of the same refrigerant Name Automatic Change Over Group circuit Differential 2 foc Reference Method C Fixed C Operating Average PrinvExport OK Cancel Fine grained temperature control Temp Heating gt Cooling Changeover Cooling Set Temp Set Temp Difference above 3 C Change Set Temp Change Set Temp Cooling gt Heating Changeover Heating Set Temp Heating Cooling Heating Room Temperature variation and Operation Mode Changeover Temp Heating gt Cooling Changeover Cooling Set Temp 1 C Cooling Set Temp Heating Set Temp Cooling Set Temp 1 C Cooling gt Heating Changeover Heating Cooling mp mo Heating gt Time Room Temperature variation and Operation Mode Changeover Design Guide Si72 301 Design Guide E Heating Optimization This eliminates the uncomfortable feeling when the room temperature is too high and increases overall system efficiency The intelligent Manager ECO21 completely stops the operation of room units to effectively eliminate the uncomfortable continued rise in room temperature that occurs even when room temperature has reached the set temperature which is a characteristics of heating operation in VRV systems Mi Table Report The operational status of a multiple number of air conditioners can be ascertained with jus
36. Est lt lt Level2 Est3 Level2 Mor1 Level Nor Level Nord Level2 VV st Level2 Vy st2 Level VWY stS Level3 Est LevelS Est l unl Ets Fem Execution Time Action Listed Points f Start All Equipment C Indoor Unit Other C Control Group 09 00 Levell Est1 17 00 Levell Est isto C Fan Gon Hea Setpoint ice Analog E liter extension Wn FP Mng Point G Ctrl Group Operation LIE Start L1E1 stop Hours z Minutes E a f RC Enable RE Disable i imer Extension Wt D Cancel By executing schedule based on the annual calendar and weekly schedule the coming week s period is generated automatically Actual schedule control is conducted according to this executing schedule Temporary schedule changes at less than one week s notice for the coming one week period may be made by the execution schedule Click on the day whose schedule is to be modified and use the Update and Copy buttons to modify it 5 8 7 Enable Disable Instructions Once the set up of the annual calendar and weekly schedule has been completed the created schedule must be enabled via the schedule setup dialog box Furthermore if the contents of the schedule program need to be modified the schedule in question must first be disabled i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 223 Operation Details Schedule programs may be enabled and disabled individually When disabled a pro
37. Exit In order to configure the intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier it must be running in Engineering mode start WDSetup exe before starting the main intelligent Manager application e In the configuration screen of the intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier tool e Type the Site Name name displayed on the Watchdog screen to identify the origin of the alarm e Type the Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers number called alternatively to send the history records to the Watchdog e tune the telephony options e type the Calling Period time between two calls to the watchdog e type the Dialing Period and Retry time between two attempts to dial the watchdog and maximum number of further attempts if all fail then will call later e type the Replying Period and Retry time between two checks that the watchdog picked up the phone and maximum number of further attempts if all fail then will retry dialing e select the data pack options e 1 2 records per packet possible on all lines e 2 5 records per packet possible on higher speed lines 59600 bauds and above e End of procedure Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual 153 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 4 1 4 Configuring the alarms filter Start the intelligent Manager Si72 301 Login in Service mode please refer to intelligent Manager Engineering Manual for details Open the service popup menu click the mouse right button in the working area
38. Exiting is disabled when listening 278 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual Si72 301 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 1 3 Perusing Records 1 3 1 Filtering sites By default records displayed on the screen are those received from all the sites To view only the records from a given site select from the top menu the Messages For Site entry and select a site in the list of the For Site dialogue Watchdoe Messages Help Select site name Site 1 w All Sites ee For site Cancel Print Puree File Exit watchdog Siol o x Messages Help PORT ADDR CODE Site ZOO 622 18 34 46 Levell Eastt 1 1 1 1 00 Start site 2001 B22 18 3453 Emergent 01 4195 Fire alarm Site 1 2001 6 22 18 3453 Fire Signal AY 41 149 Start Site 2001 6 22 18 3456 Emergent 01 395 Fire Release Cite 2001 6 22 16 34 56 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Stop 4 Start On line G Receiving call This function is disabled when receiving a call When records are received only those of the selected site are displayed on the screen Other records are only logged in the local database and will be displayed the next time the All Sites option is selected To view the records from all sites select from the top menu the Messages All Sites entry Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 279 Intelligent Manager Watchdog i72 301 1 3 2 Sorting records Click on the top label of a column as shown below to sort the records in the as
39. For SkyAir 2 a Integrating watthour meter For VRV Integrating watthour meter For VRV ii G 00 N O 011 4 WN O a DIII NET SkyAir adapter DTA102A2 Remote controller group control a ee a a aa aa a a i i i i aair jaa a 7 1 1 Remote controller group control C Also in the indoor unit sub unit with remote controller group control set the centralized address for correct electric energy distributing The centralized address for sub unit can be set in the site set mode 30 of the remote controller However after setting with 30 if set with 00 the sub unit address will be deleted An imperfection in case collective distribution is done with main unit running state without setting of centralized address at sub unit Even if the remote controller group control is done each indoor unit has different thermostat state depending on its installation place Therefore the distribution result will differ depending on the decision which indoor unit is to be as main unit 7 1 2 In Case power consumption of indoor unit to be distributed In distributing the power consumption of the indoor unit it is necessary to connect the integrating watthour meter to the power system of the indoor unit and input its pulse output to intelligent Manager If such a wiring is connected in makin
40. However the 60 day calculation result is not deleted semi permanently When is the replacement time of the back up battery in iPU In this model the battery needs no replacement How is the setting of centralized control address when the indoor unit is group controlled In case of group call the site set mode 30 of the remote controller and set every each indoor unit The same way of setting is applied in case the rate calculation for indoor unit is made and also HRV is group controlled Is it possible to use the watthour meter with pulse output other than that specified by Daikin No it is not Other than the watthour meter with conformed specifications cannot be used If the watthour meter with 1 pulse 10kWh pulse unit mistaken is connected is the calculated value right by allowing 10 times the distribution calculated value No it is not right Though the total of distribution calculated value is 1 10 one tenth the distribution calculation when the air conditioner is stopped is not 1 10 therefore there is no coincidence If the watthour meter for indoor unit is installed every each tenant how is the indoor unit distribution specified If the electric power of the indoor unit is to be distributed it is required to input the pulse to the iPU through the watthour meter with pulse output and specify the distribution Yes If the indication is only desired with the watthour meter every tenant the watthour m
41. Inspection Mode screen Access Restric All screens can be opened Registered Screens Only Notes Name must be unique Password 6 characters minimum recommended Remarks free Authority select all authorized items Screen access restriction select one only Screen names only in the case of Registered Screens Only selected above list all screen names insert lines if necessary i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 117 Workflow Overview Si72 301 8 3 2 3 8 Power Proportional Distribution exclusion Fill the data sheet with the exclusion parameters Power Proportional Distribution Exclusion Non Exclusion days YYYY MM DD Exclusion type if any Exclusion Interval Weekly Exclusion TNy A4 S a e P g slezlioliS olS MO 3 3 2 3 8 Ola Ig n I lt lt Q Q lt Notes NON Exclusion Days exception dates from weekly exclusion pattern list all dates when exclusion is not carried out free explanation also possible ex first Sunday of each month etc Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Off Special Exclusion Type All Day Inside Interval Outside Interval Exclusion Interval in function of Exclusion type All Day exclusion of complete day interval not filled Inside Interval exclusion only within bounds exclusion from HH MM to HH MM Outside Interval exclusion all day except within bounds exclusion EXCEPT from HH MM to HH M
42. S Schedule S History S Screen jump G Digital Input Output S Interlocking Emgcy S Data management S Power imit control FP Mng Gr G Ctrl Gr Alternating Screens List F Indoor Units P Digital Inputs P Digital Outputs P Mng point list FP 1st 2nd Floor P 3th 4th Floor P Outdoor Units P Meters P Digital Input Output Jo Control group list G 2nd Floor P Analogue Inputs F Free Layout S System am 10sec 20sec 30 sec ox D Cancel i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Select the screen to be reserved from the screen list and click the Add gt gt button to register it in the list of reserved screens To remove from the registered area click the Remove lt lt button Select the screen Switchover Time Interval from the radio buttons Finally click the OK button Click the Start button to activate the automatic circulation of screens in their registered sequence amp xal milo Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System mp xal lo Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back 2001 1 Piatti 16 4 Brun Mi stop Error W Com Error ll Maintain Back aoin Peay usr Main usr Report Restore Fire Pwr Limit Buzzer Pt Ctr
43. Then you can see the Automatically reboot checkbox in it could not find DefaultPassword in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows NT Current Version WinLogin though I tried to set automatic login DefaultPassword does not exist if you don t make it Please create the DefaultPassword key C Winnt Profile was not found though tried to make the short cut of VRV exe Please make a short cut from the Start menu Select Start menu Settings Taskbar and Start Menu select Advanced tab in Taskbar and Start Menu Properties And then you can make short cut of VRV exe and add to Start Menu it with Add button in Customize Start menu cannot make a connection between PC and iPU with ftp command ftp 192 168 0 1 Please confirm the following items Hardware Is the PC connected to the iPU with network cable via HUB Is the power supplied to HUB Is the iPU turned on Network settings Is the IP address of the PC set to 192 168 0 101 Did you previously change the IP address of the iPU lf you changed the IP address then please use the previous address cannot login to iPU with ftp Please confirm the user name and password in the Engineering Manual 4 4 Setting up the iPU Operating System p 71 The size of the os file was different in PC and iPU when finished sending the os file from PC to iPU Please
44. Windows style display so that anyone can easily manage and process data This helps the efficient management of your building E AIR NET Air Conditioning Failure Prediction Function Optional Warns of air conditioner trouble in advance thereby keeping the occurrence of sudden stops to a minimum As a general guide AIR NET notifies you of the possibility of trouble that could occur within approximately 24 hours This allows for the best operating condition of the equipment resulting in comfort and contributing to improved energy saving Having a Separate Contract for the AIR NET Service System The AIR NET Service System uses the latest advancements in data processing and communication technology to monitor the condition of your air conditioning system Daikin s unique On Line Diagnostic System not only helps to prevent problems before they happen it can also help you save energy and extend the operating life of your air conditioning system There are restrictions in applicable areas so consult with us separately for details 2 Design Guide Si72 301 2 System Image 2 1 System Image E An Overview of the intelligent Manager ECO21 System Remote Monitoring Via Modem Watch Dog Remote Monitoring Via LAN Sub PC AIR NET SERVICE SYSTEM Sig a Optional _ a jie are restrictions in applicable a y areas so consult with us separately for details ntelligent System Image Remote Access Via Modem R
45. YES NO Can be connected to iPU by replacing the HUB YES NO NO Replace the network cable Replace the HUB Check on the setting of PC and iPU iPU is defective Installation of OS has been failed Reinstall the iPU OS 307 After Installation Si72 301 2 14 Some of the Air Conditioners Have Communication Error Trouble contents Some of the air conditioners have communication error m Power for indoor unit is not supplied m Disconnection of D3 wiring m Disconnection of network cable of iPU m Faulty D3 port Supposed Causes Troubleshooting A N Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred Supply power for indoor unit indoor unit on the same D3 port has communicatio YES All indoor units on the same D3 port have communication error D3 port may be damaged or D3 wiring may be disconnected NO D3 wiring may be disconnected All indoor units on the same iPU have communication YES Network cable of iPU may be detached or disconnected or iPU may malfunction NO A problem with D3 wiring quality is suspected Inspect the problem with D3 checker or the like 308 Troubleshooting Si72 301 After Installation 2 15 An Communication Error is Displayed on the Screen of i Manager PC Trouble contents Supposed Causes Troubleshooting
46. because same name could stand for a Management Point or for a Control Group Management Point Control Group Action Time format is HH MM Action Type Start Stop RC Enable RC Disable Fan Cool Heat Set Point indicate temperature value C Output detection condition select one only Start Interval select one only indicate value in seconds if custom add remove lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 6 Emergency Stop programs As these programs can be easily modified by the customer a complete description is not required However the template data sheet is provided as a reference Fill one data sheet for each program Emergency Stop Program Name Input items Input Name Input Type Release Mode O r Ke aa Selected Output Listed points Unlisted Points Output events Output Name Output Type 116 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Notes Release Mode Automatic Manual Input amp Output Type because same name could stand for a Management Point or for a Control Group Management Point Control Group Selected output select one only add remove lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 7 User environment Fill one data sheet for each user Authority select Start Stop Setup Register Schedule Register Interlocking Register authorized items Emergency Stop Operate History Setup System Setup Central Con trol Register Users
47. disconnected Connect the communication cable Check again that the Airnet test run has been conducted properly 304 Troubleshooting Si72 301 After Installation 2 11 LEDs of DIll 1 2 3 and 4 is off or Lights Trouble contents LEDs of DIll 1 2 3 and 4 is off or lights When the device is communicating with air conditioner the LED is blinling m When iPU model name is DAM602A52 LED of DIII 3 and 4 is continuously off m When iPU model name is DAM602A53 LED of DIII 4 is continuously off Supposed Causes m The communication cable for air conditioner connected to the communication port corresponding to DIII NET is disconnected m Power for air conditioner connected to the communication port corresponding to DIII NET is not supplied Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred Communication cable for air conditioner is Wire the communication cable correctly Power for air conditioner is not supplied NO Supply power to the air conditioner connector set as master central control device inside iPU is disconnected Connect the connector set as master central control device Check again the model name of iPU Troubleshooting 305 After Installation Si72 301 2 12 Can Not be Connected to iPU Software Setting Trouble contents Can not be connected to iPU Software setting Sup
48. i72 301 lt iPU External View gt Power On Off switch Ethernet 10baseT connection RS232C connector for commissioning RS232C for central monitoring board communication RS232C connector for modem communication Indication LEDs 16 digital inputs DAM412A1 3x DIII net connection DAM411A1 2 relay contacts for malfunction indication R2 25 D 10 Detailed View of Attachment Hole 1 Electrical rating 1 Rated voltage Single phase AC 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 2 Power consumption Max 20 W 2 Conditions of Use 1 Power voltage variation 10 of rated value 2 Ambient temperature of use 10 to 50 C 3 Ambient humidity of use 0 to 98 However there must be no humidity 4 Storage temperature 20 to 60 C 3 Performance Insulation resistance Min 50 MQ at DC 500 V M 4 Mass 3 5 kg 5 Painting color light ivory 34 Design Guide Si72 301 System Architecture U PS UPS e g APC SU700 1000 series Item Leo Requirement Specification Capacity 200 250 W 20min Control signals Power failure signal from UPS http www apcc com products smart ups index cfm Smart UPS 1000 Part Number SULOOOINET Availability Latin America Eastern Europe Middle East Africa Western Europe Asia Australia South Pacific 230 Output 230 Inputs Estimated Part Number Availability Runt ime hrs mins Technical Specifications Latin America Esstern Forom Kiddle Fact
49. unit unit unit unit Earth leakage breaker C 1P 108833 1 1 59 Outdoor Temperature Sensor DIll Ai DAM101A51 Si72 301 Connecting and clamping the wiring Be Sure not to force Screws This may break them Names and functions of eac DIL NET Communication Terminal block X2M Terminal size M3 Always use round pressure terminals for wiring No polarity Multi purpose connector X2A See 2 3 for wiring method With polarity Outside air thermistor connector X1A Use the included thermistor Secure using the included clamping material Only secure the DIL NET k communication line using the included ferrite core small Secure the DI NET Communication line Outdoor temperature thermistor and multi purpose sensor lines using the included ferrite c Secure the DIII NET communication line Outdoor temperature thermistor and multi purpose sensor lin using the included clamp material with snaps D h part pol mna es Lb en Y ore Eee a Ee ee a a e es Power supply AC 200 240V Terminal block X1M Terminal size M3 Do not connect anything to the middle of the three terminals Always use round pressure terminals Secure the power line using the included Clamping material with snaps nock this part from utside the case using Screwdriver handle ttach the included ole bushing to
50. 101 255 255 255 0 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Note Installing the intelligent Manager system 1 Setting up the Identification e Click the Change button and input as in the table above the Computer Name PCM the Work Group DAIKIN e Click the OK button 2 Setting up the protocol The Default Gateway is empty e Click the tabulation Protocols select TCP IP Protocol entry and click the Properties button e Select the option Specify an IP address and input as in the table above 3 Click the OK button and restart the computer 4 3 2 Automatic start in Windows 2000 Note Important The intelligent Manager system is designed to run continuously However in case of trouble power failure etc it has integrated features to stop and restart in a safely and smoothly To do so Microsoft Windows 2000 system settings are needed to perform the following steps e Automatic Reboot e Automatic Logon e Automatic Start up Please refer to the Windows 2000 documentation manual for detailed setting procedure To perform this procedure user must have Windows 2000 administrator privilege 4 3 2 1 Automatic Reboot System Properties BE System Properties zixl Fie Edt View Help T SALAO Nits 2 Eoo Gena Perfomance Environment Accessibility Add Remove e ate Time i ispla Optio Programs Performance Environment Startup Shutdown Hardware Profiles UserProfiles Syst
51. 2 4 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 103 Saving and Loading a Configuration i72 301 7 Saving and Loading a Configuration Caution This operation will overwrite the currently loaded configuration DO NOT LOAD A CONFIGURATION WITHOUT SAVING THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION BEFOREHAND 7 1 Saving 7 1 1 Saving Initial Data After the configuration is completed save it for backup and possible reuse e When logged in intelligent Manager in Service Mode right click in the working area the popup menu displays e Select the Save Initial Data the configuration is saved in the VRV ini file 7 1 2 Saving Initial Data for Demo After the configuration is completed you can as well save it for demonstration purpose e When logged in intelligent Manager as system engineer right click in the working area the popup menu displays e Select the Save Initial Data for Demo the configuration is saved in the demo ini file 7 2 Loading Perform as explained Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 104 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview 8 Workflow Overview 8 1 Introduction This manual explains the workflow for a project using intelligent Manager on a site The aim is to give a global vision of the successive steps starting with the purchase decision and finishing with the actual operation of the intelligent Manager system Description of the necessary information are briefly enumerated As well temp
52. 26 0 Invalid OFF Permit Permit Permit Heating 273 Invalid OFF Permit Permit Pertnit 1 3 3 8 1 Monitoring air conditioners 1 3 3 8 2 Adjusting Pulse Input Measurement 1 3 4 Configuring the distribution schedule Caution 144 Si72 301 When setting up the system options of intelligent Manager application in Step 3 some attributes of the scheduling for operational distribution exclusion must have specific values e In the calendar the special days when distribution is performed no exclusion at all during each of these days e for every day of the week distribution exclusion option and period If an exclusion schedule is set the amount of consumed power is not equal to the amount of input pulse This is because indoor units consume power during distribution exclusion periods Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual Si72 301 Notes 2 Notes 1 Illegal reproduction of this document or of any part therein is strictly prohibited 2 Any part of this document may be changed in the future without prior notice 3 Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document However please do not hesitate to contact us in the case of any missing erroneous or unclear information 4 We take no liability for any loss etc resulting from customer misuse of our products failure to comply with the in structions contained in this manual repairs or modifications carried out by a third party other than
53. 8 4 Annual Calendar 218 The annual calendar is a calendar divided into 13 months from the first day of the starting month to the last day of the same month the following year It can be customized with any days of your choice such as holidays or special days The annual calendar requires periodical update If it is not updated a daily reminder that the calendar will run out after one month will appear during the final month before the calendar expires Furthermore on the day following the final day of the calendar the fact that the calendar has run out will be reported as an error To define the annual calendar it is possible to copy it from a base calendar click the Calender Copy button and select a Base Calendar from the list see above for Base Calendar management Then adjust if necessary the annual calendar by modifying its limits and the days as shown below The Modify Limits button will be enabled Click this button to carry out the setup on the annual calendar i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Schedule Settings x Yearly Schedule Setup Eney 9001 10 9001 11 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Calendar Copy 3lals5 Copy Day 2001 10 11 Copy Base Calendar Current Base Calendar r Calendar Calendar 1 2001 10 2002 9 10 11 12 Calendar Limit 2002 10 Modify 17 18 19 24 25 26 Day
54. Abnormal duration of continuous operation Communication error Abnormal communication state of DIIl Net Abnormal communication state of Sequencer Under maintenance Indicates that equipment is under maintenance Emergency stop Indicates control state of emergency stop i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 181 Operation Details i72 301 The icons indicating the control group display the representative states of management points belonging to the control group in descending order of priority Priority Stop lt Running lt Communication Error lt Equipment Malfunction Monitoring Error lt Under maintenance 5 2 2 Start Stop Operation 182 Start Stop operation can be performed only on management points for which there is a Start Stop Setting authority Please refer to 5 10 3 Configuring user Login p 245 intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a s xal Bi 9 o Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide Mng point list Indoor Units 1st 2nd Floor 2001 10 11 Thu 17 52 1st 2nd Floor WrFun B Stop Error W Com Error P Maintain 12 gt usr Level1 Wist Level2 Est Level2 Nor ra Start button NI pama zr NI a NI Fr e Setup 27 C LIEI q Setup 27 C LIE Levell Est3 Ez Setup 27 C Levell Est4 ae a Setup 27 C Liw2 Lewell Wst3 a Setup 27 C Level1 Wst4 aE
55. Acl Logging Missies ae a eta eeceeadeienseacwieiica 173 42 Cogon OUT anna acs 173 5 Operation Detalls sorresssieietes i ienris LE E ered N te 174 5 1 Moving Between SCIeen ccccccccccececcseeeecceeeeccceueeeceuseessaseessenseessees 174 5 2 Displaying Management Groups cccseecccsseeceeeeeeecaeeeessaeeesseeeeesees 177 5 3 Displaying Control Groups sieascteaerie tisdoceresidenAuedeeieheetasdene eae 190 5 4 Malfunction Display and History Management ccsscceseeeeeeeees 194 5 5 Emergency Stop Interlocking Control in case of fire ceeeeee eee 196 56 Graphical ROD OM seina a a aai 197 D IVI AGIING Dalda a eee tadaeivesen ai ees 207 5 8 Setting th SCNEGUIC resini s ani ei ae iiaa 215 S9 INTERMOCKING FUNCION ssie a etnies 227 5 10 SyStENT OPIN S ans E 237 5 11 Energy Saving FUNCIONS mssi S 260 5 12 Visual Navigatio ssop tertioasadineddused tigetdaubieiansietdaiendeeates 267 6 Datapase MalMeNaNC E canora anr E a 270 7s VFOUDISSHOOHING omeia ES 213 Model names and specifications or the like are subject to change without prior notice for fur ther improvement so be sure to confirm the following catalogues and engineering data i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 163 Before use Si72 301 1 Before use 1 1 The Features of intelligent Manager Most operations are possible by a mere click of the left mouse button Although intelligent Manager may be operated via keyboard input of c
56. Click on the Base Calendar button to display the dialogue shown below Create a Base Calendar and set the limits and the types of the days as shown below First decide on the range to be setup in the annual calendar Click the Change button to display the calendar setup range dialog box Use the buttons to modify the range of the annual calendar and click the OK button to apply the desired modification When the range is modified the overlapping portion before modification will be carried forward Other months will have initial state formats Initial state Only Sundays are set up as holidays From 2001 ihor To 2002 9 yyy OK Cancel New program Base Calendar Setting Calendar 1 m Calendar From 2001 10 1 To 2002 9 30 Change Zen 2001 10 2001 11 Sun Mon TueWedThu Fri Sat Sun Mon TueWedThu Fri Sat l t 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 Base Calendar Base calendar name Calendar range Calendar 1 2001 10 2002 9 Copy Delete Rename Edit 7 8 9 voi 12 13 f4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 f1 12 13 14 15 16 17 p20 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 28 29 30 31 25 26 27 28 29 30 Daf Type Setting OK Cancel Print Export 5 8 3 Creating a Schedule Program A schedule program may be given the name of your choice The name can be a row of up to 32 characters and must not ove
57. Daikin etc Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual 145 Notes Si72 301 146 Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual Si72 301 Part 4 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual 1 Introducing intelligent Manager Remote Options ccceseeeeeeeees 148 1 1 intelligent Manager Watchdog ccccccseeeseeeeeeeeneeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeneenes 148 1 2 intelligent Manager Remote ccccsssccssscesssecsseeeneneeseneesenersneneesens 149 Zs FRE QUIN GIMGIMS ioscan tesinure Restartatcrnit E E 150 2 1 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Watchdog 150 2 2 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Remote 150 3 Installing and Configuring the TAPI DeVICE ccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 151 4 Intelligent Manager Watchdog ccccceeecsseeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeneeesaeeneeeeaes 152 4 1 Configuring the Monitoring PC cccccceeccccseeeeceeeeeceeeeesseeeesseseeenees 152 4 2 Configuring the Watchdog PC cccccsccceccsseeeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeseeneeeeesnanees 154 5 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote ccccssscceeseeeeeseeeeeesneeeess 155 5 1 Configuring the Remote Access Facility cccsscccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 155 5 2 Configuring the Monitoring PC ccccccceeeeccsseeceeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeesees 157 5 3 Configuring the Remote PC cccccssssccesssseeeeeeseeeeseeseeeessseeeess
58. Exit Tenant 1 1 Fire Signal 43 Security Key Remove enant 4 Equipment4 Comment 5 Levell Est1 SmithRobet sd 6 Levell Est2 Shee 7 Levell Est3 AT 8 Levell Est4 2 WHMeter 1 faddess SSSC S S 3 WHMeter 2 Address 42 Water Pump Comments Telephone Comment Balance al Ok Cancel 2 Enter the personal information of the tenant its name name duplication is not allowed and its comments up to 4 arbitrary values 3 Select the points of this tenant from the Out list and click the lt lt button to add them to his In list click the gt gt button to remove them a management point can belong to more than one tenant 4 Click the OK button to validate this tenant The tenant with its personal information as well as the number of associated management points is displayed in a list as shown in the figure below 5 7 2 2 Modifying a tenant It is possible to modify at any time both the personal information of a tenant including its name as well as his management points configuration i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 209 Operation Details Si72 301 1 First select an existing tenant from the displayed tenants list then click the Modify button if no tenant has been selected an error message is displayed Tenant Setup Modify Tenant Fire Signal Security Key E quipment4 Levell Est1 Levell Est Levell Est3 Lexell E st4 WH Meter 1 WH Meter 2 oo Smith Robert bo Mi Ooo Oo on e
59. Level2 Est2 L2E2 Stop P Leyel2 Est3 L2E3 Start P Level2 Est2 L2E2 Stop P Level2 Est3 L2E3 Start P Level2 Est3 L2E3 Start P Level2 Est3 L2E3 Start Start Time Interval sec 0 10 20 30 Custom 20 ale Start Time Interval sec CO AG C 20C 30 C Custom 10 oma The figure above is an example of a link program that is running air conditioners in common areas along with the air conditioners that are running for certain tenants 15 Functions Si72 301 9 Fire Emergency Stop Program Emergency Stop Program Screen Emergency Stop Program Settings New program Input Output Modify Fire Signal Fire Levell Est1 L1E1 Levell Est2 L1E2 Levell Est3 L1E3 Levell Est4 LiE4 Levell V st1 L11 Levell V st2 L12 Levell V st3 LIW Levell Wst4 LIAA Level2 Est1 L2E1 Level2 Est2 L2E2 Level2 Est3 L2E3 Release mode r Stop Automatic Manual C Listed Points Unlisted Points OK Cancel The registration of management items to be targeted for emergency stop can be performed using either method of specifying the management item to stop or of making all management items targets for stopping and then specifying the management item that is out of range Facilities that are conformed to fire safety laws are exceptions This example figure shows the specification of management items not to stop when there is a fire that are not ta
60. MWieamum width dimensions Madmuam depth dimensions Het weight shipping weight Color Environmental Operating Temperature Operating Relative Humidity Operating Elevation mtorage Temperature storage Relative Humidity storage Elevation Audible noise at 1 meter from surface of urit Online thermal dissipation 420 Joules Full time multi pole noise filtering 0 4 EEF surge let through zero clamping response time meets UL 1449 4 20 inches 21 59 cm 6 70 inches 17 02 cm 17 30 inches 43 94 cm 41 20 lbs 18 56 kg 46 00 Ibs 20 91 ke Beige 0 40 C 32 104 F 0 95 0 10000 feet 0 3000 mi 15 45 C 5 113 F 0 95 0 50000 feet 0 15000 mi 41 dBA 100 BTU he Design Guide Si72 301 System Architecture 4 2 Confirmation of Watthour Meter For distribution of electric energy the integrating watthour meter with pulse transmitter is required It is important to confirm that the specifications coincide with each other and also to confirm with the division in charge normally electrical work division not air conditioning div 4 2 1 Specifications of watthour meter to be connected to intelligent Manager a To be an integrating watthour meter with pulse transmitter b The output pulse unit pulse weight is to be 1 pulse to 1kWh 1Wh pulse c The pulse width is to be within 40 to 400 milli sec d The mercury relay is to be used for pulse output and it to be no voltage outpu
61. Mng Pt Warning Displays integrated information of only Prints integrated information that is displayed warning management items 12 Design Guide Si72 301 Functions 6 Detailed History Display Allows management of history items such as starting the control of management error occurrence recovery status changes run stop etc and schedules You can select to display the information displayed on the Detailed Screen in real time or to display data saved to a file on the hard disk Data saved to a file is called saved data 100 items of information can be displayed on the History Details Screen at a time if using real time and you can search from 500 000 occurrences of saved data and display History Details Screen iManager File Menu Operation Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Guide 2000 4 11 Tue 22 59 F History pp Color Coded Time Name JID PORTIADDR Contents CODE iad oe 2000 4 11 00 13 26 System Connection completedThe start istory lype Confirms Deletes 2000 4 11 00 13 29 System Exit PC system ear I History Can cancel 2000 4111 00 20 32 System Connection completedThe start 2000 4411 00 20 35 System Exit PC system confirm status 2000 4 11 22 51 49 System Connection completedThe start BAU 4 11 22 59 25 Levell Est 1 0 0 1 00 Start e 20000 22 59 27 Levell Wst2 6 0 0 1 05 Start stop 2000
62. Monitors state of management points operation Saale abnormalities Monitors any time in excess of the management point continuous operation time setup Monitors any excess of the pre determined maximum minimum measured values of analog management points Displays information related to management points Displays each control group Displays the history of malfunctions detected in the system warnings conditions start stop operations Starts stops each management point individually Collects more than one management point together control group and performs collectively starts and stops a control group Sets up air conditioner operation mode fan cooling heating Sets up temperature of air conditioner Sets up air conditioner action mode via remote control instructions Resets air conditioner filter sign Sets up permission prohibition of user operation via centralized control equipment Carries out control of management points in accordance with a setup schedule Interlocks operation state error state etc of a given management point to control other management points and groups When the emergency signal is received carries out emergency stop control for emergency alert and to prevent spread of fire etc Carries out management point control in accordance with the state and setup before power failure when power is restored Deals with cumulative pulse values of electric power water gas meters
63. Operation Details intelligent Manager A schedule cannot be renamed when it is enabled First disable the schedule File Menu Operation Help a Sis k xal So Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide 2001 10 11 Thu 18 02 lt p usr Main Activation C Enable Disable Open list Program name Renewal date il Edit stati 2002 10 gi 2002 10 Create 2002 10 SIGH Copy Delete Rename Repon Edit Execute Schedule PrinvExport Restore Fire Wetaledimnta SEH System Base Calendar l 4E Pwr Limit Buzzer The schedule has been renamed 5 9 Interlocking Function e The interlocking function enables the cooperative action of the management points in accordance with the input conditions and output instructions defined by the interlocking program When monitoring changes of state in the management points if a change in setup state is detected in the input conditions relevant output instructions Start Stop are conveyed to the output management points e By means of the interlocking function Start Stop etc forwarded to more than one piece of equipment for interlocking when entering and exiting rooms key management interlocking etc may be carried out e When interlocking control is executed that operation is reported and registered in the history i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 22
64. Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock 2 Sis Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide ey Screen jump Screens List F Mng point list P Indoor Units P Digital Inputs P Digital Outputs P Meters F 1st 2nd Floor P 3th 4th Floor P Outdoor Units P Analogue Inputs P Digital Input Output G Control group list IG 2nd Floanar z P Mng Gr G Ctrl Gr F Free Layout S System sites Auto Alternation Register Start P lndoor Units P Digital Inputs P Mng point list 5 1 3 Automatic Circular Sequence 2001 10 11 Thu 16 46 usr Main openlist Wetaledinta Bepon 6 Restore Fire 2E Pwr Limit Buzzer Pre registered multiple screens may be displayed and made to switch over at a pre determined frequency Click the Register button to display the following dialog ir LJ Screen jump FA Screens List PF Mng point list F Indoor Units F Digital Inputs P Digital Outputs F Meters F 1st 2nd Floor P 3th 4th Floor PF Gutdoor Units F Analogue Inputs F Digital Input Output G Control group list ial Yond Floor F Mng Gr 176 G Ctrl Gr d Screens Alternation Screens List G 3rd Floor G 4th Floor G 1st Floor G Digital Inputs G Digital Outputs G group 1 F Site View F 1st Floor S System setup
65. Screen Ju Site EY Button Mame m Auto Site View Button Size Large p Destination Screen Regular Small oae Select Size 6 5 2 3 5 Deleting a component Select a component icon auxiliary information or button and click the Delete entry in the pull down menu Perform cautiously as Undo action is not available 6 5 2 3 6 Modifying a component 98 Select a component icon auxiliary information or button and click the Modify entry in the pull down menu The same dialogue as creation is used However the designated point group for icons and auxiliary information or screen for button cannot be changed i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual i72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application 6 5 2 3 Adjusting components arrangement e Select a reference component icon etc then select the alignment option and the components to be arranged Component Arrangement Dialogue Select the target a component icon etc Select reference component icon etc Align Top Execute Command Align Bottom 6 6 Saving the Configuration After the configuration is completed save it for backup and possible reuse e Right click in the title screen the popup menu displays e Select the Save Initial Data the configuration is saved in the VRV ini file and or e Select the Save Initial Data For Demo the configura
66. Screen immediately after start up In the case of manual start up double click on the intelligent Manager icon of the desktop or select intelligent Manager from the Start Menu I a a 4 TA M De r th Soh See TEs P ey Zat 8 i p3 z lt 7 A et a A REIA G so Pat i608 Double click on the icon Select intelligent Manager i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 171 Starting and Stopping Operation of intelligent Manager i72 301 3 2 Stopping Operation up to Power Supply OFF Turning off the PC power supply must be done in two stages exiting intelligent Manager and exiting Windows To exit intelligent Manager Select Exit intelligent Manager from the File Menu Warning Youre about to exit the master PC intelligent Mananer Gaim henu Operation For safe operation the master PC should always be running Please restart within one day Tiel Are you sure A dialog box will be displayed as shown above Click on the Exit button to exit intelligent Manager As the system is intended to operate constantly if exited it should be restarted within one day Windows NT can then be exited 3 3 Power Failure Management Automatic Stop Restart 172 The intelligent Manager is designed for continuous operation Therefore automatic shutdown is carried out in the case of power failure lasting more than about 10 minutes As well automatic restart can be carried out when th
67. Start Remote Access Service entry the Start Remote Access Service dialogue appears e Enter the Server Name the current value should be correct then click the Ok button e End of procedure 158 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual i72 301 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote 5 3 Configuring the Remote PC 5 3 1 Configuring the Remote Access Service See detailed procedure above 5 3 2 Installing the intelligent Manager Remote software Install similarly as with the main intelligent Manager software as sub PC refer to the Engineering Manual for details e Configuring the remote PC data perform as explained in 5 1 Configuring the PC data e In the System Mode select the Remote PC option Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual 159 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote i72 301 5 3 3 Testing the connection Accessores SA Dial U p Networking Programs Documents Y Dial Up Networking x G The phonebook is empty Press OK to add an entry Ne Phonebook Entry Wizard Dial Up Networking connects you to remote networks using your modem ISDN or other WAN adapter This wizard helps you create a phonebook entry that stores the settings needed to connect to a particular remote network Settings Find Name the new phonebook entry jiManager Remote Help Run T know all about phonebook entries and would rather edit the properties directly Shut Dow
68. State Reason for execution Schedu Intermittent operation control Outdoor unit capacity control Period 1 ti p Timezone 10 00 Schedule 2 Period fis Timezone 10 00 Disabled Disabled 1 12 RER 18 00 E 8 18 00 Disabled Disabled 31 12 ERR 31 PrintiExport cana Design Guide Si72 301 Functions E Temperature Limit Provides the appropriate operation management by limiting the maximum and minimum temperatures intelligent Manager allows users to put limitations on the maximum and minimum room temperatures and ensures an appropriate room temperature via automatic control Flexible group configuration intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Guide Connection completed Now starting PC system Ver2 0 Rev58 2001 1141 5 Thu System setup usr 4 h Main Version Information iPU Ver2 0 Rev58 2001 10 15 Pc Ver2 0 RevS8 2001 10 15 Temperature Limit _ LOS x Groups Group Contents Available Mng Points 10F Office 1 10F Office 2 10F Office 3 nvironment j Other Settings Set Login Management Points Temperature Limit Group aidd Automatic Control Automatic Change Over J Sliding Temperature Restore Fire Aiz Temperature Limit WZ Pwr Limit Buzzer 9F Meeting Room 1 9F Meeting Room 2 9F Meeting Room 3 SF
69. Stop checkbox Filter sign Start Stop clear checkbox A Prohibited Operation ee C Auto C Fan Ci Stoo Wri fe Peraiited Temperature setting Operation wode checkbox f Petite f Proniaited set Temperature f Pennie Pronbibed In Maintenance Maintenance checkbox Timer Extension Timer Extension Cc ok D gt Cancel Note An asterisk after the operation mode indicates that the system is in defrost state The following setup is then possible The items that may be set up will vary according to air conditioner compatibility e Start Stop If the Setup check box has been checked Start and Stop will be enabled and can therefore be selected The same setup can be performed as in P182 5 2 2 Start Stop Operation e Operation Mode Setup Check the Setup check box to enable the modes to be set up Select the desired Operation Mode 186 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details e Fan Speed and Direction Setup Check the Setup check box to enable the fan speed and direction options Select the desired intensity and direction of airflow e Timer Extension Check the Timer Extension check box to display the setup items of 2 hours limitation control operation this indoor unit will be stopped automatically 2 hours after start Select Timer Ex tension On Off e Clear Filter Sign If the filter sign appears the Clear check box will be automatically enabled Check this box
70. TE Ea 4E p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C fig LIE4 Lid L2N1 L22 Pwr Limit Buzzer The Table View dialog box is displayed i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 189 Operation Details Table View Ea Indoor Unit indoor Statistics Di Do Dio Fi Mng pointname Status Mode Temp rc Level1 Est1 Level1 Est2 Level1 Est3 Level1 Est4 Leyel1 VVst1 Level1 VWst2 Level1 Vst3 Level1 Vst4 Level2 Est1 Leyel2 Est2 Level2 Est3 Level2 Nor1 Level2 Nor2 Level2 Nor3 Leyel2 Vst1 Level2 Wst2 Leyel2 VWWist3 PrintvExport Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling Cooling emp PC Set PointPc Filter Sign kiii 27 oar 27 ii 27 aad 27 ae 27 tad 27 ae 27 hiiia 27 TEE 27 ad 27 Current Screen All Mng Pt Si72 301 Output Print Export Print Out C Export Siete hea Ocio G O Oa O GeO a O Cancel Click on the Print Export button to print the detailed information on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file The following data for each management point may be checked via this function e Current state operation set temperature etc And as well except for Ai and Pi e Total cumulative num
71. Troubleshooting Despite the test run of DIII Ai has been conducted in the i Manager test run an communication error is displayed on the screen of i Mager PC m Power supply for DIII Ai is turned off m The communication wire between iPU and DIII Ai is disconnected m Incorrect setting of DIII NET address for DIII Ai AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred Power supply for DIII Ai is turned off YES Supply power 200 to 240 VAC The communication wire between iPU and DIII Ai is disconnected YES a l Connect the communication wire of DIII NET correctly ncorrect setting of DIII NET address for DIII Ai The set address differs from that of DIII NET entered during iPU test run YES Het the address correctly Only the communication with DIII Ai is impossible while the communication between the air conditionig unit and i Manager is normal the DIII Ai may malfunction Check that the microcontroller normal LED green is blinking 309 After Installation Si72 301 2 16 The Temperature Detected by DIII Ai in i Manager Test Run Can Not be Monitored Properly Trouble contents The temperature detected by DIII Ai in i Manager test run can not be monitored properly Refer to the previous page for the case of communication error The tolerance of outdoor air temperature detected by DIII A
72. Type Setting SS C Clear Schedule Calendar Note Weekly Schedule will not be cleared Harmnal OTT al Weekly Schedule Setup 0123465 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617 18192021 222324 Sun Modify Mon Tue Wed E Start Sto 7 RC Enable Expiration Setup x H RC Disable moe Made 2002 10 Multiple OK Cancel Cancel When the Modify Limits button is clicked the dialog box will be displayed as above In the screen of the above figure the annual calendar setup is shown at the top and the weekly schedule setup below A 13 month setup is possible for the calendar from the first day of the starting month to the last day of the same month the following year In the case of the above figure this is from 1 December 1998 to 31 December 1999 By clicking the previous month Prev and the next month Next buttons the month before or after the month on current display will be shown i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 219 Operation Details i72 301 Next individual day types weekday holiday special day can be set up Schedule Settings Clock 1 Yearly Schedule Setup Fey 2001 10 2004 11 Copy Day 2001 10 11 nue Calendar Limit as e 17 2002 10 Modify gez kd g Ai 22 23 24 _Day Type Setting we a 7 7 le Weekly Schedule Setup OS 2 eas ee ees Slates ey a e ane ee zeae SUM Moin Mon
73. VRV Setup Tool Important The initialization file should already be in the execution folder set in the PC settings above and its name VRV ini However in case of intelligent Manager Demo the name should be demo ini Note You can also import an existing configuration of management points click in the Management Points File frame the Load button and specify the path to a management points file extension bpd Loading Saving points list can be done in MS Excel csv format however this format does not support loading of Management Control groups neither D3 ports configuration Note Repeat the above procedure for each iPU switch it Off then On to update its internal settings ee intiat Data Creation Tool TAJI OR Tre In Fle Rind Weneyge wer Pints file vert Wek lhis zelis reservec tor use vuz sercing G Ming FL C Cbl Gr C32 Pul i ad Sa Lia sa naraz r7 Ssutho ty ory a P pase ar KOT use nany nthe as as Type emer Dnt e NTT Aperat rn saty m id NOT h Inng r Xina leran A 1 y 1 guarane D inn Ter ana y t Ounce Ter an B1 1 D3innst Teran B2 Ww Pazeened didi riea AHY cnartist 1 IXinn r leran I O3innzt Ter anzC 2 3 1 5 Z DAnnar Tur an C aj Ver Revi6 Exit D3 Toran E 2 it 8 LA nn t ricali AHY cnartznd Miinn r Mire 1 ma gt _ gee sats SET D E EE EA oo E E Bae aannoo sfae ws MID ey ra a 4 Y k E le R ol mia i Mnz Poins zet
74. a ez T Operation on the sub PC is identical as on the master PC except the functions of the System menu which are not available on the remote PC g Therefore refer to the intelligent Manager Operation Manual for details of functions Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual 149 Requirements Si72 301 2 Requirements 2 1 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Watchdog The PC for the remote watchdog application requires the following e PC and system requirements same as in Engineering Manual however network connection is NOT required no network connection used between the monitoring PC and the Watchdog e A serial port COM e TAPI device Modem with a minimum speed of 33600 bauds 2 2 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Remote The PC for the remote access application requires the following e PC and system requirements same as in Engineering Manual however network connection is NOT required network connection between the monitoring PC and the remote PC is emulated over a telephone line e A serial port COM e TAPI device Modem with a minimum speed of 33600 bauds 150 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual Si72 301 Installing and Configuring the TAPI Device 3 Installing and Configuring the TAPI Device This step is common to the monitoring and the remote PCs for both intelligent Manager Watchdog and intelligent Manager Remote ices is 3 Find Fast Fonts
75. a Feriod K Co Day Evening hr min hr min l Sun S a afe jo 7 24 f0 M Mon F S fe ofe oHe 24 f o Tue C is afe jo k pa f0 Biro 2 g eS ee Eio ee jo elfo fea ffo Ba 2 o g CHAER fea f fo rsa C r jo en 2 a Check the Exclusion Time setup day check box Use the radio buttons to select the day time zone option whole day within the time zone or outside of the time zone and set the time zone if necessary with the buttons Special Day Setting usual format Calendar can be set up with special days for which the exclusion time zone setup does not apply Click on a date to set it up as a Special day to be displayed in red Clicking again cancels the setup i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Example of setup screen Electric Power Proportional Division special Fee Days Normal Pattern 2001 year Dec Special Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri a 4 5 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 21 2A 25 26 ef 28 Exclusion Period Normal Pattern All i idlorning Day Pete Evening C Sun C 30 31 min Hr min g S fo A NE rao A e 7 JO e off z O 16 feo z l ie 16 69 z gt o he HEF jo ffo a e flo f Print Export Ok Cancel Click the OK button to validate the setup content Clicking the Cancel button invalidates the setu
76. alarms and warning are displayed e Heating Mode Optimization when set point is reached in heating mode indoor unit is switched off 80 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool 5 3 3 Configuring the General Purpose Digital Input Output points Click and input the tabs e Common see above e Monitoring see above e Measure see above e Other Resume Mode when power is restored after failure which action for this equipment Restore state as before If any schedule reactivate accordingly Start Stop do nothing Operation in the power supply state should this equipment run under UPS or not 5 3 4 Configuring the Internal Digital Input points Click and input the tabs e Common see above e Monitoring see above e Measure see above e Contact Used Mode always use Normal Contact Point Type circuit state option A type is On closed Off open B type is Off closed On open 5 3 5 Configuring the Internal Digital Output points Click and input the tabs e Common see above e Monitoring see above e Measure see above e Contact Used Mode see above e Other Operation in the power supply state see above i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Mng Point Attributes M ronnef Ads f R S Mng Point Attributes po po Ponore site pst m NoName aa o2 BIPS Ini
77. at which an action is executed is set up e Action Any of the following Start Stop Operation Mode Temperature Setup Remote Control permitted prohibited Timer Extension may be displayed as instructions Please refer to 5 2 4 Setting up equipment p 184 for detailed explanation of these actions Click the button corresponding to the day on which the schedule is to be set up ex Monday and then click the Modify button as shown below Action Setup x Clock 1 Schedule Settings x Clock 1 m Yearly Schedule Setup Action Calendar Available Mng Point Ctrl Group Pra 2001 10 2001 11 Next Mon P Mng Point G Ctrl Group Calendar C aly Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat _ Calendar Copy _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 Copy Day 2001 10 11 ia 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 6 7 8 9 10 Calendar Limit j E 15 16 17 g 20 MEM 12 MEM ia is 16 a7 7002 0 _Modity_ A 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 27 2223 24 Day Type Setting ay 29 2037 AJ 26 27 28 29 30 rset na Ol Specie Weekly Schedule Setup 01234 5 67 8 9 101112131415 161718192021 222324 on Hours az f Minutes ol E Acin pea Pointe C Start amp Stop C RC Enable RC Disable P EAN bier Fan Cool C Heat Setpoint 2 es Ae rri A Eighe Indoor Uni
78. button when you stop deleting If the parameters are correct then go ahead for data deletion e check the Delete Data box the Delete button is now enabled as shown below B Database Maintenance Tool There are data from 20007 57 9 to 20007 9111 inthe databases When data previous from 2000 1 1 are deleted the databases size are as follows Current 1 1M6 After delete 1 118 Please push the Delete button to delete data from the databases Please push the Cancel button when you stop deleting Database Maintenance Tool i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 271 Database Maintenance Si72 301 Step 6 click the Yes button the result message displays as below Database Maintenance Tool Ed G Data previous from 20007 1 7 ware deleted from the databases Step 7 Click the OK button End of procedure 272 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Troubleshooting 7 Troubleshooting What to be careful of and what to do when operations cannot be performed Depending on the type of problem related to Windows NT or Windows 2000 or the internal working of the system the present system might display an error message window of total operation inability Warning If this happens part of the data cumulative values etc may be lost Furthermore once intelligent Manager has been shut down the error message display area is cleared If the following troubleshooting strategies have been carried out and probl
79. cancel the modifications and leave the Graphs setting unchanged 202 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 6 4 Drawing a graph 5 6 4 1 Selecting a graph Select the graph to be drawn Click on the Select Graph button to display the list of available graphs as shown below if Graph Selection x Available Graphs Graph Mame Ys Commemt Graph Operation tes Select a graph in the list and click the OK button to update current selection To exit the dialog without updating the current selection click on the Cancel button 5 6 4 2 Selecting a period Select the period for which the data have to be displayed This can be a One Day period a Two Days period a One Month period or a free Period Use the option button to select the period type as shown below Period C Oneday One month From uae E i Draw Graph C Twodays F Period To 2000 f E ESPEN Herter Input the date or month the starting date or the start and end dates according to the period type in the corresponding fields YYYY MM DD Use the lt lt Prev and Next gt gt buttons to remove or add one day to the date or starting date in the case the period is a one day or a two days period i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 203 Operation Details Si72 301 Use the lt lt Prev and Next gt gt buttons to remove or add one month to the month in the case the period is a one month period Note e A One Day p
80. condition 2 as follows Check in the Control Group screens that e the input management points and control groups of the program do not fulfil the condition e the output management points and control groups of the program are not in the output state Change the state of the input management points and control groups of the program to fulfil the condition this change can be performed either by operating intelligent Manager or by having the E I operate the relevant equipment Check in the Control Group screens that e the input management points and control groups of the program fulfil the condition e the output management points and control groups of the program are in the output state 6 7 5 Checking the Emergency Stop programs Important 102 This procedure checks each emergency stop program The basic emergency input signals are the fire alarm and the power failure see explanation of specific checking procedures for these programs below This procedure can be performed only when the checking of all management points and control groups of the emergency stop programs has been successfully performed Therefore double check of the state of equipment by the E I is no longer required 1 Login in intelligent Manager under system engineer user 2 For each emergency stop program perform checkup as follows e 2 1 Check in the Control Group screens that All the input management points of the program are stopped the outp
81. controller In the case of Set Temperature of the Remote controller restriction is set to prohibited the set point of the indoor unit cannot be changed from the remote controller Please confirm the setup dialog of the management point After set the set point of the indoor unit it is soon changed automatically to another set point In the following case set point setting is limited The set point restriction is set for the indoor unit The indoor unit is controlled by Sliding Temperature or other automatic control Data Management cannot see any data by TenantReport Did you create the tenants and add the related management points to tenant by TenantSetup Otherwise you cannot see any data by TenantReport made a tenant and added management points to the tenant but cannot see data on TenantReport Is the database of iManager included some data Please confirm the data in the database by DBConv exe Until 1 00 AM in the following day when iManager was initially installed no data is stored in the database Please check the data after 1 00 AM the following day PPD kWh meter value does not increase on iManager screen although the kWh meter value of the actual kWh meter has increased Please confirm the following items The pulse signal port of kWh and Pi port of the iPU are connected Are the Pi port number of the iPU and the port number of management point the same Is the pulse width of t
82. data Reply from Reply from Reply from teply from L bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes 32 time lt i16ms time lt 1Hms TTL time lt 16ms TTL time lt 1Ums TTL Failure Success If the ftp connection succed then load the os file as explained in the installation section If it failed then proceed to 2 Serial Connection e step 1 check that the serial cable complies with the specifications below e step 2 check that the iPU power is ON and that the jumpers JP5 amp JP6 are connected 124 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Important Note Important Note Note Perform the check of sub iPUs first Connect only one iPU to the hub at a time during OS installation A serial and ftp port communication tool is needed for this procedure The standard accessories of Wintows NT Hyperterminal for the serial communication and Telnet for the ftp communication can be used In this case the communication speed should be set to 9600 bauds and the Flow Control option is None As an alternative the freeware Teraterm is an other possible tool for serial and ftp communication but must be installed separately 1 Connect the installation PC to the iPU e 1 A Connect the iPU serial connector D sub 25 pins to the installation PC D sub 9 pins with a RS232C serial cable cable specifications D sub 9 pins female D sub 25 pins male crossed type e 1 B Connec
83. device with the lid open y 4 Above Indentations T for screw holes The installation orientation CJ for the device is set A te aly Do not insta e device X upside down NN ULY PCB ASSY _ W Y NN N The lead line length for the Outside thermometer is approximately 50 cm from the bottom of the device 2 2 Wiring connections D There are 4 types of wiring for the device Specifications for electric wiring used Remarks ver suppl voltage ma 0 207 VE Sheathed vinyl cord or cable 0 75 1 25mm up to total extension 2000m No polarity Total extension length 1500m when using shield wire External temperature Sensor 5 Je DC 0 5V sensor can be connected Multi purpose sensor When extending the included harness max 15m procured locally Use the included sensor System wirin The DIL NET communication line connecting the device should be no greater than 64Gr including the device External The DIL NET communication addresses Temperature DI A I which can be used are 1 00 to 4 15 Intelligent Processing Unit sensor DAM101A51 Vemma DAMAS1 52 53 Outdoor unit DI NET Communication LN Outdoor X2M XIM unit X1A X2A Fl F L N Do not clamp 10A simultaneously AC 200 240V with powerful Multi purpose power consumption Fae Indoor edie a wiring sensor max 10W
84. engineering stages as explained below by clicking the top menu buttons Caution Always connect to the master iPU Never connect directly to a sub iPU 1 3 3 2 Initializing the engineering data Click the Initialize Data button of the top menu The Data Initialization screen displays This procedure automatically scans the installed indoor and outdoor units and recognizes their addresses When engineering the system for the first time click the Initialize All Data button Caution Clicking the Initialize All Data button will reset all the previously created distribution configuration data This button should be used precociously Note The list on the right side of the window is intended only for ice storage equipment Normal A C equipment is not to be displayed in this list 138 Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual Si72 301 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution 1 3 3 3 Adjusting the iPU time BCU Trial Setup Date Initialize seu vate f Setup Unit ell Bips 1 Ver 5 002 Setup Group Confirm Monitor BIPS Time 200000515 13 23 Transmit Arbitrary Time PC Time 200010515 13 23 Transmit PC Time Time Setup Ei Mm fe oe fis fiz fs oo Eeey tidad HH mm 22 Cancel Click the SetupTime button of the top menu The Setup Time screen displays This procedure adjusts the iPU time either from the PC time or from an arbitrary entered time Click
85. few minutes usually about 10 minutes check that Windows NT on the monitoring PC shuts down and that the Restart button is displayed on the screen e After another few minutes check that the UPS turns OFF and that the iPU stops To check the power restore procedure e Plug back the UPS power supply e Check that the UPS the iPU and the monitoring PC turn ON e Check that the monitoring PC automatically logs in and that the intelligent Manager software restarts e Check that a Power Restore Alarm is displayed in the intelligent Manager History screen of the monitoring PC e Check on the management points that power restore procedure performs as explained above in 2 2 4 6 7 5 2 Checking the Fire Breakout Clearance Alarm procedure This procedure performs checkup for alarm of both fire breakout and clearance To check the fire breakout procedure e Switch the fire alarm signal ON the switch must be operated manually in order to double check the wiring e Check that the monitoring PC buzzer sounds e Check that a Fire Breakout Alarm displays in the intelligent Manager History screen of the monitoring PC e Check that equipment stop as explained in 2 2 2 To check the fire clearance procedure e Switch the fire alarm signal OFF e Check that a Fire Clearance Alarm displays in the intelligent Manager History screen of the monitoring PC e Check on the management points that fire clearance procedure performs as explained above in 2
86. fixed in intelligent Manager The checkbox Ignore Auto Shutdown in the option frame of the PC setting tool must be OFF Case 2 intelligent UPS software controlled A a Shutdown Procedure Wait 16 min Normal state UPS ON z Power Save iPU data Stop intelligent Manager Failure Wait 22 min Wait 3 min c Shutdown PC Wait 3 min Power Turn UPS ON Restore Restore iPU state No interlocking control 10 min Restart PC amp intelligent Manager Turn UPS OFF D UPS Controlled by Soft These parameters are configurable figure shows needed values A to D The checkbox Ignore Auto Shutdown in the option frame of the PC setting tool must be ON UPS Wiring and Configuration Procedure Caution The internal Di 1 of the iPU is dedicated to UPS operation Power Failure signal output from UPS Therefore no management point should be created manually for the internal Di 1 terminal Furthermore this management point is not visible on intelligent Manager screens i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 129 Workflow Overview Si72 301 Note In the case of intelligent Manager shutting down due to a power failure the Windows NT will be shut down as well as the PC if available in the BIOS whatever the settings done in 5 1 Configuring the PC for the check boxes Shutdown Mode and Power Down Mode Case 1 Non intelligent UPS 130 aa E 2 Intelligent Manager system co
87. for detailed installation procedure 6 4 3 Setting up the Jump buttons and Automatic circulation sequence These procedures set the screens accessible by direct jump or automatically displayed by the Automatic circulation sequence For this operation refer to the User Manual 6 4 4 Setting the basic screen properties This procedure set the properties of the main window of intelligent Manager Select the entry Setup Title Screen the Basic Screen Information dialogue box appears Select the window size option refer to the PC screen resolution for pixel information to display the guide messages constantly during operation check the Show Guide Bar box to fix the position of the window on the screen check the Lock Window box and enter the position of its Origin in pixels from the top left corner of the screen 6 4 5 Associating a background picture This procedure sets the picture that remains associated with the title screen of intelligent Manager 1 Select the entry Setup Title Screen the Screen Information dialogue box appears 2 Enter the Title of the screen that will display in the Screen Jump list See below 3 Select the Screen Background File option 3 1 No Background the title screen is empty however on delivery a default screen is displayed 3 2 WMF file 3 2 1 Click the Load button to select a file Windows Metafile to be displayed as title screen the Windows File Open dialogue box appears
88. format files As cell size and arrangement are similar to those of a control group refer to 5 10 2 Configuring Control Groups p 242 238 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operational Procedure Management Group Configuration I Indoor Units he 1st 2nd Floor i 3th 4th Floor Digital Outputs Analogue Inputs i Outdoor Units Indoor Units Digital Inputs Digital In Meters Digital Ou Analogue Outdoor Selection Select the management group to which the group to be created will belong Operation Details Click on the Print Export button to print on the system printer or export to a text file either the currently selected group or all the groups Enter the group name and click the OK button S creen Group Registration Pwo SSS A warning box will appear at the time of the first operation Click the OK button to proceed with the operation or the Cancel button to cancel it The new group will then be displayed in the management group structure The level of this group in the tree structure can be modified by clicking the Level Up and Level Down buttons i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 239 Operation Details 240 As well the position in the sub tree can be modified by clicking the Up and Down buttons HM anagement Group Configuration Management Groups Structure Management Group Content Available ting Points Mng
89. gt unit unit if optional D3 Pi are used they must be connected on the port 4 D3 port 2 Pi3 Extension D3 port 3 o Extension Address Addr xs 4 00 4 07 Although most of the distribution configuration is carried out by using the dedicated engineering tool some configuration steps are performed during the configuration of the intelligent Manager system e in Step 1 for intelligent Manager system and management point attributes this step should have been already performed in Step 1 e in Step 2 for distribution scheduling for operational execution the days and hours where distribution is performed must be set up this step can be performed later when configuring the intelligent Manager application in Step 2 136 Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual i72 301 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution 1 2 Setting up the iPU Connections Setting up the Pulse input units Pi To set the measurement of the pulse input in accordance with the intelligent Manager software computation function the following steps must be performed e Set the pulse constant e Set the pulse meter initial value 1 3 Configuring the Distribution The remainder of this chapter reviews the settings required for the distribution Please refer to the related documentation for detailed explanation 1 3 1 Setting up the intelligent Manager system When setting up the intelligent Manager system in
90. i72 301 Y DAIKIN Faahi MANUAL i intelligent Manager RSE ew ny iks UUTE a mi ne ok ay Poss ik tL iE Qe fie nay E z e i if s ilo TE y teh tag E DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD Si72 301 Part 1 Design Table of Contents 1 10 11 12 CUS sdiccia A AAEE i SV Em OV CN VIC W ieira S 2 EI OVEN EWS E a sean tueseea us anaimeedan uactacmune eee 2 t2 se UCIT CS oaran E A a aay esau A 2 OV SION 6 ese arssiecat once so rad iaeuiastacee dane aesac devon saeeaueieieraeeiaccensaieneass 3 2A Oy Sem IMAG Caressa rag aie eee ie Aa T 3 22 SEES ANG COMPONE crei aea A a E A 3 FUNCIONS ooa E aa 4 Sel Eocal Functions araisa a E 4 32 PASIE FUNCIONS aera a A 5 3 3 Upgrade ECO2T ver2 FUNCIONS niri aici eee 24 SV SEM Al CHING CUM E orr what tava dadanvemmasavalentntoa en nahanebues jane weetiays 33 4 1 Requirement Spec and the Recommendation of Other Equipment 33 4 2 Confirmation of Watthour Meter ccccceeceseeeteseeeeeeseueeseeeteneeeeeetaues 37 VV IMIG WM AOC anana teen tal eentidboeveteet cabana caueeialaten dat vende aivinet eeuemicene 38 Dal SVStent CONNECCION cansassi n hi cadet added uel aS 38 52 Wing DiagraM sssr O 40 53 Wiring SDeCINCATIONS sasien a ctcana eae laletious 41 SENO UD ene ieesis cece eens cusewssneacanesedcaos ceasenehecacdeusc 42 6 1 PRECAUTIONS tOr DOU Divi aiwconcdniujesecadaia a aan a teipin 42 62 Summary Of Attachment seee E ae 42
91. ina ee 7 ZOBIMHMsOKH EL BRRR PARRA RARER RE SP BRVPRVVVVVHVVVMByS fees ESS e If necessary create a group e Click the Create Group button the Group Name Setup dialogue displays e Select the type of group intelligent Manager makes use only of the Normal type and does not support ice storage type enter the name of the group then click the Ok button the dialogue closes e Select a group from the list then click the Edit Group button the Power Group Edition dialogue displays Select ports from the Available and Registered Power Ports list and click the lt lt and gt gt buttons to add and re move them in this group Select units from the Available and Registered Indoor Units list and click the lt lt and gt gt buttons to add and re move them in this group unconnected units are grayed out and can not be selected Select the Special Setup option whether or not to perform automatic power distribution for equipment with con stant consumption type HRV General Purpose Adapter e Click the Special Setup button the Special Setup dialogue displays e Select the Yes or No option Click the Register button the Power Group Edition dialogue closes e End of group configuration Availability of power groups is as follows internal 1 3 extension 1 16 Moreover with the additional DIII board 16 pi points are available a c address is 4 00 to 4 15 of Dill port 3 Power Proportional Dist
92. management item icon flashes and the alarm is displayed in the history You can set a buzzer notification of the occurrences of errors and have the printer automatically printout of the contents of errors Management points 1 indoor unit 1 item The number of management items of equipment connected to DIII NET with the total number of air conditioners is 256 per 1 iPU unit When expanding to the maximum number 1024 items when 4 iPUs are connected The number of management items can be fewer than those listed above depending on the number of outdoor unit in the air conditioning system Refer to our D BACS Design Guide for details regarding the method for connecting air conditioners to DIII NET and the restrictions on the number of units 2 Cumulated Value Upper Limit Monitoring Prints a warning with the daily report of the contents when the cumulated values of the operating time and the start stop count exceed the set upper limit values The Result General standards for maintenance of the facility s equipment and replacement periods are clarified therefore allowing for planned maintenance thereby enabling you to expect a reduction of overall maintenance costs 3 Continuous Operating Time Limit Monitoring Displays a fault when a single continuous operating time for the facility equipment exceeds the set upper limit You can set the buzzer to ring and or the printer to automatically print when an error occurs You can set
93. minimum 400 MHz Intel Pentium or later Operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 or NT 4 0 with service pack 4 and above including Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 service pack 2 and above Minimum free space on the hard disk for the program and the database files 1 Gbyte is recommended RAM at least 64 Mb however 128 is recommended Network connection a 10Base T connector and an Ethernet adapter Note The actual space required on the hard disk and in memory depends on the configuration 2 3 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Demo The simulation application requires the following 64 Processor same as above Operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 or NT 4 0 service pack 4 and above however Windows ME and Windows 98 can be used without official support Minimum free space on the hard disk as above RAM as above Network connection none however a local loop back is needed i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Wiring 3 Wiring 3 1 Wiring the iPU Connections The indoor units and other equipment of the buildings communicate with the iPU via the DIII NET lines Internal Pulse Input points Internal Digital Input points and Internal Digital Output points Please refer to their respective documentation for detailed wiring instructions Important When using the Power Proportional Distribution separate optional function some wiring constraints must be 3 1 1 respected Please refer
94. networking cable e Power backup environment UPS Wiring Control software e Personal Computer environment Ethernet networking Hub cables PC specifications OS MS Win NT 4 0 Sp4 or later or Win 2000 Sp1 or later recommended Intelligent Manager software 8 2 2 Step 2 Engineering data Preparation of the data files that will be used during intelligent Manager installation and configuration This step is performed under the responsibility of DIL Please refer to the intelligent Manager Engineering Manual for details 8 2 2 1 Pre conditions See templates of checklist in section 8 3 Templates e List of connected machines or and e Address Table e Power Proportional Distribution Groups for Power Proportional Distribution option only 8 2 2 2 Procedure and Result Proceed as explained in the Engineering Manual of intelligent Manager The items marked are created tentatively and can be modified on request of the customer during the Step 4 On site configuration However in order to save time and prevent mistakes it is recommended to have them completed as much as possible during the present step e Intelligent Manager Configuration Data Sheets Management points Management groups Control groups Scheduling programs Interlocking programs Emergency Stop programs User environment login access limitations etc Power Proportional Distribution configur
95. not been granted the authority takes precedence and operation will not be possible i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operational Procedure e Start intelligent Manager then login as an administrator user e Click the System menu button the System Setup screen displays Click the Set Login button the Login Setup screen displays The list of users already registered is displayed as in the figure below Perform as explained hereafter intelligent Manager Login Setup For logout ust Delete i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual F Stat Stop Setup Po Setup Central Ciri M Regist schedule I Regist Users Po Reg intlioets trl I Inspection Mode J Rey Ermey nilock L Regist Pwr Lirit Girl Meme stap Release M Regist sare Energy Control I Operate History Seti System IS All screens Gan De openen Operation Details 247 Operation Details Si72 301 5 10 3 2Creating a user 248 Click on the Create button to register a new user Login Setup User Information Name Logoff Password Remarks Authority iM Start Stop Setup Setup Gentrall Etir Regist Schednle gt Regist Users Po Reo Intiock Eir Po lrepection Mode M Beg emey Iitliock Eege ivr irmi Ei Ml Emne stop Release M Eegist save Energy Control Fegistered Users List W Operate History M Setup System Screen access restriction i All screens can be opened Regie SCHEEN The authority set up become
96. notification to warning devices in security companies when errors in the facilities are detected such as filled head water tanks elevator error signals and fire warning systems It also controls the input and output of a variety of reports However the status of the proportion of the output of reports does not change for approximately 10 minutes after recovery from a power failure Design Guide 19 Functions Si72 301 3 2 7 Power Proportional Distribution Power Proportional Distribution System Components Power Proportional Distribution Function Setting of the period with no electric energy distributing Data Back Up 1 System Components Option setting for use of many watthour meters Grouping of electric power port to be specified 18 units Max of watt hour meter for one iPU the 1st one and 19 units Max of that for each iPU among several iPUs the 2nd or more one can be connected Therefore when 4 units of iPU are used 75 units Max of watthour meter can be connected It is not recommended to install too many watthour meters In this case it is also allowed to specify the option of Grouping of electric power port Normally it is not necessary to specify it The system connection example is as shown below For both Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 the calculation method if specified is the same Pattern 1 Three watthour meters to be connected to one iPU Power port No 1 system Power port No 2 syst
97. of the week in which no rate calculation is made For setting specifying collectively is done therefore it is not possible to set the time zone every each tenant Within the period of no electric energy distributing the calculation result is 0 kWh If the electric power is used with the outdoor unit in no calculation time zone the calculation result by this electric energy rate is less than the meter reading As an example the above is used in the following case In ordinary regular time the flat rate fixed rate is collected from the tenants and only in other time the electric energy distributing is made as an overtime and holiday rate The no calculation period can be set by combining the following Tenants individual not allowed e Optional start to end time 1 min unit e Optional day of the week Unit of day of the week Reversely if the optional date month day is specified the rate can forcibly be calculated with 1 day unit Regardless of specifying of no calculation period the rate calculation is made Tenants individual not allowed e Optional date month day with 1 day unit 1 year 4 Data Back Up The set data in the dues control unit is not deleted even if the electric power is turned off because the data is stored in the non volatile flash memory Design Guide Si72 301 Functions ntelligent Coz The increased efficiency in the operation of your air conditioning system gives you huge energy sa
98. specify holidays or special days throughout one year 13 months and specify the method of operation for holidays or special days in the same way as the daily operating schedule when using the schedule program One system can register up to 128 schedule programs When the schedule operation is executed those operations are recorded in the history Schedule Setting Screen Schedule Settines ef program 2000 4 Ved Thu Fri 2000 5 VYed Thu Fri Mon Tue Next 2 Calendar 13 20 3 From Modify Limits 2000 4 1 To 2001 4 30 a Day Type Setting 01293465 6 7 8 1011121914151617 18192021 222324 Sun Mon Tue Wied E Start Thu Stop Fri Sat H RC Forb Wi Other Multiple Modify Copy RC Perm Wi Run Mode Execution Schedule Screen Action Schedule New program 0129345 6 8 9 101112191415161718 192021 222324 4 12 Wed 4 13 Thu 4f14 F ri 4 15 Sat 4 16 Sun 4 17 Mon W stat Rmt Ctrl Authorized Hi Running Mod l Stop Rmt Ctrl Prohibited W Other Mixed Jpdate OK Cancel Year Calendar Setting Field Week Schedule Setting Field You can view this screen if you need to confirm the actual s
99. steps e Set the power limit e Configure the control classifications Set temperature of indoor units 5 11 1 1 Setting the power limit This procedure set up the calendar of the power limit values measured on the pulse input management point configured by the system engineer beforehand as shown below The value can differ for the summer period and for other seasons in order to provide specific control for higher demand As well it can change daily according to up to 4 time zones The time zones can overlap but the current time is evaluated in priority from top Peak Time to down Off Peak Time i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 261 Operation Details i72 301 According to the level of power consumption increment decrement of power value can be of 1 10 or 100 kWh The maximum value of past year and month are displayed as shown below see as well Power Graph section for display of actual data Electric Power Upper limit Setup E4 Electric Power Upper Limit Setup f Seasonal Definition Static Pattern Summer Other seasons Time Zone Sub OfPeakTime gookWw gooKw oo00 s00 OftPeakTime sookw gookw Timezone outofthe above Power step fe ky dik C 100k Summer Period i Wonth t From a z T E Maximum Used Electric Power This Year 0 This Month 0 PrinviExport OK Operational procedure e Click the Set Power Limit button e Select
100. terminal see in UPS documentation which terminal corresponds to Power Failure or On battery signal e 3 Install and Setup UPS control software and reboot the PC this software will run as a Windoows service process and should never be exited by the user 3 1 Insert this control software in the Automatic Start up of Windows 2000 see procedure in the Engineering Manual 4 3 2 Automatic Start in Windows 2000 132 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview 3 2 Configure the parameters as shown in the figure above 3 3 Register the BipsShutdown exe module to be carried out when the UPS control software starts the shutdown procedure e 4 Test power failure same as above 6 Test power failure however no special time is needed by the iPU for initial backup before starting shutdown timer furthermore 3 minutes are elapsed between intelligent Manager shutdown and Windows 2000 shutdown e 5 Test UPS shutdown same as above 7 Test UPS shutdown but without internal Do e 6 Test power resume same as above 8 Test power resume e 7 End of test procedure i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 133 Workflow Overview Si72 301 134 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Part 3 Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual 1 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution cccesseeeeeeees 136 Vl SOM CIVIC We eesin i eeeteer alas oeb posta a Tae E 136 1 2 Setti
101. the Remote Access Setup dialogue disappears End of configuration 5 2 Configuring the Monitoring PC 5 2 1 Configuring the TAPI device See detailed procedure above 5 2 2 Configuring the Remote Access Service See detailed procedure above 5 2 3 Configuring the user access permission e Click the Start button and select Programs Administrator Tools User Manager the User Manager application appears e In the user list for each user that will be used when login from a intelligent Manager Remote instance e Double click the user create it first if necessary the User Properties dialogue appears e Click the Dialin button the Dialin Information dialogue appears e Select the No Callback option e Click the Ok button the Dialin Information dialogue disappears e Click the Ok button the User Properties dialogue disappears 5 2 4 Starting the Remote Access Server Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual 157 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote i72 301 2 Control Panel ioi x Manual Cancel Fie Edit View Help E Control Panel slale xal Service Remote Access Server H a e y Accessibility Add Remove Console DataSources Date Time Devices Options Programs ODBC Monitor X Pcs wy Ag fa Sy zy w Services xi 2 Disabled H elp Display Find Fast Fonts Intemet Java Plug in Keyboard Mail Status Startup Options Remote Access Connection Manager Starte
102. the Transfer PC Time button or e Click the Transfer Arbitrary Time button the Time Setup dialogue displays e Enter the date and time e Click the OK button the Time Setup dialogue closes e End of time procedure Important etc Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual A substantial modification of the time in the iPU may affect the stability of the automatic control functions schedule 139 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution S i72 301 1 3 3 4 Setting up the units DCU Trial Setup Unit FXYYJ140K 2 1F FXYVJ140K Auto c VRY D W FXYYJ140K Auto c VRY 1F FXYVJ140K Auto c VRY 1 05 1F FXYVJ140K Auto c VRY Paste 1 06 1F FKYYJ140K Auto c YRY 1F FXYVJ140K Auto c VRY Display only data containing the folowing string Ayves ower oource Frequency id a Select Frequency of Power Source a yak 1 2 03 wis 2 x 2 2 1 2 04 ai N So Cancel 4 2 05 i H E k VE 50 60Hz 1 2 06 ea 2 VAL 60Hz VICVCIVEC 50Hz for China Select Frequency of Power Source VE 50 80Hz VAL 60Hz VICNCNEC 50Hz for China Air Conditioners Detection Result X SetupDCU EG panpe etnai AN Mokrom urtia ee oR Model Information Editing x Model Information Editing x Air Conditioner No 1 4 14 Model Name FXYKJ28KL Air Conditioner No 1 1 14 Model Name Set by manual Calculation Type vey Type Y Comment Calculation Type
103. the VRV HRV general purpose adapter and constant power consumption equipment units to be connected to the dues control unit Concretely using the watthour meter with pulse output the pulse signal is to be connected to the iPU E For HRV the centralized control wiring is required without fail E Only the type consuming constant power light etc can be connected to the general purpose adapter If the power consumption varies depending on the inverter etc such an equipment cannot be connected Distribution calculating error is increased 46 Design Guide i72 301 Conditions and Method to Exclude Calculation for Specified Indoor Unit 9 Conditions and Method to Exclude Calculation for Specified Indoor Unit There is a case that a part of indoor units is desired to be excluded from calculation such as corridor hall etc Typically there are two ways as below 9 1 The Power Consumption of Common use Area Can be Separated from Other Areas Separating the system is required among the common use area outdoor units for office etc and the power source Enter No in the column of electric energy distributing in Address Table In calculating the common use power independently it is also possible to mount the watthour meter Common use area with pulse output for common use PU area Power source three phase Electric energy pulse signal line 9 2 The Power Consumption of Common use Are
104. the time limit up to a range of 8 digits in one second intervals for each item to control The Result Prevents idling or burnout by issuing an abnormality when the operation of facilities exceed prescribed time or normal operation 4 Power Failure Monitoring You can set the error display and or buzzer ring for power failures Power failures are determined by the power failure signal from a UPS uninterruptible power supply device A UPS is connected to the intelligent Manager monitoring system PC and the iPU Operation data is automatically saved when there is a power failure The system is automatically shutdown approximately 10 minutes later Functions Si72 301 3 2 2 Control Operation Settings Control Operation Settings Login settings Individual control Collective starting stopping and settings for control group Schedule control Interlocking control Emergency stop control for fires Power failure and recovery processing control Centralized control of air conditioners 1 Login settings Sets user operation authority to control the range of operation and view consultation read change read only When logging in the users can operate the intelligent Manager within their allocated authority 30 users can be registered and passwords can be set individually When unmanned this is set to a log off status Settings can also be set for the log off status It is possible to limit personnel who may operate intellige
105. this can cause the PC to crash Can use an existing UPS instead of buying one For automatic reboot and recovery of previous system setting the specified UPS is required Pre Engineering Mode 01 is displayed on remote controller when I try to set D3 address from remote controller Please confirm the followings Is the indoor unit connected to D3 net Is the D3 net connected to CRC iPU or other centralized controller Does the centralized contoller have power Should I set D3 address to the slave unit on a remote controller group If you are not using PPD function then you don t need to set D3 address to the slave unit PC Setup could not find network icon in the control panel when I tried to set the network of the PC Network setup dialog can be shown by the following process Click the right button on the My Network Places icon and select properties from the menu Double click the Local Area Connection in the displayed window Click Properties button in the Local Area Connection Status dialog then a network setup dialog is displayed cannot find Automatically reboot checkbox when I open the System properties dialog for automatic reboot setting Please open the System properties select Advanced tab and push Startup and 290 Troubleshooting Si72 301 Software Install Commissioning Troubleshooting Before Installation Recovery button
106. to clear the filter e Temperature Setup For temperature setup the Setup check box is enabled only when the Operation mode check box has been checked and the temperature setup mode has been enabled In this case if the check box has been checked temperature setup and the and buttons are enabled Click these buttons to modify the temperature setup The possible setup range is limited by the operation mode e Remote control Operation Check the Setup check box to display the setup items of remote control operation Select Permission Prohibition for each of these items e Under maintenance Check the Setup check box to enable the Temporarily Out of Monitoring Control check box By checking this check box the management point in question is set up released from under maintenance e When the management point is under maintenance All monitoring and control pertaining to a management point under maintenance are disabled Under maintenance appears on the monitoring screen Only the Setup Release of the check mode remains in the history Changes of state while under maintenance etc are not recorded Check AN Start Please confirm are Click the OK button to display a confirmation dialog box once all setups have been modified Click OK to carry out modifications to the setup or Cancel to cancel i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 187 Operation Details i72 301 5 2 4 2 For equipment with Start Stop capability D
107. to other Daikin central control units If permission is denied operation will only be possible from intelligent Manager Select the line of the Station and port number to be modified Central Control Setup Central Control Setup Dsnet Ports Dis Danet Ports eee Wee Enable Enable Disable Disable AoE bOI i E Ue JK Cancel OK Cancel The selected line is displayed in reverse field and the button showing the reverse of the current state is displayed If permission has been granted for the current state the Disable button will be enabled and vice versa the Enable button will be enabled if permission has been denied In the screen above click the Enable button The state of Port 1 has been modified to prohibition i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details To display the management points select the Port number to be displayed and click the Management Points button to display a dialog box Management Points List EJ hing paui connected to IPU Mo 1 Port Mo 1 EEE Est Levell Est2 Levell Est3 Levell Est4 Levell Wist Leyvell vVst2 Leyvell Vv st3 Leyell vVst4 Leyel Est Level2 Est2 Leyel Est3 Leyvel Nort Levell Mor Leyel Nors Leyel WYst 5 10 6 Configuring the Buzzers e Buzzers may be assigned as required to various types of alarm e Four types of sound are available for the alarm buzzer e It is possible to disable any particular buzzer e The duration of t
108. to the separate manual Configuring the Power proportional distribution for intelligent Manager system for details Wiring the DIII NET Ports Dill net port support data exchange of the Dill net line Wiring the Outdoor Unit points Outdoor Unit Outdoor units exchange data with the iPU over the DIII NET lines Wiring the Indoor Unit points Indoor Unit Indoor units exchange data with the iPU over the DIII NET lines Wiring the General Purpose Internal Digital Input Output points D3Dio General Purpose Digital Input Output points exchange digital data with the iPU over the DIII NET lines Wiring the Pseudo Analogue Input points PAI Pseudo Analogue Input points simulate analogue data Ai of indoor unit points suction temperature room temperature in the iPU Wiring the Analogue Input points Ai Analogue Input points receive analogue data of external temperature kit in the iPU Wiring the Internal Pulse input points Pi Internal Pi points collect the pulse from each meter and send data to the iPU Wiring the Internal Digital Input points Di Internal Di points receive digital data in the iPU Wiring the Internal Digital Output points Do Internal Do points send digital data from the iPU 3 2 Wiring the Ethernet Network Connect each iPU 1 master and up to 3 sub iPUs as well as the PC to the hub by using 10Base T connection cables i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 65 Wiring Si72 301 Caution Do n
109. 001 2 RX Y16K 1 1 0 0 0 BU 1 3 999 000000000002 2 RXY16K 1 1 0 0 0 BU 1 1 1 000000000003 3 FXY F25KA 0 0 0 BU 3 1 1 000000000004 3 FXY F25KA 0 0 0 BU 5 1 1 000000000005 3 FXY F25KA 0 0 0 BU 7 1 1 000000000006 3 FXY F25KA 0 0 0 co 0 1 3 999 1 1 1 A01 0 0 0 0 1 CE 0 1 3 999 1 1 1 0 1 2310 1920 0 0 CE 0 1 3 999 1 1 1 0 2 2310 2080 0 0 CE 0 1 3 999 1 1 1 1 3 2417 2080 0 0 CE 0 1 3 999 1 1 1 2 4 2143 2840 0 0 CE 0 1 3 999 1 1 1 0 5 2250 2840 0 0 CE 0 1 3 999 1 1 1 0 6 2250 3000 0 0 8 3 2 2 Power Proportional Distribution Groups T a gt Q Q Q a gt O gt Q O a gt O O gt O O O O ms O ma v oO Cc O Q O Cc O Power Proportional Distribution Group Name Type Standard Ice Storage Constant Power Yes No Pi ports Name Indoor Units Address Name gt Q Q D 02 72 110 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Notes Type only Standard is supported yet Constant Power is proportional distribution carried out on outdoor unit power The configuration of exclusion will be carried out in Step 4 insert lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 intelligent Manager Configuration Data Sheets Fill the data sheets as shown bellow 8 3 2 3 1 Management Points Fill the data sheet in csv format as shown bellow The order of the lines and field
110. 1 10 2001 11 Next lt I ABB bt ge Weekly Schedule Setup SUN Mon Tue wed Mj 2 ae a ee 2 2 in appear Clock 1 Calendar Calendar Copy Copy Day 2001710711 Calendar Limit ar 2002 10 _ Modify Day Type Setting d O a 6 7 6 91011121314151617181824021222324 Modify E Start E Stop RC Enable E RC Disable E Op Mode Wi ther Multiple Click the OK button to record the setup content on completion of a schedule setup 5 8 6 Executing Schedule 222 Actual schedule control may be checked from the dialog box as shown below Furthermore for temporary schedule changes at less than one week s notice modifications may be carried out via the Executing Schedule dialog box Click the Execute Schedule button to display this dialog box i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Execute Schedule x Clock 1 0123456 7 8 9 1011121314151617 18192021 222324 10 11 Thu I 12ers 10 13 Sat 10 14 Sun 10 15 Mon 10 16 Tue 10 17 Wed Mstat RC enabled Ml Op Mode B Stop P RC disable JE Other Muliple Operation Details Day to copy 10 12 Copy to 10 11 1z 10 13 10 14 10 16 10 16 10 17 Cancel Clock 1 Available hing Point Ctrl Group D3Dio 1 Levell Est Levell Est Levell Est3 Levell Est4 Add Lewell VV st Levell WWist2 A Level V sta Levell VVst4 Level Est Level
111. 1 2001 6 22 18 34 53 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Start Site1 20017 6 22 18 34 56 Emergent 01 395 Fire Release Site1 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Fire Signal 59 1 19 top Site2 2001 6 22 18 34 46 Levell East 1 1 1 1 00 Start Site 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Stop On line Receiving call 1 2 2 Starting Listening Click the Start button the available Modems are listed in the Connection dialog as shown below Propri t s de OMRON_ME5614E_56K_FAX_DATA_MODEM G n ral Connexion Options r Connect Using 3a OMRON_ME5614E_56K_FAX_DATA_MOD TAPI Line OMRON_ME561 4E_56K_FAx_DATA_MODEM il Port COM1 Volume du haut parleur oo l Cancel Vitesse maximale 57600 hi M Se comecterumguement d Cewe vitesse Select a Modem from the TAPI line list It is possible to modify the Modem attributes by clicking the Configure Line button refer to the Modem documentation for details about Modem settings Click the Listen button for listening and the application waits for incoming call The Online diode is now light red Listening is the normal operation state of the Watchdog When receiving records from a site the Receiving Call diode changes to light green At this time some operations are not available see details in next sections Records are stored in the local database and displayed at the same time on the screen Latest records are alw
112. 2 10 1 1 1 05 Start ia arc 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Levell vWst3 11 1 4 1 06 Start 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Level1 vWst4 12 1 1 1 07 Start start 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Level1 Est1 5 1 1 1 00 Stop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell Est2 6 1 1 1 01 Stop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell Est3 7 1 1 1 02 Stop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell Est4 8 1 1 1 03 Stop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell VWWstl 9 1 1 1 04 Stop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell VWst2 10 1 1 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell vWst3 11 1 1 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell Vst4 12 1 1 1 05 Stop 1 06 Stop 1 07 Stop gt _ Data Type Result of retrieval 2001 10 11 13 37 2001 10 11 16 39 quantity 52 ae ACH Cancel JUP Cem gt iy Restore Fire ar Aiz 2001 z io i 11 et lal BD PwrLimit Buzzer Period CFrom 2001 s 10 s 11 By means of the detailed history screen it is possible to search and display selections from100 items of real time data and approximately 500 000 items of saved data It is possible to restrict the types of error and management points displayed in both real time and saved data Moreover fixed term searches can be made in the case of saved data 100 items of search results can be displayed on the screen at any one time and the search can be continued using Next gt gt and Previous lt lt Various setups are possible according to the type of data in the content of the history display Please refer to 5 10 7
113. 3 2 2 Browse and select a file then click the OK button the Windows File Open dialogue box closes and the confirmation dialogue box appears 3 2 3 Click the OK button to confirm the confirmation dialogue box closes 3 3 OLE 3 3 1 Click the Register button the confirmation dialogue box appears 3 3 2 Click the OK button to confirm the confirmation dialogue box closes and the OLE Object Registration dialogue box appears i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 93 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application i72 301 e 3 3 3 Click the OK button to confirm the confirmation dialogue box closes e 3 3 4 Select the object registration Option From File the option New Object is not recommended then click the Browse button the Windows Refer dialogue box appears e 3 3 5 Browse and select a file then click the OK button the Windows File Open dialogue box closes e 3 3 6 Click the OK button the OLE Object Registration dialogue box closes e 4 click the Close button the Screen Information dialogue box closes e The new title screen is now displayed Important Select an appropriate OLE object file 6 5 Configuring the Visual Navigation 6 5 1 Fundamentals This section describes the procedure to configure the function that Visual Navigation function This procedure is reserved for the SE System Engineer logged in Service Mode and is not intended for end users Note In orde
114. 32C 2 TxD and RxD LED is off or Lights Up ceeeeeeeeeeee ees 304 2 11 LEDs of DIIl 1 2 3 and 4 is off or Lights ee eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 305 2 12 Can Not be Connected to iPU Software Setting cccccesseeeeeeees 306 2 13 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware Malfunction 068 307 2 14 Some of the Air Conditioners Have Communication Error 308 2 15 An Communication Error is Displayed on the Screen of i Manager PC cccccssseeccseeecceseeesseeeeeseseesseeeeeees 309 2 16 The Temperature Detected by DIII Aji in i Manager Test Run Can Not be Monitored Properly cc000008 310 289 Before Installation Si72 301 1 Before Installation Network Solution FAQ Preparation What is the minumum equipment necessary to introduce iManager At least the following iPU Windows 2000 PC Network cable 10BaseT and HUB UPS APC Smart UPS1000 or 700 Relay I O module AP9610 If you intend to use PPD function then you need following kWh meter MERLIN GERIN CEr tri Can use Windows 98 Me for the iManager system No iManager system supports only Windows NT SP4 or later and Windows 2000 I have a Windows XP PC Does iManager support Windows XP No Windows XP is not supported yet Please use Windows 2000 Is a UPS necessary if don t need PPD We highly recommend a UPS because if the power is disconnected while iManager is running
115. 3Die 1 D3Dio 1 Present Status Status stop Repeat Mode Check AN Start Please confirm Cancel gt Repeat PF Sty Interval j EEE icin Under Maintenance LO enporanly Hot Monitoredhicon ok Cancel The following setups are possible in this case e Start Stop Check the Setup check box to enable Start and Stop They can then be selected e Repeat Mode Check the Setup check box to enable the Repeat checkbox When the Repeat check box is checked the time interval and and buttons are enabled The repeated time interval can then be altered by means of these buttons Start Stop instructions are given within a fixed interval specific value so that the Start Stop state of the equipment can be executed as indicated regardless of manual operation etc e Under maintenance Check the Setup check box to enable the Temporarily out of Monitoring Control checkbox When this box is checked the setup changes to under maintenance Click the OK button to display a confirmation dialog box once all setups have been modified Click OK to carry out modifications to the setup or Cancel to cancel 5 2 4 3 For other equipment When setting up check the Setup checkbox to display the items which may be set up In this case setup is only possible when under maintenance 188 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Maintenance Mode Setup E Fire Signal Fire Pr
116. 4 Indoor Unit Maximum Minimum and Average value over the period are also displayed for every management point as well a data Date Time Value and Validity 5 7 Managing Data Caution This function of determining individual electrical power consumption is an ESTIMATION based on individual indoor units distribution load ratio and operating hours It is not based on legal regulations from any governing body such as JIS Japanese Law of Weighing calculation and cannot stand up in a court of law Collected data are saved in a daily report around midnight 5 7 1 The Building Management applications This function supports Building Management Business External applications can be launched from the customizable buttons of this screen When ship ping intelligent Manager is provided with an application for retrieving operational data from the intelligent Manager database This application called intelligent Manager Tenant Report Management has two modules that are launched by the buttons Tenant Setup and Tenant Report as described in the two next sections Note The customization of the buttons label as well as launched module should have been performed beforehand by the installer System Engineer and is not explained in the current document i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 207 Operation Details Si72 301 208 Click the Data Mng button from the menu buttons The Data Management menu screen will be displayed intelligent Manager
117. 4111 26Q9 36 Control gro Group start of Control groupDO Print 2000 4 11 22 5096 Level2 Norl 15 0 0 4 06 Start EA Specifies Displayed Data 2000 4711 22 59 36 evel2 Nor2 16 0 0 4 07 Start cl UO Maximum of 100 cases 2000 4111 22 59 36 LOEMNQNor3 17 0 0 4 09 Start 10 000 cases on hard disk Bata thee Ayesult of reMaaal 200018 00 4 3 2000 4111 22 59 number 11 Specifies Type to be C Realtime Data Saved Data I C syns C rrint D displayed Classification Management Promt Limitation V Error Alarm V Control Status E ui enj paa Detailed Period History From 2000 f 4 11 l To 2000 s 4 f fim Update Screen Menu Button O ae ee G Displays Real time History Switches screen to the one displaying the targeted management items Specifies Period Specify period press Update to search function dedicated for save data Message display colors differ according to the type of history Error Red Purple Warning Blue Gray Cancel Green Other Black The colors indicated in the parentheses are the colors of confirmed messages Design Guide 13 Functions 7 Schedule Display Automatically performs facility start stop control switching of the operating mode setting of temperatures and enabling disabling of the remote controller according to the preset time schedule Si72 301 Register 1 week s cycle schedule program and specify what operations to perform on each day Also you can
118. 42 P Time 2001 10 11 Th u 1642 AN 132 Carry out time synchronization Cancel oynchronise IPU synchronise PC with PC with iPU Apply Apply Close 131 When changing the time to a previous date some time related operations schedule report etc will be affected The new time will have priority redo schedule event overwrite same time data etc When the time is set back the already collected data is not overwritten 132 Carry out time synchronization 5 10 9 Enabling Confirmation Dialog Serves to confirm the execution or cancellation of an operation Start Stop Setup i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 255 Operation Details i72 301 Operational Procedure intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a aalas a x So o Login Ming Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Jump Back Help Guide 2001 10 11 Thu 16 40 System setup usr Main ersion Information IPU Wer2 0 Rev56 2001 9 25 SPENNE PC Mer2 0 RevS6 2001 9 25 Group Configuration User Environment Other Settings Stop Management Group Set Login Management Points BETA EOMTTG Sep Control Group Repon Running Setting r Automatic Control Central Control Time Automatic Change Over A iy Buzzer Daylight saving time Confirmation Dialog Sliding Ternperature Restore Fire M Confirm Start Stop Setting History M Confirm Deletion Temperature Limit ail JE
119. 7 Operation Details Si72 301 e The emergency stop may be set up along with the interlocking program e Up to 100 interlocking programs may be registered intelligent Manager WHET NSD J Efavie gt Wisanle siesta ge Click the Interlocking button from the menu buttons The interlocking menu screen will appear 5 9 1 Setting up an Interlocking Program For every interlocking program up to 50 input management points to be monitored and a maximum of 50 output items management points or control groups may be registered Select the interlocking program from the interlocking menu at the top of the screen Click the Create button to newly register the program Name Setup The name setup screen will appear Enter the name and click the OK button To cancel the name setup click the Cancel button The newly registered program name is displayed on the screen 228 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Next set up the contents by clicking on the program name click the scroll bar if necessary The operation options button will be enabled on the right hand side Click the Modify Program button to display the interlocking program setup screen An interlocking program name or contents registered previously can also be modified via the same procedure However the program to be modified should be disabled Refer to next page for details of enabling disabling swit
120. Configuring History options p 254 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 195 Operation Details i72 301 Detailed History Screen real time data intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help G amp ss als ja e ol Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide 2001 10 14 Thu 16 47 usr Main Time SL Name _ ID_ PORT ADDR Contents 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Level1 Est4 8 1 1 1 03 Start Open St 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Level vWstl 9 1 1 1 04 Start 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Levell Wst2 10 1 1 1 05 Start 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Levell Vst3 11 1 1 1 06 Start 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Level vWst4 12 1 1 1 07 Start 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell Est 6 1 1 1 00 Stop Siop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Level1 Est2 6 1 1 1 01 Stop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Levell Est3 7 1 1 1 02 Stop TES 2001 10 11 16 39 24 Levell Est4 8 1 1 1 03 Stop Ba cillesy igieh 2001 10 11 16 39 24 Levell Wstl 9 1 1 1 04 Stop 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Level1 vWst2 10 1 1 1 05 Stop Setup 2001 10 11 16 39 21 Level vWst3 11 1 1 1 06 Stop 1 11 71 Stan 700101111 1 39 21 aveall Vstd 12 4 J a Data Type Real time Data Saved Data lt e Ack Gance Jump Print oja Classification Management Point Limitation imit eA Restore Fire M Error M Alarm M Control V Status m Period IE From 2001 AEN mAB mM To e fio An rr ope Pwr Limit Buzzer
121. DESIN PrecaUllONS arre A 43 FA AALS CACUlAN ON i a 43 7 2 Setting of Each Electric Power Group cccccsssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeees 44 7 3 The Reason Why VRV Heat Recovery Must Not be Included 45 Connectionother than VRV sssnesi a e 46 Ol ASYSICM EXI MPE sae RENEE 46 92 Reg remeM S eanan E rE OA 46 Conditions and Method to Exclude Calculation for DPSCIMECIPMGOOK UA eonnae a aus hevendeatensasareneeteteemasennonsts 47 9 1 The Power Consumption of Common use Area Can be Separated from Other Areas ccccccsececsseeceeeseeeeeeetenes 47 9 2 The Power Consumption of Common use Area is Distributed to Other Area ccccceececeeeteeeeceeeteeeeseeeeeneeteneeneeees 47 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution ccccseceeeeeeeees 48 10 1 What is the Power Proportional Distribution PPD ceceseeeeeees 48 10 2 GOUT ACCUIACY caiie eiiaoe ai 50 Outdoor Temperature Sensor DIII Ai DAM101A51 cceeeeeeeee eens 55 Alt COMPONE AL DANS eatae Ra edie chalet bate a ene teat 55 TEZ PATA INC IN tected inthaetcetss as O 55 OCOUESHONSGcANSWENS suaratisirsncatnncsnumaienirgeicsaialyeincevarinattasinnateavausneiaielal 58 Si72 301 Part 2 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual ccccseeeeensnennnnnes 61 1 Introducing intelligent MANAGETL cccccecceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeneeens 62 1 1 About the FP reSeAtVIANUl aia ou d eltiecalencemat eta d ith aatitrea
122. Each Electric Power Group Although the iPU unit allows electric energy distributing with one integrating watthour meter if some many integrating watthour meters are connected as shown below the electric energy distributing accuracy can be improved Integrating watthour Integrating watthour Integrating watthour DII NET 44 Design Guide Si72 301 Design Precautions 7 3 The Reason Why VRV Heat Recovery Must Not be Included For Heat Recovery outdoor units the watthour meter must be independently installed 1 For heat recovery there is a case that the power consumption is less than VRV and VRV Plus 2 However if different systems are put on the one meter the electric power distribution would be calculated by constant counting and the calculation result would then more than the actual value on all indoor units Therefore it is necessary to install the watthour meter independently as shown in Fig 2 In addition the power port No in Address Table must be different from others To be set at test run kWh meter with pulse output Not allowed with 1 unit I Power source three phase uai aT az Heat Recovery Electric energy a J i pulse signal line a D E T r th eth otha a I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ee ere ee ee M Fig 1 Not Recommended Watthour meter is shared Power source three ph
123. F Meeting Room 1 Add 9F Meeting Room 2 Guide Connection completed Now starting PC systern Ver2 0 Rev58 2001 1141 5 Thu SF Meeting Room 3 15 56 9F Meeting Room 4 System setup us 10F Office 1 gt 10F Office 2 Version Information 10F Office 3 10F Office 4 iPU Ver2 0 Rev58 2001 10 15 Rem PC Ver2 0 Re58 2001 10 15 Group Configuration User Environment Other Settings Management Group Set Login Management Points _Create _Detete Group Attributes Control Group Activation C Enable Disable Running Setting Automatic Control Ta Sliding Temperatiire Group Central Control Time Automatic Change Over A Outdoor Temperature Mng PointOutdoor Rei Buzzer Daylight saving time Confirmation Dialog Sliding Temperature Restore Fire Outdoor Temperature Range 24 fc 30 Joc V Confirm Start Stop Setting S nes ea hae i 22 pe 28 foc i History Confirm Deletion Temperature Limit a a SEATS p Aa ok sanco Note external kit required zet Temp Max Set Temp Min Set Temp Min Outdoor Temp Max CutdoorTemp CutdoorTerp Relation between Outdoor Temperature and Set Temperature 26 Design Guide Si72 301 Functions 3 3 2 Allowing flexible network configurations in response to specific needs Design Guide E Multi PC The intelligent Manager can be connected to existing LANs contributing to a reduction in costs Because air conditioners equipment and the i
124. Graph is a bundle of management points whose values will be displayed on the same graphic e A single management point may belong to more than one Graph e The number of management points in a Graph is limited to 4 e The number of different types of point i e with different units in a Graph is limited to 2 e The number of Graphs is limited to 500 198 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details To set up Graphs click on the Setup Graph button The Graph Setup dialog displays as shown below Shit Geter ean mnnt Weber thy Graph Setup i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 199 Operation Details i72 301 5 6 3 1 Creating a new Graph To create a new graph click on the New Graph button The New Graph dialog displays as shown below ff New Graph a x Available Management Points Mng Point Name Lint OF Ottice 1 1OF Office 2 TOF Office 3 1OF Office 4 1OF Office 5 TOF Office 6 1OF Office 7 OF Office 42222 OF Office 6 SF Office T In 1 Mohamer Moklamers Add Graph content Graph Mame m Se eee eee T R ae E O T Comment m OK Cancel Input the graph name in the Graph Name text box Also input an optional comment in the Comment text box fe All Indoor Unit Equipment Other Note Both Graph Name and Comment are limited to 32 characters The management points belonging to a Graph are select
125. Icons indicating a control group can be setup at will as representative icons The control groups created by the control group operation are automatically displayed in the control group list Control group operation authority is required to operate a control group The order of the registered management points the sequential startup time interval at the time of collective start and the sequential stop time interval at the time of collective stop 0 10 20 30 or any number of seconds from 0 180 can be specified in a control group A sequential startup stop time interval is the time elapsed between instructions This assumes that if collective running time is started up sequentially the peak electric electrical power load required at startup will be reduced Both management points with Start Stop capability and management points for monitoring only can be set up as control group members If an instruction such as collective startup is issued to a control group while it is being edited registration deletion of management points or modifications of the time interval the modification will come into effect for subsequent instructions only Control Groups can be printed out either on the default printer or exported into CSV comma separated format files Operational Procedure m Groups Group Content i Available Mng Points j Output Selec
126. Installing intelligent Manager Main specific This installation should be performed on the monitoring PC 4 2 2 3 Installing intelligent Manager Demo specific This installation should not be performed on the monitoring PC but on a separate PC 4 3 Setting up the PC Operating System 4 3 1 Setting up the network on the PC Note 68 Network x Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings El Control Panel Ioj x Identification Changes x File Edit View Help Accessibilty Add Remove Console Date Time Dewices Lge Options Programs Windows uses the following information to identify your computer an the network You may change the name for this computer the workgroup or domain that it will appear in and create a computer account in the domain if specified ea Windows uses the Zllowing information to identify pour computer on the nftwork You may change the name for this computer ang the workgroup or domain that it will appear in B Ah Aa E Computer Name PCM Display Find Fast Workgroup DAKIN Computer Name PCM m Member of Workgroup Dal KIN Domain I Greate a Computer Account in the Domain Modems imedia etwork ODBC Data This option will create an account on the domain for this Sources computer YOU must speciy a User account with the ability to add workstations tothe specitied domain above
127. L2N3 Setup Level2 Wst1 R ep ort p Setup 27 C A Lani Level2 Wst2 Restore Fire w ay p Setup 27 C di The marks for the filter sign cooling heating options and automatic control interlocking and scheduling are also displayed An asterisk after the operation mode indicates that the system is in defrost state State Monitoring legend The state of a management point is shown by the color of its icon i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Legend Werun amp stop E Error WS com Error Maintain next PP emergency Stop Power Limit Ctrl l Mrest amp Control Target Fiter Sign D CoolHesat Select l Click the Next button to display the legend corresponding to the upper and lower parts of the icon respectively Main Icon Color Red Running Green Stop Yellow blinking Malfunction Blue Communication error Gray Under maintenance Green blinking Emergency stop The marker to the lower right of the main icon Blue red Management point with cooling heating option Red Filter sign Blue Under automatic control Management points connected with Interlocking and Scheduling gt Changes in Icon State Changes in icon state Start Stop Malfunction are displayed as follows Equipment Malfunction Indicates abnormal state of air conditioner or equipment Monitoring Error Inconsistency error Abnormal Start Stop failure Abnormal Maximum Minimum limits
128. M 8 3 2 3 9 Automatic Changeover Fill a data sheet for each group as shown below Member Points Name Notes the points must be listed in the same order as in the group insert lines if necessary 118 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview 8 3 2 3 10Sliding Temperature Notes Fill a data sheet for each group as shown below Sliding Temperature Name Activation State Enabled Disabled Reference Ai name Outdoor Temp Min Max C Indoor Temp Min Max C Member Points Name insert lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 11 Temperature Limits Notes Fill a data sheet for each group as shown below Temperature Limits Name Activation State Enabled Disabled Min Temp C Max Temp C Member Points Name insert lines if necessary i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 119 Workflow Overview Si72 301 8 3 2 3 12Eco Mode Indoor Units Intermittent Operation Control Eco Mode indoor units intermittent operation Execution Conditions Calendar 1 Activation State Enabled Disabled Period From From Calendar Control Setup Control Level 10 20 30 40 Activation State Enabled Disabled Member Points Name Group B Activation State Enabled Disabled Member Points Name Group C Activation State Enabled Disabled Member Points Name Notes insert lines i
129. Meeting Room 4 J e Confirm Deletion wv al Create Delete Group Attributes Activation C Enable Disable Name Temperature Limit Group Lower Limit 15 foc UpperLimit 36 foc Print Export OK Cancel Room Terp see Ere an a en ote eer ETE eT TEE TE Te TO ve eee ener Mad a Open ener arene one Cane Oe OR e a a ere ce oe rene nee eer re eee Start Heating Stop Heating eee eee bite Stop Cooling range Ea es B a a Pete E E E eee eee eee ree re ae enna oe ia ee oN th terre nO et RPmaIrs ace nme Rne Vee E E ne Heatmg Mode Tame Room Temperature and Operation Mode Design Guide 25 Functions Si72 301 E Sliding Temperature The intelligent Manager ECO 21 eliminates overcooling via sensory comfort control intelligent Manager outdoor temperature and automatically controls room temperature settings all in order to minimize drastic temperature differences with the outdoors Along with energy efficiency intelligent Manager also can eliminate any uncomfortable cold shock around building entrances and the like Flexible group configuration intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help Groups Group Contents Available Mng Points ese y 5 Sliding Temperature Group 6F Office 3 6F Office 1 aaa amp 5 AK B S BF Office 1 6F Office 2 aa ged Ss T Ez 8F Office 2 Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help 9
130. NoneDe2f NoneDeq Monitoring Monitoring C Monitor History Monitor History Ver2 U Revos Cancel DP Update the folowing information wih the os Makei equipment name equipment information model installation date installation place lfeime cx seen Select Cancel 5 3 9 Configuring the Outdoor Unit points Click and input the tabs Mne Point Attributes xj e Common see above Punoi Ponne fi Pnt Type Outdoor unit Mng P ID 1 e Monitoring see above Name NoName Shori Name Noname eon oft Fl E Outdoor Unit Common Monitoring Outdoor Other Demand Addr Demand address address used by the Eco Mode function Cel ee 32 Ver2 0 Reve Cancel 5 3 10 Configuring Control Groups Select the option Control Group and click the Add button Then enter the Group Name select the Icon ID and the Start and Stop Interval fields seconds between start of each member of the group idem for stop Click the Members button to display the dialogue for selecting the management points of the group Check the Hide box if you don t want this group to be seen by users Note this configuration can be performed and amended later in the System screen of intelligent Manager i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 83 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool leon iD 103 Salect 1st Floor Member Nb 8 1 Group 2nd Floor Member Nb 9 2 Group 3rd Floor Member N
131. OS to the iPU Command Prompt D os gt ftp 192 168 0 1 Connected to 192 168 0 1 22606 UxWorks lt 5 3 gt 9 FIP server ready User 192 168 8 1 none gt d gt 331 Password required Password 230 User logged in ftp gt bin 206 Type set to I binary mode ftp gt Ils 200 Port set okay 154 Opening ASCII mode data connection 226 Transfer complete 1 bytes received in 6 66 seconds 1460 06 Kbytes sec gt ftp put os 200 Port set okay 154 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Transfer complete 1869992 bytes sent in 178 29 seconds 180 15 Kbytes sec Ftp gt quit 221 Bye see you later D os gt exit e 5 A gt ftp 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 2 4 for sub iPUs ftp gt user name lt Enter gt none ftp gt bin ftp gt password lt Enter gt none ftp gt put os When the transmission completion message appears terminate the ftp connection e 5 F ftp gt quit and close the window e 5 G gt exit JP6 and then switch the iPU power back ON 7 Check the iPU OS by the following procedure e 7 A disconnect the RS232 cable e 7 B Reconnect by Telnet Host IP address of the iPU Login name d bips Password madeinelb 6 Disconnect and Exit from the Hyperterminal switch the iPU power OFF then disconnect the jumpers JP5 and After the os file transfer is completed do NOT switch the iPU ON with the jumpers JP5 and JP6 connected as this would clear the flash memory
132. Pwr Limit Buzzer Check the appropriate Confirmation dialog yes no checkbox to make use of the confirmation dialog as required Check the checkbox to enable the dialog leave the checkbox blank to disable the dialog 5 10 10Setting up the Daylight saving time Serves to configure the date and time for the shift when daylight saving time is used Summer time Operational Procedure Daylight saving time Daylight saving time is used Daylight saving time setup Ex Daylight saving time will be set Mar last Sun Oct last Sun DST begin Mar last Sun 2 00 OST end Oct last Sun 300 Time zone Uh C Set up iPU gt T DST setting Ea DST is turned OFF Annuler 256 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 10 11Automatic Change Over Serves to configure the function that change the operation mode of a group of indoor units ac cording to the room temperature as shown on the figure below Automatic Change Over Operation Overview G Heating gt Cooling Cooling ee SetPoint h t Point Temp Difference ene ser Eoin Change Set Point Heating Anp A ae SetPoint Heating gt Cooling Heating Cooling Heating lt oS _ ru ODS Operational Procedure Automatic Change Over Group Contents Available Ming Points Levell Estt Groups st Floor East Create Delete Le
133. Rate calculation One day to be set in a menu is from 12 00 am to 11 59 pm Determination of electric energy distribution value in 1 day unit The calculation result of the power proportional distribution function is made using the original method of Daikin and is not under law Collected data are saved in a daily report around midnight 2 2 Basic functions The system is that the rate of use every each indoor unit is calculated and determined from the electric energy used of the outdoor unit For calculation the power consumption of the outdoor unit is counted as a pulse signal and this value is distributed depending on the load situation of the indoor unit Mentioned later Supplement Pattern 1 System of connecting three watthour meters to one iPU If three watthour meters are connected with one iPU the electric power port is to be specified individually Pattern 2 System of using some many watthour meters with some many units of iPU By specifying of power ports it is also allowed to collectively specify of some many units Example Of the four iPU two units are group specified with one watthour meter and the remaining two units are group specified with each unit individually Design Guide 21 Functions 22 Si72 301 Pattern 3 Combinations as above As a combination system some many watthour meters can be connected to one iPU for use of some many units The precautions and the relation between the calcul
134. Ry Type z Modity Costticient Consult Datdpase Calculating Condition Coefficient Setup Calculating Condition Coefficient Setup Bag Setup Power Proportional Division C No Yes Cooling Coefficient a1 14 Power Proportional Division No Yes Cooling Coefficient a1 1414 Cooling Coefficient a2 0 073 Cooling Coefficient a2 073 include power during STOP C No Yes include power during STOP C No Yes i i Heating Coefficient b1 1 52 Heating Coefficient b1 152 include power of Heater C No Yes testing Coefficient b2 ous include power of Heater No Yes Hesting Coefficient b2 0026 include power of Fan C No G Yes Cooling Rated Power Consumption 148 include power of Fan C No C Yes Cooling Rated Power Consumption 118 Heating Rated Power Consumption 9 95 Heating Rated Power Consumption 0 95 Fan Rated Power Consumption 0 071 Fan Rated Power Consumption 0 071 Heater Rated Power Consumption 105 Heater Rated Power Consumption ic 05 Power Consumption During Stop 001 Power Consumption During Stop 0 01 cancel Set Cancel Click the Setup Units button of the top menu The Units Setup screen displays This procedure automatically browses the model knowledge data base provided with intelligent Manager to set the distribution coefficients of the detected units according to their model Moreover manual setup is possible for tuning or for units which model is not in the database Important As
135. Step 1 some attributes must have specific values e Power supply e Check the UPS box e iPU Option Info e check the Power Proportional Distribution box e calculation result backup frequency e in the Time to Save frame enter time at which backup time is perform up to four times a day default value is midnight e iPU attributes and DIIl Net ports e See wiring diagram a the beginning of the chapter 1 3 2 Registering the management points When registering the management points in Step 1 some attributes must have specific values e Indoor units e Check the Power Proportional Distribution box e Internal Pulse Input e Value Multiplier must be set to 1 e Unit Rate must be set to 1 or 10 e Signal Length must be set to 100ms 1 3 3 Using the distribution engineering tool Note Repeat the following procedure for each iPU The procedure below performs steps for configuring of the distribution environment executing the distribution calculation and checking the result Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual 137 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution i72 301 1 3 3 1 Starting and connecting the engineering tool SetupDCU Ea Cannot establish a connection DCU Trial Setup Unit Bips 1 Exit Ver 5 002 IP Address E20 ak BIPS No rsa gt ov st H Fan iiiouity Setup 1 1 00 J140 r 7 1 1 01 1F FXYYJ140K Auto c
136. TD MOME Buzer 6 2 Configuring the intelligent Manager Organization This procedure performs definition of the groups for managing and controlling the points manually as well as automatically with the Interlocking and Scheduling functions 6 2 1 Fundamentals Note The management groups are organized a in tree like structure like the folders in Windows Their role is to make managing and monitoring of the intelligent Manager system more user friendly by use of group display A management group can be constituted of other management groups as well as management points The control groups are constituted by only management points Their role is to make control of the intelligent Manager system more user friendly via collective actions e Start e Stop e Detailed Information e Setup All groups lists can be open to make management monitoring and control on individual points The actual number and composition of groups is a function of each intelligent Manager system However the recommended groups are as follows 1 Management groups e one group for each building constituted of e one group for each floor constituted of e one group for each room constituted of i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 87 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application i72 301 Note Note the indoor units Internal Digital Input points and Internal Digital Output points of this room one g
137. Tue ary Wed D Start Thu E Stop Fri L FC Enable Calendar E RC Disable I Op Mode B other Multiple Setting up day types In the initial state Sundays only are set up as holidays Check the Setup checkbox to enable the select day type weekday holiday special day buttons Click the selection buttons to modify the type of day to be set up The selected day type will then be displayed in the place indicated by and its color will change White is used for weekdays red for holidays and blue for special days In the above figure Holidays have been set and special days are being selected Click the cell containing the date to be set up to carry out the setup In the case of the above figure some days have been set up as holidays As well some days are being set up as special days When the setup of the month on current display is completed click the next month Next button to display the following month When the following month is displayed set up the day type This should be done for each of the 13 months 5 8 5 Weekly Schedule The weekly schedule indicating the type of operations to be performed during one day is specified in nine day area units each day of the week holidays and special days e Selection to undergo control The management point or control group to undergo schedule control is selected 220 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details e Time of Execution The time
138. U address is to be performed later when configuring the data of each iPU i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 71 Installing the intelligent Manager system i72 301 Open a MS Dos Command Prompt Window Windows Start Command Prompt then use the Dos cd command and open the folder when the os file has been extracted Then e 1 load the os file into the iPU procedure in Appendix B 1 A gt ftp 192 168 0 1 1 B ftp gt user name imanager lt Enter gt Do not forget this bin order 1 C ftp gt password daikinindustries lt Enter gt as this would make the iPU 1 D ftp gt bin un operational In such 1 E ftp gt put os case see Troubleshouting When the transmission completion message appears terminate the ftp connection e 1 F ftp gt quit Then to display the actual size of the os file refer to the actual value of your version e 1 G gt dir to be compared with the transmitted size in step 1 E and close the window 1 H gt exit e 2 Check the iPU OS by the following procedure 2 A Reconnect by Telnet Host IP address of the iPU Login name imanager Password daikinindustries Note The default IP address of the iPU is 192 168 0 1 and can be modified when configuring the iPU e 2 B type gt flashll and check the transmission time and the size of the os file this size should be the same value as the one previously displayed in step 1 G 1811916 bytes in the example howeve
139. YRY s 1 1 02 1F FXYYJ140K Auto c YRY a is a Copy 1 4 03 1F FXYYJ140K Auto c YRY k cones 1 1 04 4F FXYWu140K Autoc YRV 1 1 05 1F FRY VJ140K Auto c YRY ia 3 Paste 14 08 1F FXYVJI4OK Autos VRY t gt o o oa E 1 1 07 1F FRYVJ140K Auto c YRY a 3 a AN This BIPS station is set as not to perform power proportional divison You can setup ONLY 1 1 08 a Gear UNIT properties 4 1 09 s s 4 A A 0 pee 1 1 11 a Auto Setup 1 112 1 1 13 ae 1 1 14 2 z P3 1 1 15 a Performed s 2 00 a t 1 2 01 a 2 Not maize P Setup Date Setup Unit Setup Group Confirm Monitor Bips 1 Exit 1 2 02 2 performed gt A Ver 5 002 1 2 03 Red Under i i TEDI v 7 gt calculation Refrigerant circuit for ice storage is being detected 1 2 05 If not right please shutdown this system 1 2 06 4 2 07 ai E3 1 2 06 ia 4 2 9 Initialize All Data a peg gt gt o Ci Initialization was finished with no error Use Microsoft Windows Explorer to access the bin folder of intelligent Manager and double click on the SetupDCU exe module to start the engineering tool Then perform as follows e Enter the IP address of the master iPU e Select which iPU you want to configure iPU 1 master iPU 2 4 sub iPUs e Click the Ok button the main screen displays with the top menu e Perform the distribution
140. _ nae 10 2 Thermo step signifies that an airconditioning capacity is expressed in a range of the values l Thermo step 0 5 mainl th i f a1 a2 correction factor for cooling p many Paseo Onine opening grader an electronic expansion valve in an indoor unit b1 b2 correction factor for heating T indoor unit s suction air temperature Heat load by one hour calculated through the ei has operating of airconditioner N Indoor units N s power consumption kWh total pulse input from wattmeters x total heat load by one hour caiculated through the operating conditions of all the airconditioners 48 Design Guide Si72 301 Design Guide Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution 2 Calculation of the proportional division value for a dairy power consumption The proportional division value for a dairy power consumption is stored with factors of each indoor unit s number and a calendar date as a table shown below after adding the count result of hourly power consumption from 00 00 through 23 59 with a graduation of 10 W Indoor unit No Date The set data in the dues control unit is not deleted even if the electric power is turned April 1st 000150 000211 000741 004402 off because the data is stored in the non April 2nd 002004 005202 009205 005902 volatile flash memory April 3rd 000313 001103 000086 008173 TI 3 Counting the electricity at the ceased condition of the unit Even if an aircon
141. a nneannenennnnnnnnnnnnnnrrresrrenrrerssrrerrrrrsrnrrsereene 75 5 3 Configuring the Management Points cccceececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeenees 76 5 4 Configuring Energy Saving cccccssscccsseeeccsececseneeeceeeecseseesseseeessagees 84 6 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application c ccccccseceeceseeeeeeeeeeees 86 6 1 Login in intelligent Manager cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeeeaeeenes 86 6 2 Configuring the intelligent Manager Organization cccceccesseeeeeeees 87 6 3 Configuring ING USES ern e alan ade aaeenemeracs 90 6 4 Customizing the Graphic User Interface cccceccceeccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeees 90 6 5 Configuring the Visual Navigation cccccssseccesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeessseeesaaees 94 6 6 Saving the CGonig rato N snon on ceed ieee wend coil eaartee 99 6 7 Checking the Configuration cccccsccccsseeeccseeeccceeeeeceeeesseseessesseessagess 99 7 Saving and Loading a Configuration ccccsssecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 104 Til SAVING eaea A E E 104 Te LoadNgessrsr i A 104 8 Workflow Overview ccccceccccessecceececeseececeesausessaueesseeeeseueesseeeesaaes 105 Sell PATO GUCTIOM nassen N N 105 82 M in Procedure Steps sesrersni ir dean aecetenndineegetaness 105 83 Templale Sorne a 108 Model names and specifications or the like are subject to change without prio
142. a i Modems 22 Mukimedia C Card s inters QuickTime 32 Regional SCSI Adapters Settings odems Properties General 3 The following modems are set up on this computer Modem AltachedTo amp Panasonic TO BXF56K VS0_K56flex COMI Add Bemove Dialing Preferences Dialing from DSSL configuration menu displays e Configure the modem attributes as illustrated above Panasonic TO BXF56K V90_K56flex Properties 2 xi General Connection 3 Panasonic T0 BXF56K V90_K56flex Port COM1 m Speaker volume Ta A Dialing Properties hy Locations am dialing from ssi z New emove amin this country region When dialing from here To access an outside line For local calls dial For long distance calls dal IT To disable call waiting cial Dialusing Tone dial C Pulse dial Area code Japan 077 Area Code Aule w FE I For long distance calls use this calling card Click the Start button and select Settings Control Panel double click on the icon Modem the modem e Test the communication by using both standard communication accessories of Windows NT ex Hyperterminal and or Phone Dialer e Perform configuration of intelligent Manager application that makes use of the modem Note For detailed information for installation configuration and troubleshooting
143. a is Distributed to Other Area In this case it cannot uniformly be distributed to other indoor units The power consumption of the common use section may be added to the specific indoor unit The power consumption of the common use area is distributed to Integrating watthour meter with pulse output the indoor unit in the office etc The calculated value in the office etc is E increased by the value distributed Power source WHM three phase E from the common use area m Electric energy vs pule sional ling The wiring work method for the common use area is quite the same B as that of the indoor unit in other offices etc 55 8 Common use section gt Enter No in the column of electric iPU energy distributing in Address Table Example When the power consumption is A B C 10kW and X Y Z 5kW the calculation result total is 45kW and the calculated value of A B and C is as follows A B C 2 45 15kW SS x 10 10 10 The common use section is distributed and power consumption is more than the actual one Design Guide 47 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution i72 301 10 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution 10 1 What is the Power Proportional Distribution PPD System Ex Normal VRV Since this system detects power consumption as the base of the count specified watthour meters should be used by all means
144. aaiyeeamenneveuauises 47 9 1 The Power Consumption of Common use Area Can be Separated from Other Areas ccceccssceseseeeseeseeeeeeeetenes 47 9 2 The Power Consumption of Common use Area is Distributed to Other Area ccccccccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeetaes 47 10 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution ccccecceeeeeeees 48 10 1 What is the Power Proportional Distribution PPD ccceccseeeee ees 48 102 GOUME ACCU ACY trent se eid aleatiend aanet a el cease az le 50 11 Outdoor Temperature Sensor DIII Ai DAM101A51 cece eee 55 Vicom ponent panser tets ede ie a baaleces iedebeceende cuties tecbecels 55 Withee ATTA CMAIGIN rin EE EEE ened 55 12 QUESTIONS G ANSWECES ees 2 eentess instinct tae A 58 Design Guide 1 System Overview i72 301 1 System Overview 1 1 Overview E What is the intelligent Manager intelligent Manager is an integrated building management system that uses our independent high speed multi transmission method DIII NET that is employed on VRV for buildings It has a centralized controller function that can perform high speed centralized control of our VRV for buildings E Applicable Buildings This is a VRV intelligent Manager control system that is perfect for small and medium scale buildings Number of Management Items Standard 256 indoor units Expansion is possible up to a maximum of 1024 items For medium and small scale individual air con
145. abel e Enter or modify the coefficients of this unit e Select the options for distribution when e operating e Idling see note below e Heating mode e Fan only mode e Select the calculation method option please refer to the relevant technical documentation when necessary e VRV normal e HRV Heat Reclaim Ventilation e General Purpose Adapter e End of manual setup procedure Caution Entering invalid coefficients may affect the reliability of the distribution calculation Note If the Idling option is checked the power consumed during Stop state is append to the calculation result But if not checked it is stored individually as power during Stop state Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual 141 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution i72 301 1 3 3 5 Setting up the power groups Important Note 142 This procedure performs configuration of groups of units related to the same distribution power source Click the Setup Groups button of the top menu The Groups Setup screen displays Only the points connected to the targeted iPU can be registered in its power groups SetupDCU Ea A Stop operation and reset data of group IF Stop woe Ver 5 002 Calculating State ate aa SetupDCU x AN Delete Electric Power Group 2F Standard Calculating Ice Storage Not Calulating Do automatic proporiionel division of constant power C No Wes
146. able with daily activation period and check their box to Enable them then click the OK button click on the Print Export button to print all calendars settings on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file 264 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details e Control setup select the interruption rate Control 10 20 30 or 40 see example of interruption patterns below select each of the 3 available groups and Register management points of indoor units to be stopped a same indoor unit cannot belong to more than one group Enable the groups click on the Print Export button to print all groups settings on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file click the OK button e Enable the selected control classification e Click the Close button Note For a better result do not register i e stop at the same time all indoor units of a same refrigeration circuit i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 265 Operation Details Si72 301 Examples of interruption patterns grayed out within 30 minutes from 0 to 30 for rates of 10 to 40 in case of 1 2 or 3 activated groups approximate timing 5 11 2 2Setting up outdoor unit capacity control This intermittently lowers capacity of registered outdoor units based on a calendar as shown below 266 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual S i72 301 Operation Details 2 groups of outdoor unit
147. ager Remote over telephone line or sub PC over Local Area Network e Reserve the size for the rotation database of analogue data Enter the maximum database size in Mbytes or Click the Calculate button of the Analogue Database Size frame Select the storage Time Period in days Type the number of Management Points to store Click the Calculate button Click the Ok button to make the database size limitation effective or the Cancel button to abort e Type the daily report Cumulation Period and Saving Path e Check the Shutdown Mode shut down Windows NT when exiting intelligent Manager e Check the Turn Off Mode shut down the computer and turn it off when exiting intelligent Manager option available depending on the BIOS of the PC e Check the Watchdog if the intelligent Manager Watchdog will be activated separate option e Check the Ignore Auto Shutdown if an intelligent UPS is activated for details see Appendix C Power Failure Management e Check the Visual Navigation if the Visual Navigation function is activated site layout based operation for configuration details see the section 6 5 Configuring the Visual Navigation e Check the Power Proportional Distribution if the PPD function is activated for configuration details see the section 5 3 2 Configuring the Indoor Unit points e Check the Power Limit Control if the control of power consumption function is activated for configuration details see the s
148. ager automatically shuts down However if other application software is started up the PC power supply may be cut off before the correct shutdown procedure has been carried out resulting in operational data not being properly saved Use small font size intelligent Manager requires that a small font be used To set up and check click the right mouse button in the background of Windows gt select properties gt display details gt font size gt select small font 1 3 Functional Outline of intelligent Manager Note 164 Depending on the organization of your system some functions may be inaccessible i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Before use Display Measuring Client Data Management Management Point State Monitoring Continuous Operation Time Limit Monitoring Analog Maximum Minimum Limit Monitoring Management Point State Display Control Group Display History Display Individual Start Stop Control Group Collective Start Stop Operation Mode Setup Temperature Setup Remote Control Operation Setup Reset Filter Sign Centralized Control Setup Schedule Control Interlocking Control In case of fire etc Emergency Stop Control Power failure release control Automatic Meter Reading Operation Time amp Cumulative Number of Start Stop Analog Measuring projected Simple Tenant Management Collected Measurement Data i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual
149. aiid 27 C Q Undoor Unit 49 Stop Cooling biia 27 C Q Undoor Unit 5 Stop Cooling iaiia 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 50 Stop Cooling ARR 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 51 Stop Cooling adii 27 C 6 Undoor Unit 52 Stop Cooling etal D C ie Undoor Unit 6 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 60 Start Cooling 280 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 61 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 63 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C Q Undoor Unit 64 Start Cooling ZB 0 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 65 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C 0 LIindoanr I Init GG Otar Danline s50 annon a7 of A Current Screen All Mng Pt 142 Click to printout 31 Functions E Defrost status display elndication for each indoor unit Cell Ta b le View Sir con Undoor Unit 3 Undoor Unit 42 Undoor Unit 62 Undoor Unit 1 Defrost status is shown by Undoor Unit 10 Start Undoor Unit 11 Start Undoor Unit 10 U10 Undoor Unit12 Start Present Status Status Filter Sign Operation Mode Heat C Suc Temp 22 00 m Operation A iter Sign ZRC restriction a san DEl ee AN ae Start Stop i OneratinnMnde Temn E Fan speed direction monitor amp control intelligent Manager eSetup for each indoor unit eStatus in Table Report File Menu Operation Help Table View Heating Cooling Si72 301 a2 C 22 C 22 C 22 C 22 C 22 C 227 Air Conditionner Setup Togn aircon act
150. al list all dates free explanation also possible ex every Sunday is Off etc Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Off Special Target Type because same name could stand for a Management Point or for a Control Group Management Point Control Group Action Time format is HH MM Action Type Start Stop RC Enable RC Disable Fan Cool Heat Set Point indicate temperature value C insert lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 5 Interlocking programs As this programs can be easily modified by the customer a complete description is not required However the template data sheet is provided as a reference Fill one data sheet for each program Interlocking Program Name Input items Input Type Detection Type 5 Z a D 3 D O O EN None All Turned On At least one turned On All Turned Off At least one turned Off Detection Condition Start Interval O 10 20 30 custom sec Output Type Action Type Output 1 events O 5 Z D 3 D O S r xe G aa N None All Turned On At least one turned On All Turned Off At least one turned Off Detection Condition Start Interval 0 10 20 30 custom sec i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 115 Workflow Overview Si72 301 Output 2 events Output Name Output Type Action Type Notes Input Detection Type Switch Equipment Error Input amp Output Type
151. ancel Select a management point control group Click the scroll bar if necessary When satisfactory click the Add gt gt button A list of the output management points registered will appear on the right Select the output action from the bottom right action buttons It is also possible to modify only the action of previously registered output management points Click on the output management point name to be modified to enable action switchover Input management points can be removed by selecting the points to be removed from the list on the right hand side click the scroll bar if necessary and clicking the Remove lt lt button Use the and buttons to modify the order of the output management point display If everything is satisfactory click the OK button Clicking the Cancel button cancels the registration and the interlocking program setup screen is restored Next set up the output action Select the condition from the drop down list If Not Detected is selected interlocking control cannot be carried out on the management point groups registered in Output1 Sequential start time may be set up for multiple registrations of management points A similar procedure is used to register Output2 If everything is satisfactory click the OK button Clicking the Cancel button cancels the interlocking program setup The interlocking emergency program setup screen is restored Newly registered contents and modifi
152. anged in the future without prior notice 3 Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document However please do not hesitate to contact us in the case of any missing erroneous or unclear information 4 We take no liability for any loss etc resulting from customer misuse of our products failure to comply with the in structions contained in this manual repairs or modifications carried out by a third party other than Daikin etc 162 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual Si72 301 Part 5 Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Ts HS COLORS US Carcteus tats sieadeathucietaia shih A cane tee nenauet 164 1 1 The Features of intelligent Manage l ccccccccseeeseeeesseeeeseeeeneeeenees 164 12 SHEN DOM ANT INOS Ssi O Dra 164 1 3 Functional Outline of intelligent Manager cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 164 2 Basic Screen and Screen Directory cccccceecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeanes 167 2 Basie SCreen Lay OUU ais a ene uct cence asic can ec Penae radi aee cetera laeeden acest 167 22 OGEC DICCION Aucetay se soatedecsactatant A 168 3 Starting and Stopping Operation of intelligent Manager 171 Sol Stating ODCTATON resinosa aa aA 171 3 2 Stopping Operation up to Power Supply OFF ccccsseeeeeeeeeeee 172 3 3 Power Failure Management Automatic Stop Restart 00ccce 172 4 LOO QING Ii OG OIG OU eere ane ladda taeda aed ieideeiieee 173
153. art exe Tenant Trend graph GraphReportexe Pro Graph Report setup TenantSetup exe Tenant a 73 User definition 1 Basie Screen Information User definition 2 User definition 3 User definition 4 m Sereen Size C 1024x768 m Guide Bar M Show Guide Bar Edit Update Name Class Exec Module Argument Report Type e Daily C Monthly Yearly C Mo Report Screen Lock I Lock Origino fo ea res Some of the configuration parameters are saved in the ini file Please refer to the section 7 1 Saving below to save this file after customization has been performed 6 4 1 Customizing Management Points Interface When login in service mode see procedure above it is possible to customize the labels of action buttons of each management point individually e Right click in the title screen the popup menu displays e Select the Management Point Attribute Setup the configuration dialogue is displayed e Select a Management Point in the list and click the Attributes button the Attributes Setup dialogue displays e Select the Check boxes and edit the labels and options Click the ok button i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 91 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application i72 301 Mng points setup Listed Points 4 amp All Indoor Unit File Menu Operation Help C Equipment a xa Login Mng P
154. ase kWh meter with pulse output Heat Recovery Electric energy 1 Masa ee ee Sees ee pulse k i signal line fh hb at det ha r JC_IC_ l Fig 2 Recommended Heat Recovery and other system watthour meter are separated Design Guide 45 Connection other than VRV 8 Connection other than VRV Si72 301 Though the models other than VRV are included in Rate calculation applicable models the following system shows the example of connection of HRV Type FJ and general purpose adapter 8 1 System Example i E Wht Seles L Q unit power Indoor unit HRV light pump amp fan power LD Remote control connection Electric energy pulse between HRV and building O signal line use multi type a i PU Oo LISI G amp C oo gg fan Light Ventilating Pump If the VRV and HRV are connected through remote controller the HRV can independently be operated therefore the centralized control wiring is required to HRV General purpose adapter E Connection by contact signal J General number of wiring Run command Firm contact 2 pcs State Abnormal monitoring 3 pcs Only the equipment consuming constant power can be connected through general purpose adapter 8 2 Requirements E if HRV and general purpose adapter are used the power consumption of the indoor unit is to be distributed Therefore it is necessary to input the power consumption of
155. ated value and the indicated value of watthour meter are the same as those in Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 Number of integrating watthour meter with pulse oscillator As a standard system one integrating watthour meter with pulse oscillator abbreviated Watthour meter hereafter is to be provided If more than 19 units are connected the following method two ways are effective 1 The mounting position of watthour In most cases if watthour meter mounting position is meter is to be changed changed to the main body side toward near cubicle of the receiving equipment the number of watthour meter can be set within 12 units If the number of units is increased these epuipment cost will be increased by more than hundreds of thousands yen 2 The specification of watthour meter is In this case because some many watthour meters to to be changed together with use of pulse synthesizer are used the cost goes up For this reason pulse output it is basically not recommended However if more than 19 units are connected by all means the pulse synthesizer should be used and the specification of watthour meter should also be different from the standard one For more detail you can consult with our Technical Sales Section 3 Setting of the period with no electric energy distributing For period of electric energy distributing the usual continuous calculating system is normally adopted but it is also allowed to set the time zone and days
156. ately in a file on the hard disk This saved data may also be consulted on the Detailed history screen 5 4 1 Displaying Malfunction Messages If a malfunction or breakdown forecast is generated in the monitoring equipment details of the content will be displayed in the Malfunction history real time display area at the bottom of the screen At the same time if the alarm buzzer has been set to ON set up on the system setup screen an alarm buzzer will sound Above is an example extracted of the main screen However Malfunction history real time display area can appear on any screen and if a malfunction or breakdown forecast is generated details of the content will be displayed in this area 5 4 2 Detailed History Screen 194 In addition to malfunction of management points changes in state such as Start Stop brought about by automatic control scheduling etc may be managed on the detailed history screen Information displayed on the detailed history screen may be either real time data or information saved in a file on the hard disk i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Detailed History Screen saved data intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help xal oj Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide 2001 10 11 Thu 16 48 usr Main 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Level1 VVst1 Oper list 2001 10 11 16 39 10 Level1 V st
157. ation 8 2 3 Step 3 On site installation 8 2 3 1 Pre conditions e Purchase order checklist see template in 8 3 Templates Equipment ordered in Step 1 106 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview 8 2 3 2 Procedure and Result e Wiring the UPS the PC the iPUs the Ethernet network Proceed as explained in the Engineering Manual of intelligent Manager e Installing and configuring the PC environment the PC OS the UPS control software the intelligent Manager Software installing the iPUs OS Proceed as explained in the Engineering Manual of intelligent Manager 8 2 4 Step 4 On site configuration 8 2 4 1 Pre conditions e Data files issued from Step 2 Engineering Data 8 2 4 2 Procedure and Result e Loading the configuration Proceed as explained in the Engineering Manual of intelligent Manager 8 2 5 Step 5 Checking intelligent Manager 8 2 5 1 Pre conditions e Commissioned intelligent Manager system 8 2 5 2 Procedure and Result e Testing the configuration Basic control and monitoring Management points and control groups Automatic control programs Scheduling Interlocking Emergency Stop Power failure control Power proportional distribution engineering Proceed as explained in the Engineering Manual of intelligent Manager 8 2 6 Step 6 Training 8 2 6 1 Input e intelligent Manager demonstration version with demonstration script e intellig
158. ays displayed at the bottom of the list of the main screen Note A timeout will hang up if the call is not completed within a few minutes in order to avoid communication from one site to block the line Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 277 Intelligent Manager Watchdog i72 301 1 2 3 Stopping Listening Click the Stop button and confirm as shown below The Online diode is now dark red Watchdog T Oj x Messages Help Site Time Name ID PORT ADDR CODE ite 2001 6 22 18 34 46 Level1 East1 1 1 1 1 00 Start ite 2001 6 22 18 34 53 Emergenc 01 195 Fire alarm Watchdog et E Site1 2001 6 22 18 34 53 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Sta Watchdog xi Site1 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Emergenc 01 395 Fire Release Site1 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Stop Q Fesk don iona a ean col Site2 20017 6 22 18 34 46 Level1 East 1 1 1 1 001 Start Site 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Stop H Cancel f gt Start Stop On line Receiving call This operation should be used only for exiting the Watchdog or performing offline operations see details below If stopping listening when receiving a call a confirmation message is displayed If user confirms the call is hang up and all the data may not be received 1 2 4 Exiting the Watchdog Select from the top menu the Messages Exit entry and confirm as shown below Watchdog Messages Help All Sites For Site Watchdog Print Puree File
159. b 6 3 Group 4th Floor Member Nb 4 4 Member List Daily Report Data Group bet Copy Load Save merae Control Group Attributes Name Group ID E Operation Interval 2 sec Si72 301 Stop Interval 0 sec cane Levell Est3 Levell Est4 Levell sti Levell WWst2 Levell Wst3 Levwell Wet4 Level2 Est Level Est2 Level2 Est3 Level2 VVstl Level2 VWst2 Level2 Wst3 Level Nort Level2 Nor2 Level2 Nor3 Level3 Est1 Level3 Est2 Level3 Est3 Level3 Wistt x Type All Air Conditionner Equipment 5 3 11 Configuring D3 Ports Select the option D3 Ports and click the Add button ak Cancel Then enter the iPU Number 1 to 4 and the D3 Port Number 1 to 4 then select the Central Control option to authorized or prohibit use of central controller Click the Check button to verify the validity of points configuration Type RY ini Re e Mng Pt C C G D3Port Load save cnec a r2 U Reve 10 iPUNO Portno 1 Central Control Setup Ic Prohibited Allowed cancel Dally Resort Data 5 4 Configuring Energy Saving This procedure performs definition of the Pulse Input management point used to measure the power trend for the energy saving function Power LimitControl Start the VRV Setup tool and login Then click the Power Limit Control Setting button to display the
160. be deactivated by initial setup If the Back button is clicked it will revert to the screen displayed immediately beforehand i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 167 Basic Screen and Screen Directory i72 301 2 2 Screen Directory In a dialog when OK and Cancel buttons exist the operation may be cancelled However when an operation within a dialog may not be cancelled a warning appears to this effect If the operation is pursued the Cancel button is grayed out and cancellation is no longer an option If buttons such as Open list or Detail are selected from a functional menu screen the screen will appear as in the structure shown below 168 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Basic Screen and Screen Directory Login Multi layered List Management Points List Management Points List lt Management Point List Management Group Management Group Management Group Control Group List Management Points List Visual Navigation Schedule Setup Tenant Setup Interlocking Control Program Setup Interlocking Program Tenant Report Emergency Stop Program Setup Data Management Graph Report System Setup Management Group Setup Screen Reservation Move Screens Control Group Setup Automatic Circular Sequence Online help fire etc Login Setup Eco Mode Energy Saving fire etc Centralized Control Setup Power Limit Control Emergency Stop fire etc Buzzer Setup Detailed History Display Histor
161. ber of Start Stop e Maximum cumulative number of Start Stop warning value e Cumulative running time e Maximum cumulative running time warning value Note An asterisk after the operation mode indicates that the system is in defrost state 5 3 Displaying Control Groups e A control group is a group of management points brought together for collective control e In a control group list control and state display of control group units are carried out Control and state display of individual management point units is possible in a lower layer screen As the operation method is identical to that of management point lists please refer to 5 2 Displaying Management Groups p 177 e A management point may belong to more than one control group This supposes that a given management point will take the appropriate form when belonging both to a normal control group and to the control group used in the case of emergency stop Click the Ctrl Gr button from the menu buttons intelligent Manager Fie Menu Operation Help Schedule Interlock Data Mng System m Back 190 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help 3 Ejs 2 xal Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jum ae Back 2001 10 11 Thu 17 50 Control groups usr Main Digital Inputs Gen St Bian Digital O
162. branches a branch from an NZ existing branch are not possible Design Guide 39 Wiring Image i72 301 5 2 Wiring Diagram intelligent Manager Electric Wiring Diagram Power supply I AC100 240V 7 7 Earth leakage breaker A Install for safety Power supply iig wiring 2 0Omnt DAIKIN D BACS intelligent Processing Uni iL A Ep A POWER 1 200 240V Ethernet X D SUB 25 pin female Ethernet 10BASE T 6 M3 5 oO NO ma N N o 1 Watt Hour meter 2 Key signal 3 Fire alarm D SUB 9 pin female Power failure RS232C 2 D SUB 9 pin male RS232C 3 Modem 486 1 485 2 Bes Pes Ea a 1 t2 31415 6 Fire TTT X F1 F2 F1 F2 Fl F2 F1 F2 Ea fel Fel Ea MAX64 Group Required Installation Space 6 0 y D BACS 80 40 Design Guide Si72 301 Wiring Image 5 3 Wiring Specifications DAM602A51 Wiring specifications To be prepared local ly HUB Monitor Ethernet i panel 10BASE T Personal computer Use sheathed vinyl cord 2 wire or cable 0 75 2mm2 Wire length Max 200m No polarity Control relay wiring Wattmeter Key input O O Fire alarm input 0 O Wattmeter li Up to four input devices can be connected to each G terminal Do not connect three or more wires together to one terminal Use micro current contacts for no voltage input contacts Voltage and current to be at DC 16 V and below 10 mA with the conta
163. cdeecst ceitahesi cs ale Deh ccktlaci ela nancial iii 301 2 8 Ether RCV LED Does Not Light ccccccsceccseseeeeeseeeeceeeeesseeeeeeees 302 2 9 RS485 1 TxD RxD RS485 2 TxD RxD LEDs are off 303 2 10 RS232C 2 TxD and RxD LED is off or Lights Up cece ceeeeeee ees 304 2 11 LEDs of DIIl 1 2 3 and 4 is off or Lights eee cceceeeeeseeeeeeeeees 305 2 12 Can Not be Connected to iPU Software Setting ccccesseeeeeeees 306 2 13 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware Malfunction 008 307 2 14 Some of the Air Conditioners Have Communication Error 308 2 15 An Communication Error is Displayed on the Screen of i Manager PC cccccsseeeceseeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeens 309 2 16 The Temperature Detected by DIII Ai in i Manager Test Run Can Not be Monitored Properly c00008 310 Table of Contents Si72 301 Part 1 Design Guide Te SVSTCIM OVCIWICW osasi e Siva hece ted iahivaledan teeta 2 Wig OV CIVIC Wort te aa lear thathon Racnotn att tach cata ca tet atieats ma haan 2 L2 Fea Seign aE E 2 2a SOW Em MIM AQ E e REN 3 21 System IMAGE onasini E 3 22 Series and COMPONeENs ccccccccseccecseceseeceecececceeeecsecceceseseeseeceesees 3 3 FUNCUON S uee E E es tire eens Tet areer 4 Sali OCA FUNC IONS enean aa aa TA 4 322 BISI FUNCIONS er A 5 3 3 Upgrade ECO21 ver2 FUNCIONS onir A 24 4 System AIrCniteCtUre er
164. ce referred below as the Remote PC to operate intelligent Manager on a site referred below as the Monitoring PC by use of telephony facilities referred below as Modem The operation is similar with the sub PC but the network communication is achieved by using the RAS Remote Access Service of Windows Several sub PCs can be configured however only one can connect to the master PC at a time Remote PC in office intelligent Manager ile Menu eration He 949 AMT Login E Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Guide Mng point list 2001 4 11 Wed aaa 18 02 R Mne point list Ned un E Stop Error W Com Error B Maintain ACI ACS D3Do1 Internal Dil WOOK Dj OOK NoName NoName NoName NoName AC2 AC6 D3Do2 Internal Dol S WOK HOOK NoName NoName NoName NoName AC3 AC7 D3Do3 Internal Do2 ae o NoN NoName NoName NoName AC4 ACS D3Do4 Internal Pil Peers ieee Indicator 0 Gz NoName NoName NoName NoName uzzer o Ta Monitoring PC on site Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Guide Mng point list 20017 4 11 Wed 18 02 1 2 gt gt in MB Stop Error W Com Error B Maintain can Main D3Do1 Internal Dil NoName NoName AC2 ACE D3Do2 Internal Dol hall NoName NoNam NoName NoName 403 ACT D3Do3 Internal Do2 a hall NoName NoNam NoName NoName A404 a See ACB D3Do4 a
165. cending order by date default name error code site etc This operation can be performed even when the Watchdog is listening However when a new record is received it is always added at the bottom of the list for easy identification no dynamic resorting Watchdog 7 E ol x Messages Help Site Time Name PORTYADDR CODE Site ZOO 622 16 34 56 Emergent 01 395 Fire Release Site 2001 A22 18 3453 Emergent 01 4195 Fire alarm Site 200417 6 22 18 34 53 Fire Signal 1 19 Start Site 4 2001 622 16 34 56 Fire Signal 1 145 Stop Site 20017 B22 18 3446 Levell East 1 1 1 00 Start Start On line Receiving call 280 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual Si72 301 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 1 3 3 Maintaining the local database 1 3 3 1 Clearing the local database To maintain performance of the Watchdog it is recommended to periodically reset the content of the local database Once or twice a year is recommended in case of normal use However in the case of voluminous recording a more frequent purge is required ex monthly Select from the top menu the Messages Purge File entry and confirm as shown below This renames the database file as YYYYMMDDHHmmssWatchdog csv where YYYYMMDDHHmmss indicates the time stamp when the purge action was performed and creates a new one This function is disabled when receiving a call Watchdog Messages Help All Sites For Site 2 Really purg
166. chedule control Also special schedule changes within one week change on execution schedule screen 14 Design Guide Si72 301 Design Guide Functions 8 Interlocking Program Screen Automatically starts and stops equipment that was set in response to changes in the operating status of the facilities or the occurrence of errors 8 types of input conditions can be specified Using this enables the interlocking of starting and stopping of a plurality of facilities operation in order etc indoor outdoor link key management link and reporting 1 link program can set a maximum of 50 input condition management items and a maximum of 50 start stop output management items A maximum of 100 link programs can be defined A plurality of link programs can be applied for input and output of the same management items Interlocking Program Screen Interlock Program Setup New program Input Name Shortname Detection conaiti _ Modify Fire Signal Fire Switching state Level1 Est1 L1E1 Switching state Level1 Est2 L1E2 Switching state Levell Est3 L1E3 Switching state Level1 Est4 L1E4 Switching state Level1 V st1 L11 Switching state Leyel1 V st2 L12 Switching state Output 1 Output 2 Not detected Modify Not detected Modify P Level2 Est3 P Level2 Est2 Short ne Stop P Levyel2 Est3 L2E3 Start P Level2 Est2 L2E2 Stop P Level2 Est3 L2E3 Start P Level2 Est2 L2E2 Stop P Levyel2 Est3 L2E3 Start P
167. chover Interlock Program Setup Interlock 3 IF a Name Shortname Detection conait Woon gt Jump Back 2000 4 24 Mon 13 31 Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Mng System a Interlocking Emergency Stop Forward Message Logoff Main Program Type Openlist r Enabled C Yes No EEA eel Output 1 Output 2 Create Not detected Modify Not detected sy Modify Copy Delete Start Time Interval sec Start Time Interval sec C0 10 20 30 Custom 0 AE len C10 20 C 30 C Custom 0 AE OK Cancel Click the Modify button in the Input frame First select the detection condition Interlock Program Input settings Interlock 3 Available Management Points hWanagement Point Input Fire Signal BEIRA Switchi Levell Est Levyell Ests Levell Estd Leyell VVsti Levell Vist2 Levell VWst3 Levell Vstd Level Est Leyel Est2 Leyel Est3 Leyel Mort Level More Level Mors Detection Condition amp Switch C Equipment Error Analog Upper Limit Analog Lower Limit OK Cancel Select a management point control group Click the scroll bar if necessary When satisfactory click the Add gt gt button A list of the input management points registered will appear on the right Input management points can be removed by selecting the points to be removed from the list on the righ
168. click on the program name displayed in the interlocking emergency program screen click the scroll bar if necessary Then select the Yes option in the Activate frame When modifying the content of a previously set up program the program must be deactivated to allow modifications to take place The program may not be deactivated during an emergency stop Therefore the emergency stop must be released before deactivating the program 236 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 File Menu Operation Help a ie el B S 9 Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide 2001 9 18 Tue 15 25 Interlocking Emgey Stop usr Main Open list Program Type C interlocked Ctr Emergency Stop Ctrl Activation Activat No Programname d Enabled 1 3 Pum C Disable Edit Create Copy pelete Ow Restore Fire Print Export PwrLimit Buzzer Operation Details gt 104 Program cannot be modified since it is enabled Open dialog in read only mode Cancel Click on the program name and the Copy Delete Rename buttons to copy delete and modify name respectively Set to No in the Activate frame when deleting or modifying names Enter the correct name and click the OK button Cancel by clicking the Cancel button 5 10 System Options In order to meet the requir
169. crosoft TCP IP Properties El x IP Address DNS WINS Address Routing An IP address can be automatically assigned to this network card by a DHCP server IF your network does not have a DHCP serwer ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Adapter 1 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI NIC 3C905C Tx 0 Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server Specify an IP address IP Address 192 168 0 102 Subnet Mask AG Ga a Default Gateway 7 Advanced e Click the Start button and select Settings Control Panel double click on the icon Network the Network dialogue appears e Select the Services tabulation and select the Remote Access Service entry if it is not installed refer to the Windows NT documentation to perform installation then click the Properties button the Remote Access Setup dialogue appears e Click the Configure button the Configure Port Usage dialogue appears e In the Port Usage select e On the monitoring PC e If the intelligent Manager Watchdog is used Dial out and receive calls option e If the intelligent Manager Watchdog is not used Receive Call Only option e On the remote PC Dial Out Only option e then click the Ok button e Click the Network button the Network Configuration dialogue appears If Dial Out Only option had been selected above then e Check the NetBUI box only if this protocol is installed on the PC lis
170. ct closed The order of connections may flexibly be modified depending on the test run settings With a combination of OPDi Di 2 and Di 3 total of 18 input devices can be connected DI NET wiring Polarity No Ei fe Polarity No Never use three and more core wires Make sure the wires are 0 75 1 25 mm thick Wire length Max 1000 m Do 1 and DAM602A51 Do not bundle the DII NET wires together Do not lay the DII NET wires for a long distance by bundling and secur ing them with tape tie wraps or the ike Lay the DIIT NEI wires separately from any power lines to keep off electrical noises Do 2 settings Recommended wire 0 75 2 mm thick Lamps etc Connection terminal size M4 Voltage specifications No voltage contact output Allowable current 10 mA to 1A Allowable voltage AC 250 V Wiring distance Max 150 m External wiring to be all prepared locally Design Guide 41 Setting Up i72 301 6 Setting Up 6 1 Precautions for Setup The intelligent Manager Monitor System PC and printer are used in the same way as general OA equipment iPUs are set up within the system However avoid setting up in the following locations e Locations that are exposed to direct sunlight or that are subject to radiation from heat generating equipment such as a boiler e Locations with high humidity or where there could be contact with water e Locations that are corrosive or where infla
171. ction p 189 for details Icons can be of a management point or control group As in management points and control groups the colors are explained in the legend see 5 2 1 State Monitoring List p 178 and 5 3 1 Monitoring Control Groups p 191 for details 5 12 3 Controlling points and groups This is performed by the icons only Click on an icon to select it then operation is can be performed with the action buttons pull down menu or popup menu as in management points and control groups see 5 2 2 Start Stop Operation p 182 to 5 2 4 Setting up equipment p 184 and 5 3 2 Collectively Controlling with Control Groups p 192 for details i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 269 Database Maintenance Si72 301 6 Database Maintenance Warning 270 This section explains which action should be taken when the size of the intelligent Manager database becomes excessive The capacity of the intelligent Manager database is limited only by the available space on the hard disk of the computer When this limit becomes close less than 10 Megabytes intelligent Manager issues a warning in the History screen The procedure consists in deleting the oldest items from the database by making use of the ezDBMaintenance tool as described below Always backup the current database on a separate hard disk on CD Rom etc before performing any maintenance operation Step 1 exit from intelligent Manager See details of this operat
172. d mentioned above on 2 1 Result of detection by management staff 5 24 5 24 6 22 6 24 amp 0 00 10 00 23 59 10 00 Detection 1 Detection 2 Count result of iPU iPU stores the information collected in a period of 0 00 am through 23 59 pm as one day information as shown above It results in the fact that there are ten hours gaps between on the first day of the counting and on the last day of the count in the above mentioned column of Result of detection by management staff and Count result As shown in the figure above this error increases in the season from the intermediate forwarding to the season in which airconditioning is highly required For more accuracy it is neassary to compare with the value detected at 0 00 am Design Guide Si72 301 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution 10 2 3 Setting of power group in the power proportional distribution Design Guide m Points When plural watt hour meters have been installed carry out the setting of power group is essential E Models intelligent Touch Controller Power Proportional Distribution Card DCS002A51 intelligent Manager ECO21 DAM602A51 52 53 m Reason In the case of normal Power Proportional Distribution power consumption by outdoor units as well as the system between outdoor and indoor units has not been taken into consideration Instead because the pulse input value from watt hour meter is proportioned according to the ratio
173. d Manual r Log On s S a G WE Manual amp f G amp 4 A F Fe Remote Procedure Call RPC Locator Manual System Account Modems Mouse Mulimeda Network Ports Printers pause AE eae Stated Automatic T Allow Service to Interact with Desktop System Event Notification Manual Server Started Automatic Pre Spooler Started Automatic e Q amp m l 2 This Account a Task Scheduler Started Automatic QuickTime 32 Regional SCS Adapters Server TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Started Automatic Startup Password Settings Telephony Service Stated Mana f Saw i se HW Profiles Contin c amp E Startup Parameters Password Tape Devices Telephony UPS Hp Starts stops and configures services e Starting the Remote Access Server automatically e Click the Start button and select Settings Control Panel double click on the icon Services the Services dialogue appears e In the services list select the Remote Access Server entry then click the Startup button the Startup Profile dialogue appears e select the Automatic Start option the click the Ok button the startup Profile dialogue disapears e Click the Start button if you wish to start the service immediately or e Starting the Remote Access Server manually e Click the Start button and select Programs Administrator Tools Remote Access Admin the Remote Access Admin application appears e Select the Server
174. d always be ON It should always be ON Ca It should always be OFF Ci It should always be OFF DS4 It should always be ON Ca It should always be OFF The mm symbol indicates switch knob position The following settings Should be done for the factory default DS1 to DS4 settings DS1 Gz CE Set to address 1 00 pe kE Cm ier DS3 TE ae Set not to use multi purpose sensors e DS4 Fa k Cm OFF The mm symbol indicates switch knob position GB cutting JP6 When using multi purpose sensors cut jumper JP6 on the printed board using nippers etc X When using multi purpose sensors set DS3 at the same time as these settings are being done X Be sure to get rid Of line Cuttings when cutting the jumper Failing to remove them may cause the printed board to malfunction 2 6 Once all Settings are complete Replace the removed cover in 2 1 using the screws C 1P108833 1 3 Design Guide 5 7 Questions amp Answers Si72 301 12 Questions amp Answers Q1 A Q2 A Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 58 If the number of iPU exceeds four units indoor unit exceeding 1024 units what is a suitable solution At present a maximum of 4 iPU s can only be connected If only the iPU has a power interruption what is the out come During the power interruption the pulse signal cannot be counted therefore the calculation result is reduced
175. d out in the case of power failure and automatic restart is carried out when the power is restored When the iManager detects a signal of power failure the data of the iPU are locally saved in the memory state of management points etc When the power is restored the data are read out from the memory so that the system can be restarted in its previous state During this time period the interlocking automatic control function of the intelligent Manager system is deactivated Failure Restore Detection Caution Warnings 128 The iManager system is equipped with an un interruptible power supply UPS which power failure output signal is connected on the internal Di 1 of the master iPU As well in order to preserve the UPS battery an optional shutdown input signal is connected to the internal Do 1 or 2 of the master iPU If this option is not present the iPU will automatically resume operation within 30 minutes from the power failure breakout However in the case of a software controlled UPS this internal Do should not be connected There are two types of wiring e one common big UPS for the iPUs and the PC recommended e several separate small UPS for the iPU and the PC The master iPU and the network hub should always be connected to the same UPS e Multiple UPS or UPS with limited functions In the case when the PC is connected to separate UPS be careful of the following restriction Some UPS control software cannot resta
176. data ee w Seu e Start the application OLE Type background registered to edit the Setup Dialogue i Regist M editor j i omgecec Onze Select COLL Update the object when C x exiting the application Background C Create New Fie Cancel Type Sa a The OLE object is stored in Sinan Tina he toon the VRV ini file WMF files are stored in the BGS subfolder Result Inserts the contents of the file as an abject into P 4 your document so that you may activate it using a the program which created it 2 Modify parameters name background picture of a screen Si72 301 96 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual i72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application 6 5 2 3 Modifying the contents of a Visual Navigation screen 6 5 2 3 1 Moving components in a screen Select the component one of the 3 types explained above right click mouse and select the Edit Mode Entry 3 Edit Mode is e On component can be moved then is not enabled i e Off component is enabled cannot be moved A HEE c Then move the component with the mouse or with the arrow buttons Shift key will mouse by 10 pixels Note Attributes of a selected item are set in the component setup dialogue Therefore copy of parts is easy 6 5 2 3 2 Creating a new icon e Select the management point or control group designated by the icon e Select a size between 3 options Small Regular Large
177. deactivated e At any time Click the Control State button to check the adjustment on groups as explained bellow Demand Control Setup x Control Group NoName 0 NoName 0 NoName 0 NoName 0 NoName 0 NoName 0 NoName 0 Management Points Selection Available Points Selected Points Name Shorn Register Mng Pt PrintlExport Cancel W3 Levell VWst4 LIWA lt Level2 Est1 L2E1 Level2 Est2 L2E2 Rem Level2 Est3 ES Level2 Nor2 L2N2 zi Listed Points All Indoor Unit Equipment Other Control Group GK Cancel Cancel Setting up the control parameters Order of groups cannot be changed however you can Rename the groups Proceed setup as explained below for each group e Register the indoor units a same indoor unit cannot belong to more than one group click the Register Mng Pt button select an indoor unit click the gt gt and lt lt buttons click the OK button to validate or the Cancel button to abort e Click on the Print Export button to print setting data on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file e Click the OK button to validate or the Cancel button to abort i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 263 Operation Details S i72 301 Controlling the execution state The control level of power limit the status of the classification and the temperatu
178. ditioner is stopped or in the condition of thermostat off the condition that the compressors are stopped as the temperature in the space where all the indoor units are installed falls down to the preset temperature the airconditioner consumes energy due to the energy consumption mainly by the crank case heater in the outdoor unit When the iPU is used the rated power consumption of the crank case heater is divided by the number of indoor units in usual connection for instance two indoor units of 2 5 HP are connected to an outdoor unit of 5 HP etc and the value is registered at the test run adapting each indoor unit s capacity Example RSXY5K Crank case heater s output 50W FXF80Lx2 oO Power consumption at no operation 50 2 25W The iPU counts the indoor unit s operating conditions every 20 seconds Since the indoor units send ON OFF data of the crank case heater to iPU it adds one 1 to the power counter inside iPU at no operation of the airconditioner when the crank case heater is ON When this counter reaches 180 it judges that the crank case heater was on for one hour and in case of the above mentioned indoor unit the counter goes back to zero after 25 Wh is added to the counting result This calculation process is conducted separately from the proportional division computation mentioned on the section 10 1 1 of this document and this input is got rid of from the pulse input of the watthour meter Because of thi
179. ditioning systems For existing buildings planning to update from a central air conditioning system to a decentralized air conditioning system E Merits Allows the configuration of simple systems that do not require an interface Has control data application software that supports drawing up business management plans Handles small to medium scale buildings Can be easily operated with the ease of an office computer AIR NET Service System Option intelligent Manager is equipped with the leading failure warning option preventing A C faults in advance There are restrictions in applicable areas so consult with us separately for details 1 2 Features E Simple Equipment Configuration High priced interface equipment is unnecessary between the monitoring system and the air conditioning equipment Particularly if directly connected with VRV for buildings that employ our DIII NET special instrumentation for sensors etc are unnecessary DIII NET makes it possible to directly monitor abundant operating data E Low Installation Work Less Wiring Wiring to VRV with equipment that handles DIII NET for your building is extremely easy You only need to connect to the DIII NET terminal Monitoring and control are possible just by wiring Daisy chain method 1 cable non polar dual core to each unit even for facility equipment User friendly System Anyone can easily operate using a mouse on an ordinary use computer
180. do the following operations again Connect to iPU with ftp and login Type bin and press return key Type put os and press return key When the ftp prompt comes back on the screen then type dir and press return key Compare the os file sizes in PC with iPU VRVSetup won t start up Warning message displays The VRV dil file is missed from the same folder of VRVSetup exe Please install iManager again A warning message comes up when VRVSetup starts Is it OK even if I select the OK button No Please select Cancel button and install iManager again 291 Before Installation 292 Si72 301 I tried to save the iPU settings to the iPU by iPU Setting Tool but it failed Please confirm the following items Is the iPU turned on Is the power supplied to HUB Is the PC and the iPU connected with the network cable via HUB I tried to save the Point list to the iPU by Mng Point Tool but it failed Please confirm the following items Is the iPU turned on Is the power supplied to the HUB Is the PC and the iPU connected with the network cable via the HUB iManager does not start Warning message displays Please confirm whether there is VRV dll in the bin folder If the VRV dlIl is not in the bin folder copy VRV dIl from the Tools folder to the bin folder If there is VRV dll in the bin folder please confirm the Execution path in PC Setting Tool is set to t
181. e Serves to configure the function that starts automatically and individually the indoor units in heating mode when the temperature is too low or in cooling mode when the temperature is too high as shown on the figure below Min Max Temperature Operation Overview Room Temp MX kea ni VEVET MON ec oe a Room Temperature is Start Heating a maintained within the tart Coolin Stop Heating range Stop Cooling Mint Cesi S Mini resisaet E anin eaaa U Aaeeea aE AEAEE Heating Mode Cooling Mode lt gt So Time Operational Procedure Temperature Limit X Available Wing Points Levell Ests Levell Estd Level Vstt Level Vist Add Levell Vst3 Levell ist4 Level Esti Groups Temperature Limit Group Group Contents Levell Esti Levell Est Level Est p Level Est3 Level Vystt Level yst Rem 1 evel2 vWst3 Level Mord Level Nore Level Nors Level3 Estt Level3 Estz Create Delete Group Attributes Activation C Enable amp Disable Mame group 1 Lower Limit Hape Upper Limit 36 c PrinvExport Cancel e Create the group e Enter the group name e Add Remove indoor unit members of the group i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 259 Operation Details i72 301 e Select the min and max Room temperature e Enable the group Click on the Print Export button to print all groups settings on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated f
182. e Gs caren cectee ed ce acugnan tire r aac 108 Part 3 Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual DOOD 1 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution ccccceseeeeeeees 136 Wiel SOOM CIVICW a sec ceceeat caitaacette estat cert a a a 136 1 2 Setting up the IPU Connections cccccceeeecceeeeeceeeeeeseseeeseeessaaees 137 1 3 Configuring the Distribution cccccccceseeeeceeeeecseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseneeeseaes 137 Ca MOUS Scie dacs portent isceat ssc ie dae mente ace ia oe tena iadet aie Svat inomene ta adeaemacensanieiaess 145 Table of Contents Si72 301 Part 4 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual csccesessseess 147 1 6 Introducing intelligent Manager Remote Options ccccseeeeeeeees 148 1 1 intelligent Manager Watchdog ccssecessseesssetenserensesessseeensersneneesons 148 1 2 intelligent Manager Remote ccccsssccssseesesecesseeeneneesensesenersneneesens 149 FRO CUIPE ITN CIN enaena 150 2 1 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Watchdog 150 2 2 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Remote 150 Installing and Configuring the TAPI DeVICE cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeneees 151 Intelligent Manager Watchdog ccscccseccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesaeeseeeeneeens 152 4 1 Configuring the Monitoring PC ccccccsececeesee
183. e ee Telephone Balance 0 0 00 2 Perform as above from 2 to 4 5 7 2 3 Removing a tenant It is possible to delete a tenant from the list Its personal information as well as management points configuration will be removed from the configuration file Ei Er sesse a a Commenti Comments Comment 4 Points nith A obert Address Telephone Balance 0 0 00 10 Tenant Setup Remove Tenant 1 Select a tenant as above in 1 2 Click the Remove Tenant button 3 Confirm in the warning message box to validate the deletion 210 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 7 2 4 Exiting the report setup application The configuration file is stored within the intelligent Manager database Click the Save Setup button as shown in the figure below to update it Then the operation buttons are deactivated until transfer completion is notified Click the OK button to acknowledge the backup completion After the configuration has been saved click the Exit button A confirmation box appears warning if the configuration has not been saved Click the Yes button to exit or the else click the No button to return to the tenant setting application Tenant Setup x Tenants Name Code four comments free editing Nb of points Add Tenant ave Setup Modify Tenan E mit Tenant 1 Smith Robert Address Telephone Palance 0 0 00 Tenant Set
184. e file Print If the database was empty an error is displayed as shown below Watchdog AN File ig already empty 1 3 3 2 Viewing previously cleared records It is possible to peruse a previously cleared database by renaming the database file as watchdog csv and starting the watchdog Always make a copy of the current watchdog csv database file beforehand However always perform this offline do not start listening as new records would be mixed with old ones Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 281 Intelligent Manager Watchdog i72 301 1 4 Troubleshooting When records have not been received from sites check the configuration on the site PC is the Modem correctly installed and configured is the phone number to the Watchdog PC correct are the retry parameters sufficient for the load on the line Check the condition on the Watchdog PC is the modem properly installed and configured on the Watchdog PC hasn t the line been overused the received records too many records sent from sites at the same time combined with insufficient retry on sites configurations of sending can lead to records being dropped out 282 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual Si72 301 2 intelligent Manager Remote 2 1 Introducing intelligent Manager Remote intelligent Manager Remote This manual explains how to operate the intelligent Manager Remote application This application runs on a PC in offi
185. e marked with an asterisk Constraints and usage of other data are described case by case Point address type the iPU No Port No and Address refer to the commissioning documentation for actual value Point Identifier type the name must be unique within intelligent Manager points and short name unique recommended but not required Point layout type the Icon ID or click the Refer button to select it Enter the information needed in the fields of the tabulations Common Monitor Indoor Measure and Other see details for each type below Click successively the tabulations and enter the relevant data see detailed explanations in paragraphs below 78 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool Mn Font tributes xi Common all t es wu na fi Jit Na f aawesa 1 E Phe TORTEN tang a wha yp Neme NoNeme Srort Name Noncme Icon DJ 102 ef Maker who manufactured Cormon wonton Measure ome m 7 Waker Ncrame Equipment Name designation O D Model Nb I Nchame Model No or serial No a Installation place and Time actual location on the site a omg LreTime i years Daf C nc monior Life Time How many years before replacement if not 0 a warning will be Bisbee recorded in History when the life limit is reached Hide from Database User cannot see in data management screens
186. e power has been restored When the iManager detects a signal of power failure the state of the power indicator changes as shown below Normal state Power failure Power resume When the power failure occurs the data of the Station are saved locally operation state of management points etc When the power is restored the data are read out from the memory so that the system can be restarted in its previous state During this time period about 10 minutes automatic control functions of the intelligent Manager system are deactivated scheduling interlocking and emergency stop programs i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Logging in Logging out 4 Logging in Logging out intelligent Manager may be operated in accordance with the range of authority selected by the user when logging in If login is not carried out functions are confined to monitoring For details on login setup please refer to 5 10 3 Configuring user Login p 245 4 1 Logging in Login is carried out according to user classification settings Login Present Status Logoff a Hen Operation Hel User Password Cancel Click on the Login out menu button to display the login dialog box Select a login name and enter password Click on OK button to log in if the password is incorrect a message box is displayed Could not log in Invalid Fassword Please input corect password Select user login name Input user password
187. eaes 159 Oe IOUS Scie tctaceaticat cada seatssetea vate tectidoamuap ati tessa E 162 Model names and specifications or the like are subject to change without prior notice for further improvement so be sure to confirm the following catalogues and engineering data Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual 147 Introducing intelligent Manager Remote Options Si72 301 1 Introducing intelligent Manager Remote Options Note This manual explains how to install and configure the application on a remote computer to access intelligent Manager on site referred below as the Monitoring PC form a PC in office referred below as the Watchdog PC or the Remote PC by use of telephony facilities Modem This manual comes as a complementary document of the intelligent Manager Engineering Manual Please refer to it for further details about intelligent Manager installation and configuration 1 1 intelligent Manager Watchdog 148 in Watchdog Messages Help Site i Time Cid Name ID PORT ADDR Site 2001 6 22 18 34 46 Levell East 1 1 1 1 00 Start Site 2001 6 22 18 34 53 Emergent 01 195 Fire alarm Site1 2001 6 22 18 34 53 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Sta Site1 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Emergent 01 395 Fire Release Site1 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Stop Site2 2001 6 22 18 34 46 Leveli Easti 1 1 11 00 Start Site 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Fire Signal 59 1 19 Stop To receive on a remote computer the Watchdog alarms from one or more inte
188. eceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeesnees 152 4 2 Configuring the Watchdog PC ccccccecccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeseaes 154 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote cccsssccesseeeeeseeeeesaeeeees 155 5 1 Configuring the Remote Access Facility cccssccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 5 2 Configuring the Monitoring PC cccccsecccccseeeceeeeeeceeeeeseeseeesaneeessees 157 5 3 Configuring the Remote PC ccccccseeceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaneeeesseaes 159 NOTOS nianna in tse ali cael lap et le a ebay eal ends 162 Part 5 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 163 Table of Contents Ts Berre Use especie cnatadedenceuivesavdh E 164 1 1 The Features of intelligent Manage l cccccccecseeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeneeeeeaes 164 12 Important Noles eisiea aai 164 1 3 Functional Outline of intelligent Manager cccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseees 164 2 Basic Screen and Screen Directory ccccccsecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenes 167 ZA Basic SCS LAY QUE av cee sateen tee ced ee E bandetiedeneds 167 2 2 SELES DIECON sxieia tities ie alae sede nae detec ela ea eee 168 3 Starting and Stopping Operation of intelligent Manager 171 Sill Stang Operation siasi Seacc ea de ee eked veces uchd sian creanettuaeaevoniaieaces 171 3 2 Stopping Operation up to Power Supply OFF cccccsseeeeeeeeeeees 172 3 3 Power Failure Management Aut
189. ections 5 3 Configuring the Power Limit function and 6 2 8 1 Power Limit Control e Check the Eco Mode if the Eco Mode function is activated for configuration details see the section 6 2 8 2 Eco Mode e Check the Automatic Changeover if the Automatic Changeover function is activated for configuration details see the section 6 2 5 Automatic Change Over e Check the Sliding Temperature if the Sliding Temperature function is activated for configuration details see the section 6 2 6 Sliding Temperature e Check the Temperature Limit if the Temperature Limit function is activated for configuration details see the section 6 2 7 Min Max Temperature You can click the Save to File button to backup this data in a file In the Registries frame click the Write button and confirm to validate change Click the Exit button and confirm double step confirmation procedure i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool 5 2 Configuring the iPU Data Start the VRV Setup tool and login Then click the iPU Setting button to display the setting screen Engineering tool m Common into Individual setup of iPU This will overwrite data in iPU Power supply equip Pawer supply signal polarity fiput saat l UPS power failure signal Valid iPU SS User login information will be deleted if Previous date have no loaded beforehand fram iPU
190. ed as follows As shown in the drawing below when the relation between a wattmeter and indoor units are clear the setting to make grouping for power ports should be carried out at the test run of intelligent Manager The actual site job will be conducted by persons of service dept responsible for the test run Power supply 3 phase Power supply single phase mm Hub PC Tenant A Tenant B Tenant C To other iPU The power input to iPU can be counted with the proportional division system based on every input of the wattmeter On the above example watts at W1 and watts at W2 are shared by indoor units 1 5 and indoor units 6 8 respectively Before the test run it is necessary to enter the exact power port No on the address table The above setting results in the followings WD Count conclusive total for indoor unit 1 5 WD Count conclusive total for indoor unit 6 8 Except for the error at 1 However since iPU watt input has just 18 ports additional divisional counting is not possible CAUTION If management staff checks the watts in the procedure mentioned below they would find the calculation to be incorrect due to an uncomplete cycle Example 1 May 24th read wattmeter and records the watts at 10 00 am 2 June 24th read wattmeter and records the watts at 10 00 am 3 When the count in a period of May 24th to June 23rd is printed out the total value doesn t meet the value detecte
191. ed contents are not saved if the operation is cancelled When activated the registered interlocking program executes To execute the program click on the program name displayed in the interlocking emergency program screen click the scroll bar if necessary Then select the Yes option in the Activate frame i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Warning When modifying the content of a previously set up program the program must be deactivated to allow modifications to take place Click on the program name and the Copy Delete Rename buttons to copy delete and modify name respectively Set to Disable in the Activate frame when deleting or modifying names intelligent Manager a eels J Adal e WHET NEL Interlock 1 WETANEO Tay Sew pagni Ai Enter the correct name and click the OK button Cancel by clicking the Cancel button i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 231 Operation Details i72 301 5 9 2 Setting up Emergency Stop Programs 232 Up to 32 Emergency Stop Programs may be registered Up to 6 input management points for monitoring and any number of output management points may be registered for every Emergency Stop Program The only output action of the Emergency Stop Program is to stop action Operation authority is required to edit the Emergency Stop Program The Emergency Stop Program may not be edited during an emergency stop
192. ed from the list of available management points and added by clicking the Add gt gt button 200 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details To remove a management point from the Graph select the management point to be removed from the Graph content list and click the Rem lt lt button fh New Graph x Graph Content Ming Point Name h Se 10F Office 1 Outdoor Deq Available Management Points Mng Point Mame Pulee Meter1 kh Pulse meter kah Graph Mame Graphi Comment Operation Displayed Types C All E indoor Unit Equipment Other Use the option button to modify the type of the points displayed in the list of available management points Equipment includes Di Do and Dio management points Other includes Ai Ao and Pi management points If the there is no management point or if limit of number of management points different types of point i e different units is exceeded a warning message displays as shown below Error E4 The number of different units in the graph exceeds 2 The graph i empty Click the OK button to save the new graph as shown in the figure below or click the Cancel button to exit the dialog without saving the new graph settings Warming i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 201 Operation Details i72 301 5 6 3 2 Modifying a graph To modify a graph first select it in the list and then click on
193. ed the authority to open all screens check the appropriate checkbox If the screens that may be opened are to be restricted click the Regist Screen button to display the screen selection dialog box The screens that may be opened are selected from the list of available screens and added by clicking the Add gt gt button To remove a screen select the screen to be removed from the screen selection list and click the Remove lt lt button Available Screens List Selected Screens List Available Screens List Selected Screens List D System setup Schedule System setup D Schedule D Interlocking Emgcy Stop D Interlocking Emgcy Stop D Data management D Data management D Histary D History D Screen jump Add D Screen jump T D Power Limit control D Power Limit control i C Mng point list C Mng point list C Control group list C Control group list Le _ F Site View lt lt F site View C 2nd Floor C 3rd Floor Rem C Indoor Units C Digital Inputs C Digital Outputs C Meters x C 2nd Floor C 3rd Floor C Indoor Units C Digital Inputs C Digital Outputs F Free Layout C Cell Layout D Dialog OJTitle F Free Layout C Cell Layout DJDialog OJTitle Cancel e Cancel Click the OK button when selection is completed i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 249 Operation Details Si72 301 When all registrations have been completed click the OK button
194. ed when the value changes such as current pulse count of Pi etc 6 5 1 4 Screen buttons e When there are more than one screen layers the buttons ensure relation between these layers navigation e When clicking a button the screen assigned to this button is displayed e It is assumed that each screen displays one floor of the building However the actual structure is left to the appreciation according to the needs of the users Note using an icon other than the default one for cells can lead to confusion Therefore please use default icons whenever possible Screen Button Icon Auxiliary Information Me Pitt ae Maw Beare Move to Screen 2F M8 tt 8 Best By Mee et 8 Meas Bap 6 5 2 Operation First ensure that the Visual Navigation options are enabled in the VRVSetup tool as shown bellow Login in Service mode refer to Engineering manual for SE Login procedure Modify the attributes of the default Visual Navigation screen then create new screens accessible from this one see operation details below To access the layout setting dialogues click the mouse right button and select the function from the pull down menu If the function is not available then the entry is grayed out i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 95 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application Visual Navigation Screen only e 2 1 Create new icon ae 2 2 Crea
195. eeceeecesseeseeesseeseeesseeseeeenseess 62 1 1 Ab utthe Present Man al sroine A ies 62 1 2 The Composition of the intelligent Manager System cccsccceseeees 62 1 3 The Engineering Procedure cccccccsccssecceeceseseecseeseeeeeueeseeensenseass 63 Zi FICQUITOIMCINS easiest etc atect tect O a E 64 21 General REQUIFEMMCIUS siete ett etre n a eens 64 2 2 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Main Application 64 2 3 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Demo 0008 64 Cs VINO a aie coue luce tein tan te Renesed nada E et tede tue 65 3 1 Wiring the IPU Connections ccccecccccseeeeeeeeeeceeeeecseeeeeeaueseeseeesaaees 65 3 2 Wiring the Ethernet Network ccccccseeccseecesseeseeeseeeeseeeenseeseneesentenes 65 233 Wina IS UPS arrena rE 66 4 Installing the intelligent Manager system cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 67 4 1 Contents of the CD ROM cccccccccccsseeeeceseecceeeeecceuseeseeaeeesseseessaaees 67 4 2 Installing the Software susce E 67 4 3 Setting up the PC Operating System ccccccssseeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeessaaeeees 68 4 4 Setting up the iPU Operating SySteM cccccccsseeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 71 5 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Oep TOO 2tcantevnncsicnhesahcwaset tm oenmiasay tipexthepaceiaatannivarerc 73 Sl COMmiguring the PE Dilare es E 73 5 2 Configuring the iPU Dat
196. ell Arrangement Automatic X Member Points Name 112 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Notes the points must be listed in the same order as in the group insert lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 3 Control Groups Fill a data sheet for each group as shown bellow Member Points Name Notes the points must be listed in the same order as in the group insert lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 4 Scheduling programs As this programs can be easily modified by the customer a complete description is not required However the template data sheet is provided as a reference Fill one data sheet for each program Base Calender Calendar limits From YYYY MM TO Days Off YYYY MM DD Special Days YYYY MM DD i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 113 Workflow Overview 114 Base Calender Calendar limits From YYYY MM LO inai Days Off YYYY MM DD Special Days YYYY MM DD Scheduling Program C Yearly Calendar description or name of base calendar S TET Lee Calendar limits YYYYIMM Days Off YYYYIMM DD Special Days YYYY MM DD ay Target Name 4 A lt m lt op J Target Type Action Time Action Type Si72 301 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Notes Yearly Calendar limits first and last month of schedule operation Days Off amp Speci
197. em m System Startup Microsoft Windows NT 4 00 1381 IE 55 00 2314 1003 Startup Windows NT Workstation Version 4 00 Show list for fe 3 seconds Registered to DSSL DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD 50036 873 41 99973 08845 m Recover m Multimedia Network PC Card When a STOP error occurs do the following PCMCIA l J M White an event to the system log I Send an administrative alert I Write debugging information to SystemA oot MEMORY DMP P Exist Computer x86 Family 6 Model 6 Stepping 5 Regional SCSI Adapters ervices ounds System ATAT COMPATIBLE Settings 63 600 KB RAM a Tape Dewices Telephony UFS Provides system information and changes environment settings Cancel Apply Cancel Apply The automatic reboot function has to be activated to ensure that the PC will start up automatically after a power failure 1 Click the PC Start button point to Settings Control Panel and double click the System application 2 Select the Startup Shutdown tab and make sure that the Automatic Reboot check box is enabled i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 69 Si72 301 Installing the intelligent Manager system Note Please be sure to set up the BIOS as well press F2 key at start time to enter setup in order to ensure that the computer will reboot at the time of power restoration The actual field to set up depends on the BIOS It should be something like AC Power Recov
198. em Power port No 3 system Outdoor unit IR Outdoor unit Wh1 XxX Wh3 power _ T power_ ee ee Outdoor unit te E PC ii Electric energy pulse signal unit iPU Power port No 1 system Power port No 2 system Power port No 3 system Tenant 1 2 Tenant 3 4 Tenant 5 6 Pattern 2 Two watthour meters to be used with two units of iPU Power port No 1 system Power port No 2 system Tenant 1 2 Tenant 3 4 o m o a B O 5 20 Design Guide Si72 301 Functions Power port not specified Normal Power port specified Design precautions Standard design without major Required to allow each of indoor conditions outdoor units and watthour meter to correspond Test run date Preparation of address table Required to prepare the address table and enter the port No Relation between the indicated value The total value of calculation results of electric energy distribution is almost of watthour meter and the total value the same as the one of the indicated value of watthour meter Because the of calculation results calculation method has a treatment of counting fractions as one it never becomes smaller than the indicated value of the watthour meter Relation between the distribution There is a case of no conformance Each watthour meter indicated value calculated value and the watthour between eac
199. em peratu re i aoe Onemonth orth 2001 Draw Graph Print Graph Export Data e Analog Input ae has cctv veto _seupormn ea ePower Consumption ePulse Meter pack Comment From 2001 0501 To 2001 05 31 eOperation Time ee Te eIndoor units cate lt i e Digital Input Power e Digital Output max 916 35KWh min 6 15kVWh avg 418 4645KVWh kWh Power1 type Pulse max 211 99KVWh min 38 27KAh avg 132 3568kKV Vh e Temperature and Power consumption can be shown in same graph ASS lt RINIRIS gt Sa a AS a et Dr pew Aca e A Date Select a point to see its value Outdoor3 Power2 BB Powert E Visual Navigation Facilitated management through displays of the layout Optional One of the possible options is a flexible screen configuration system that increases the freedom users have by allowing to perform various tasks such as decisions concerning the location of individual air conditioners units with respect to the actual layout of the building Flexible components configuration a ore orca background amp links EJ a s e3 active types Wing Pt Ci Gr Layout Schedule Interock Data Mng System Jump Back Help elcons cae 20011117 Gun e Buttons cS Maini e Real time info Ground Floor Start Stop Detailed info Setup Report O a Restore Fire b kr 9 a jee a Temp 230 C Temp 280 C Temp 280 C ps fe
200. ements of every user in the best possible way various setup functions are available These are known as the system setup To carry out a system setup the appropriate authority such as system setup authority is required The system setup has the following setup functions e Points Management Management group setup Control group setup Management point attribute setup e User environment Login setup Confirmation dialog setup Buzzer setup History setup e System Time Time clock setup Daylight saving Time setup e Automatic control Centralized control setup Automatic Change Over Sliding Temperature Temperature Limit i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 237 Operation Details Si72 301 Click the System menu button The system shown below will be displayed intelligent Manager HET NSE SEH ZERON t i Click the button of the item to be setup to display the setup dialog 5 10 1 Configuring Management Groups e Management groups can be named at will e Icons indicating a management group is automatically assigned a group icon No modification possible e The layered structure of the management groups is automatically displayed in the management group list e Management group operation authority is required to operate a management group e Management Groups can be printed out either on the default printer or exported into CSV comma separated
201. emote intelligent Manager Ethernet Contact Signal l E F DI NET DI NET DII NET Security Fire alarm DI NET paa Wiring Wiring Wiring Local Monitoring amp Control adaptor adaptor adaptor A VRV System mOi HRV Air conditioning systems 2 2 Series and Components Wiring adaptor required for connection with other equipment not compatible with D NET Design Guide E The intelligent Manager ECO21 Series and its Components System name 1 IM 128 IM 192 IM 256 IM 512 IM 768 IM 1024 PC UPS etc Local Procurement Hardware model name 2 DAM602A52 DAM602A53 DAM602A51x1 DAM602A51x2 DAM602A51x3 DAM602A51x4 PPD Power Proportional Distribution Yes 2 4 This includes hardware software and field engineering work as a package 2 kWh meters to be locally supplied Functions Si72 301 3 Functions 3 1 Local Functions Ea a 22 Operation status monitoring for a maximum of 1024 indoor units 160 outdoor units when 4 C iPUs are connected h AIRNET Air conditioner failure prediction optional Continuous operation time monitoring per management point Power failure monitoring Login setting Individual control group switching setting of control group 100 groups Control Operation Schedule control 128 programs Fire emergency stop control 32 programs Power failure and Settings release control selected from 5 power restoration modes Air conditioner centralized contro
202. emperature as shown on the figure below Note In order to be available this function must be activated in the PC Setting dialogue see section 5 1 Configuring the PC data for details Please see operation manual for details of operation 6 2 6 Sliding Temperature Serves to configure the function that change the Cooling Set Temperature of a group of indoor units according to the outdoor temperature as shown on the figure below Note In order to be available this function must be activated in the PC Setting dialogue see section 5 1 Configuring the PC data for details Note This function requires a separate sensor for the outdoor temperature Please see operation manual for details of operation 6 2 7 Min Max Temperature Serves to configure the function that starts automatically and individually the indoor units in heating mode when the temperature is too low or in cooling mode when the temperature is too high as shown on the figure below Note In order to be available this function must be activated in the PC Setting dialogue see section 5 1 Configuring the PC data for details Please see operation manual for details of operation i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 89 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application i72 301 6 2 8 Energy saving functions These functions change operation conditions of indoor and outdoor units in order to lower the power consumption Note I
203. ems persist after the system has been restarted please contact the Daikin service counter Forcing Windows NT shutdown While holding down simultaneously the Ctrl and Alt keys on the keyboard press the Delete key Ctrl Alt Del Click the Task Manager T button on the Windows NT security screen to display the screen shown below 3 Windows NT Task Manager OF x File Options View Windows Help Applications Processes Performance tha w atchdogN otifie gunning Running Running Running LEUEI This Windows application cannot respond to the End Task request lt may be busy waiting for a response from you or it may have stopped executing o Press Cancel to cancel and return to Windows NT o Press End Task to close this application immediately ou will lose any unsaved information in this application o Press Wait to give the application 5 seconds to finish what it i doing and then try to close the application again C Era Task PES to thew tak z End Task Cancel Processes 20 CPU Usage 2 Mem Usage 39800K 7153324K 4 Select the intelligent Manager icon and click the End Task E button Warning End only intelligent Manager If other programs are ended the computer should be restarted All inquiries about after sales service etc should be addressed to Daikin Notes 1 Illegal reproduction of this document or of any part thereof is strictly prohibited 2 Any part of
204. ent Manager Operation Manual 8 2 6 2 Procedure and Result e First perform the demonstration of intelligent Manager to make user familiar with intelligent Manager basic functions e Then perform similar operation using the site installation i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 107 Workflow Overview Si72 301 8 3 Templates This section contains samples of the templates used in the steps of the intelligent Manager Workflow 8 3 1 Purchase order checklist Check in the right hand side column when the requirements are fulfilled The PC in which the intelligent Manager is to be installed must fulfill the following requirements Required Features recommendation Voltage as required on the field Monitor At least 14 Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 service pack 2 and above or Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 or later recommended Minimum free space on the hard disk for the program and the database files 1 Gbyte is recommended RAM at least 64 Mb however 128 is recommended Network connection a 10Base T connector and an Ethernet adapter Optional Windows NT compatible LBP Printer A4 size paper Intelligent Manager software Operating system Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 service pack 4 and above including E Note for the PC we recommend reliable makers such as IBM COMPAQ or Dell The networking equipment must fulfil the following requirements Required Features recommendation Multi port hub 4 or m
205. eriod is a 24 hours period starting at midnight of the inputted date e A Two Days period is a 48 hours period starting at midnight of the inputted date e A One Month period is a period starting at midnight of the first day of the inputted month and ending at 23 59 of the last day of the inputted month e A Period is a period starting at midnight of the inputted start date and ending at 23 59 of the inputted end date 5 6 4 3 Drawing the graph To draw the graph click on the Draw Graph button di Graphical Report Analog management point and indoor units one day period 204 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details fii Graphical Report Indoor units one month period The top part of the graphic frame displays the Name and comment of the Graph as well as the data start date and end date depending on the period type The left part of the graphic frame displays information about each management point in the graph its name its maximum and minimum value over the period as well as its average value over the period In the case of a pulse management point a equipment or a indoor unit if the period type is a one day period only the value for the day is displayed as the maximum minimum and average are all equal Note e If no data could be retrieved for the period or if all data for the period are invalid a is displayed instead of the value e After modification of the peri
206. ery 4 3 2 2 Automatic logon 70 4 Upen JIthee Dasumaal aa Fiy ene Docunents t P jm par Windows NT Wor lt sstati Rp Shut Gown an Registry Editor esis Edt View Help Network H E NetworkCards Sr OpenGLDOrivers H S Perflib H E ProfileList E related desc ae Terminal Server H E Time Zones i E Type 1 Installer Ban E Userinstallable drivers m i ia i wow tundll32 shell32 Cor H E Windows Scripting Host H ODBC H E Policies gt hy Compute HKEY L CAL_ MACHINE SOFTWARE M icrosoft windows NTS Curent ersion inlagon 2 Type the name of a program folder or document and Windows will open it for you i Run IA Separate Memon Space E Ea Cancel Browse ab Default iaa ame MANAGER0OI ab DefaultPassword DAIKIN b Default UserName Administrator LegalNoticeCaption LegalNoticeT ext PowerdownAtters 0 FReportBoot0k q Shell Explorer exe Shutdownwithout 1 System leass ere userni nddeagnt er When Windows 2000 starts up it requests logging on by pressing the Ctrl Alt Del keys This means that any program including intelligent Manager cannot be started without human intervention on the keyboard Nevertheless intelligent Manager has to start up automatically after shutdown Consequently the automatic logon function must be activated Start the C Winnt regedit exe application W
207. esent Status Status stop Under Maintena Check r i Perform setup i Cancel Tenporanly Mot biontoreditontraled Under maintenance Check the Setup check box to enable the Temporarily out of Monitoring Control checkbox When this box is checked the setup changes to under maintenance 5 2 5 Table view Function This gives a list of statistical information about the management points on display Click the Report button intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a e xaj Blo Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide Mng point list Indoor Units 1st 2nd Floor 2001 10 11 Thu 17 42 1st 2nd Floor Mrun F Stop Error W Com Error P Maintain W200 gt ae Main Levell Est1 Levell Wst1 Level2 Est1 Level2 Nor2 me E O Het St o Setup 27 C gt Setup 27 C gt Setup 2r Gs gt Setup FB Start LIEI Liw L2E1 L2N2 Lewel1 Est2 Lewell Wst2 Lewel2 Est2 Level2 Nor3 Stop oz a mas me F 3 Detailed info gt Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C gt Setup 27 C gt Setup 27 C LIE Liw L2E2 L2N3 Setup Levell Est3 Level1 Wst3 Level2 Est3 Level2 Wst1 R epo rt z pm p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C i L1E3 LIS L2E3 Lowi Level1 Est4 Level1 WWst4 Level2 Nort Level2 Wist2 Restore Fire
208. etc Cumulates equipment operation time number of Start Stop to facilitate maintenance Measures displays and monitors temperature humidity pressure voltage amperage etc Links management points with tenants Retrieves itemized data of tenant linked management points 165 Before use Si72 301 Screen Movement Enables reservation for movement between screens at will Password Setup Carries out password setup confirmation to confirm operation authority Support Function for Creation of Enables creation deletion of management groups Management Groups and registration modification of management points within a management group Support Function for Creation of Control Enables creation deletion of control groups and Groups registration modification of management points within a control group 166 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Basic Screen and Screen Directory 2 Basic Screen and Screen Directory 2 1 Basic Screen Layout Interlocking Emergency on Ctrl groups list stop program System setup Back Mng pts lists mng groups Schedule Data mng Screen move Pulldown intelligent Manager menu Menu buttons Current time display Login state name display Data Mng System Back 2001 10 11 Thu 17 50 DAIKIN usr Working area Main Action buttons Schedule Interlock Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Jump Open mng ctrl group list Start amp Stop n
209. eter with pulse output as above is not needed and the indoor unit distribution should be specified No The ordinary iPU is to distribute the power consumption of the outdoor unit and optionally function for the power consumption of the indoor unit Is it possible to make a remote indication of Abnormal of iPU and air conditioner Yes it is There is each independent no voltage contact output terminal in iPU Use this signal Is it possible to output the distribution calculated value to BMS No These are two different protocol systems Is it possible to specify no distribution of the common use section such as elevator corridor etc Yes it is However the power source of the outdoor unit should be divided It is necessary to write No electric energy distributing in Address Table To be registered at test run based on this table If the outdoor unit of the common use section is independent from the tenant it is necessary to connect its power source without via the watthour meter If the outdoor unit power is common the power consumption of the common use section is distributed to all the tenants and the tenant calculation result is higher than the actual What is Electric power port Electric power port means the connection terminal of the watthour meter Normally port means the inlet outlet for signal etc Design Guide Si72 301 Questions amp Answers Q12 How do they compare A Central Remo
210. ets Accordingly this enables users to systematically manage A C consumption of electrical power which until now has been an uncertain Flexible group configuration Set Point ereal time control 30 minutes prediction time intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help e Power consumption prediction based control Provide more comfortable environment aga Ri _ Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr _ Guide Power Limit control Synchronous system Time Target power amount 900 kW i i Pwr Limit ctrl state In Limit Time limit 16 00 to 16 30 a Mayout Schedule _Interlock Amount of power 1052 kW Converting progress 42 kW ___Data Mng System Jump Back Help _ 2001 1 1 1 5 Thu 15 54 usr Main Control Setup Control classification State et Setpoint Disabled a current power amount 796 kW sto Prediction Setup 3a Set Power Limit i Eco Mode Remaining time ik 6 0 Eco Mode Setup Ti Restore Fire PrinvExport x gt PwrLimit Buzzer E ECO Mode Reduces power consumption by 10 to 20 while maintaining room comfort Based on a predetermined schedule the intelligent Manager ECO21 executes capacity control and intermittent operation of A Cs so as not to increase the discomfort index Flexible group configuration 2 control types e Alternative stop control eOutdoor unit capacity control E co M 0 de Control classification Enabled Disabled
211. f necessary 120 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview 8 3 2 3 13Eco Mode Outdoor Units Capacity Control Eco Mode outdour units Capacity Execution Conditions Calendar 1 Activation State Enabled Disabled Period From From Calendar Control Setup Activation State Enabled Disabled Member Points Name Group B Activation State Enabled Disabled Member Points Name Group C Activation State Enabled Disabled Member Points Name Notes insert lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 14 Power Limit Control Power Limit Setup Power Limit Setup Summer Period MM DD Peak Time Summer kW Other season kW Time Zone hh mm Night Time i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 121 Workflow Overview Summer kW Other season kW Time Zone hh mm To Sub Off Peak Time Time Summer kW Other season kW Time Zone hh mm Off Peak Time Time Zone hh mm 8 3 2 3 15Power Limit Control Indoor Units Set temperature Control Notes 122 Power Limit Control indoor units Set Temperature Activation State Enabled Disabled Fill a data sheet for each group A to H as shown bellow Group Setup indoor units Set Temperature Rank A B C D E F G H Member Points Name insert lines if necessary Si72 301 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Appendix A Install
212. fires and to prevent the spread of flames when a fire signal is input These fire related actions take priority over normal actions Though similar to linked operations a major difference is that the content of the output is limited to the stop instruction The emergency stop takes priority with regard to control Registering the management items to be the target of an emergency stop can be done by specifying the management items to stop or by targeting all management items for a stop and then specifying the management items that are exceptions A maximum of 32 programs can be set The fire warning system controls smoke detectors and dampers according to fire prevention laws Elevators etc are controlled by a dedicated control system Therefore these facilities are not targeted for control by the emergency stop program 7 Power failure and recovery processing control lt Power Failure gt The system enters a power failure execution after the reception of a power failure signal Automatically saves all operating data and control data The system automatically shuts down approximately 10 minutes later Status monitoring of management items is possible during the power failure processing but control is not possible Functions Si72 301 lt Recovery gt All facilities and power supplies are restarted when commercial power is recovered The following 5 controls can be set for the recovery mode 1 Restore to status prior to powe
213. for making the bills Namely intelligent Processing Unit iPU is the product created by the concept to help the assignment of bill issuing and offers users the reasonable price of the products E Yet since the iPU is constantly assuming each indoor units power consumption based on the data which is transferred from indoor units it should be noticed that the iPU is not which complies with the Weight and Measure Act as shown in the catalogue The details of the cause to count error is described at chapter 2 10 1 1 Count method for a conventional VRV system 1 The following proportional division calculation is carried out every one hour and assigns the power consumption of airconditioning system to each indoor unit Heat load depending on the operation conditions of airconditioner power consumption of indoor unit s fan power consumption of optional heater the rated power consumption in cooling 1 xa the rated power consumption in heating 1 xb 1 The value which is registered at the test run adapting the indoor unit s capacity a a1 a2xT x Thermo step 2 Power consumption kWh 10 As shown in the left heat load is calcuated from an equation of the first degree which approximates the correlation among thermo step indoor unit s suction air temperature and power consumption into the linear line under the standard conditions of the unit Thermo step 2 e rears b b1 b2xT x _ ____
214. function enables selecting which application will be launched to be used as a Building Management application To modify BMS Client Setup e Login in intelligent Manager as Service System Engineer e In the working area right click the mouse button to display the system engineer pop up menu e Select the BMS Client Setup entry BMS Client Setup BMS Client SS ee a en ecoin Module _ Argument Class TenantReportexe Tenant Tenant Report setup User definition 1 User definition 2 User definition 3 User definition 4 Ma Exec Module TenantReportexe Report Type C Daily Monthly Yearly C No Report 92 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application Note On delivery intelligent Manager is provided with the TenantSetup exe and TenantReport exe modules They provide functions to associate management points of intelligent Manager with arbitrary created tenants as well as retrieving the operational data of the management points of a configured tenant Moreover the GraphReport exe module provides graphical perusing of the operational data of management points Analogue values Operation times etc Please refer to the Operation Manual for details Important The modules TenantSetup exe TenantReport exe and GraphReport exe require specific Microsoft module ocx files Please refer the Appendix A
215. g a management point Information Display x Info of Data capacity OK BipsNo 0 data capacity 3 Info of Data capacity Initial Data Creation Tool Si72 301 Mng Pt NC Ctrl Gr D3 Port Ini file EVRW ini Management Points file yeri O Rev16 Management Point Types xj Available Types C InternalDo C InternalDi C Internal Pi C Al C D3Dio indoorunit C Outdoorunit C PAI C DA Daily Re Cancel i WHM Tenant st Sinner Tenant C 1 Tenant C 2 Tenant D 1 Tenant D 2 Internal Pi WHM Tenant 2nd Offic e 2 Offic e 3 Offic e 4 Ground 1 Ground 2 Ground 3 Distal eee toad _save fox Save vere n7 Pu Addr D WO ONDA A UNI Edit Management Point Add Delete Edit ea Group Del Create the new point Click the Add button and select the Type of the new point or Select an existing point in the list and click the Copy button then select the new point from the list and click the Edit button Proceed as explained from step 1 Proceed configuration as follows for each management point as required 1 When the Management point Attributes appears enter as follows Note In the description below some attributes can be arbitrarily entered or selected as they do not infer on the monitoring and control names etc These attributes ar
216. g equipment setting in test run set at To make distribution calculation for indoor fan with intelligent Manager calculation conditions 7 1 3 Calculation of electric power Crankcase heater PC Board power consumption at stopping 1 In the case of calculation for crank case heater and PC Board when not in operation 1 The electric power consumed by crank case heater of the outdoor unit is divided by the capacity of each indoor unit N B The calculation also includes the indoor units which are not in operation eg vacant 2 In the case of not calculating for crank case heater and PC Board when not in operation 1 It is possible to exclude the power consumed by crank case heater and PC Board Therefore the power won t be added to each indoor unit Design Guide 43 Design Precautions i72 301 7 1 4 Electric energy distributing of SkyAir The SkyAir electric energy distributing cannot be included with the group of VRV system Therefore it is necessary to separate the group for rate calculation by group setting Further the applicable model is also limited Before applying refer to i Station Test Run Manual CB94A105A 7 1 5 Setting of electric power group It is possible to distribute the electric energy with one kWh meter if all groups are of the same design and indoor outdoor units are of the same size as each other group respectively different A C systems cannot be from the same meter 7 2 Setting of
217. ge canes Therefore in the case of Daikin DIII Air conditioner and equipment with Start Stop capability it is necessary to carry out individual setups using the management point list of the lower layer screen Please refer to 5 2 Displaying Management Groups p 177 for details of individual screen setup i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 193 Operation Details i72 301 5 4 Malfunction Display and History Management If the monitored equipment malfunctions details of the content will be displayed in the Malfunction history real time display area at the bottom of the screen At the same time in accordance with system settings an alarm buzzer will sound After the equipment malfunction has been confirmed dealt with the Detailed history screen is able to color code and manage whether the confirmed malfunction has been acknowledged The 20 most recent cases of malfunction messages are displayed in the Malfunction history real time display area and the100 most recent cases of malfunction and change in Equipment State such as Start Stop are displayed in the Detailed history screen Moreover a direct switchover function makes it possible to jump to the Management point list screen on which the management point responsible for generating the error is displayed In addition to the above real time data data of the malfunctions and changes in state from over approximately the past one year period can be saved separ
218. gram will not execute intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a zaja xal Blo Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help 2001 10 11 Thu 18 02 Guide usr el Main Activation Enable C Disable Open ict Program name Edit Start Create SOR Copy wetailedinta pelete m Rename Report nd Execute Schedule 0 t PrinvExport Restore Fire System 2 Base Calendar al Kj Pwr Limit Buzzer Click on the schedule program name to turn it over and it will switch over from enabled to disabled 104 Program cannot be modified since it is enabled Open dialog in read only mode Si72 301 If the schedule program is enabled the valid mark will be displayed before its name If it is disabled the mark will disappear 5 8 8 Copying a schedule 224 An existing schedule may be copied in the following way intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a S S xa 9 Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System ump Back el Guide 2001 10 14 Thu 18 02 usr Main Activation C Enable Disable Openlist Renewal date Edit _ test start e Create 7 stap Detailed nic Delete E Rename Repar Edit Execute Schedule PrintExport w Restore Fire Syste
219. gs Time Settings Management Settings Functions Si72 301 2 Screen Composition The screen is composed of menu buttons operation buttons error history real time displays and working area Menu buttons Buttons that call up all functions These are always operable on any menu screen Operation buttons Buttons for running and stopping the equipment etc Error history real time display Area displaying the error history in real time Working area Area displaying the functions called up by the menu buttons The functions of the menu and operation buttons can also be executed from the pull down menus Login Schedule Data Management Management List Pull down Management Group System Move Screen Ni l S Control Group Link Emergency Settings List Stop Program intellige t Manager p W Operay gt Me Pf PK Menu Buttons RS NA Aiar avearee Return x Display Current Time Login Status Operation Buttons Open Control Management Group List Run stari t ll t Stor Stop n e igen Display Detailed Information Air Conditioner Facility Setting Display Integrated Information C 2 Menu Buttons 300 E VRV System Network Solution Fire Status Forced Cancel Power Failure Recover Status Buzzer Status Stop History Display Display Detailed History Display Real time Abnormalities History Working Area 10 Design Guide Si72 301 Functions 3 Management Group Management Items Display Managemen
220. h watthour meter almost conforms to the calculation meter indicated value indicated value and the calculation result of corresponding air result of corresponding air conditioner conditioner Note mark If many watthour meters more than two are installed it is required to make group setting every watthour meter If the group setting is not made the error may become large in the total of each calculation result of the indoor unit corresponding with each watthour meter though the total of the indicated value of watthour meter almost conforms to the total of calculation result Pattern 3 SkyAir distribution of electric energy Refer to Item 7 Design precautions 2 P ower Proportional Distribution Function Because the JIS calculation is not based on the Weighing Law it cannot be used for any official business transaction 2 1 Power proportional distribution function The power proportional distribution and determination method is as listed below The power consumption of outdoor unit is counted in 1kWh unit To be inputted through Power Proportional Distribution as a integrating watthour meter with pulse oscillator calculation standard This value is a standard for determination therefore if the watthour meter has a wrong specification the determined electric energy used is a wrong value Calculation of operating load state Every 20 sec the connected indoor unit operating state is received and collected as a e
221. haracters or numerals onto a set up screen all usual monitoring and control can be carried out using only the mouse All operations indicated on the screen by clicking a button partially displaying a management point list displaying a pull down menu selecting one icon or a single item from a detailed menu may be carried out by moving the mouse pointer to the appropriate place and single clicking the left mouse button If intelligent Manager is started up from a desktop computer screen some operations may need to be accessed by a double click two clicks in quick succession Hereafter throughout this document buttons displayed on the screen will be depicted enclosed within a rectangle ex Start 1 2 Important Notes Please ensure that the PC software is always started up and that the energy saving mode has not been enabled If the energy saving mode has been set up information generated may not be recorded in in intelligent Manager Do not install other application software intelligent Manager software is designed exclusively for monitoring Please be aware that as the installation of other OA software may cause interference we would be unable in such a case to guarantee correct functioning Switchover to UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply and Automatic Shutdown in the case of power failure If the system has switched over to UPS and usual power supply has not been restored after a predetermined duration intelligent Man
222. he buzzer sounding may be specified e The icon changes in accordance with the state of the buzzer i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 253 Operation Details e When the buzzer sounds any screen saver in current operation is simultaneously stopped e System setup authority is required for the buzzer setup iW2zer Configuration Buzzer Sounds Enabled M Buzzer 1 Test M Buzzer 2 Test M Buzzer3 Test M Buzzer Test System Error Emergency stop Power Failure Error Prediction Comm Error Equipment Error Monitoring Error 5 10 7 Configuring History options The following history setups are possible depending on data type e Display Yes No e Print by alarm printer Yes No e Save as File Yes No Keep history of a limited selection of Management points default setting is all points Available Points Selected Points DSDio 1 D3Dio 1 External Temperature ExtTemp Fire Signal Fire Indoor Temperature IntTemp Add Level1 Est1 L1E1 B Levell Est2 WIE Levell Est3 IES Levell Est4 L1E4 lt lt Level1 VVst1 Livy ae Level1 VV st2 L12 Rem Levell VVst3 LIWV3 Level1 VVst4 LIAA Level2 Est1 L2E1 ad Listed Points All Indoor Unit Equipment C Other Contra Group 5 10 8 Adjusting the Time e The Station clock is set to the PC personal computer time e The PC clock may be set to the Station time e System setup authority is required to set the PC clock B
223. he folder where exists VRV exe The warning message come up when iManager starts Is it OK even if I select the OK button No Please select Cancel button and confirm the following items First please confirm the Execution path in PC Setting Tool is set to the folder where the VRV exe is located If the Execution path is correct then copy VRV dlIl from the Tools folder to the bin folder iManager starts but it cannot connect to iPU Please confirm the following items Is the iPU turned on Is the power supplied to HUB Are the PC and the iPU connected with the network cable via HUB cannot login to iManager The user is not registered in the initial state First please login with service After service login please register the new user from the system screen Please refer how to login with service in the Engineering Manual 6 1 Login in intelligentWManager p 86 Automatic login does not work when the PC starts Please confirm Automatic Login settings in Engineering Manual 4 3 2 2 Automatic Log on p 70 Moreover please confirm the password of Administrator is DAIKIN iManager does not start automatically when the PC starts Please confirm the short cut of VRV exe is registered in the Startup in the Start menu The icon of the indoor unit is not displayed on the Management Group screen Did you make a management group and add management points to the group
224. he management point set to 10 msec 294 Troubleshooting Si72 301 After Installation 2 After Installation 2 1 iManager Can Not be Started Supposed Causes m Incorrect setting for PC Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred Execution pass is not set in the folder including VRV exe Set the execution pass correctly Message of DLL YES can not be loaded is displayed Copy the VRV dll file on the bin folder in execution pass Message of Incorrect DLL version is displayed YES Reinstall iManager Message of Different version for iPU OS and iManager is Install the iManager with same version as iPU OS Prepare a necessary backup file and start again from installation of PC Troubleshooting 295 After Installation Si72 301 2 2 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware Supposed Causes m Power for HUB is disconnected m Network cable is not connected m Power for iPU is disconnected Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred AC adapter is decon aod Supply electric power to HUB Network cable of PC is disconnected YES Connect PC to HUB with a network cable NO Network cable of YES IPU is disconnected Connect iPU to HUB with a
225. he schedule execution is a calendar based program Therefore checkup of actual operation cannot be performed Instead the schedule programs parameters are checked Click the Scheduling menu button the Scheduling Setup screen appears Perform as in Configuring a Scheduling Program Modifying a Scheduling Program i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 101 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application i72 301 e In the Edit frame click the Execute Schedule button the Action Schedule dialogue box of the coming week appears e For each day of the week Click the button of the day then click the Update button the Action Setup dialogue box appears Check that the management points and control groups as well as their associated actions are correct and modify them if necessary Click the Ok button the Action Setup dialogue box closes Click the Ok button the Action Schedule dialogue box of the coming week closes 6 7 4 Checking the Interlocking programs Important This procedure checks each interlocking program This procedure can be performed only when the checking of all management points and control groups of the interlocking programs has been successfully performed Therefore double check of the state of equipment by the E I is no longer required e Login in intelligent Manager under system engineer user e For each interlocking program perform check for condition 1 and then
226. hen connect iPU to PC with cross cable directly 301 After Installation Si72 301 2 8 Ether RCV LED Does Not Light Trouble contents Ether RCV LED does not light It will blink with an interval of several tens of seconds Supposed Causes m Power supply for HUB is turned off E Specification of the communication cable between iPU and HUB is incorrect If the trouble have been generated due to above two reasons the ether link LED is also turned off m Any one of the communication cable between iPU and HUB or HUB and PC is disconnected Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred AC adapter of HUB is dismounted Supply power to HUB A cross cable is used for the network able between iPU YES Change the cable into a straight one Network cable between iPU and HUB or HUB and PC is disconnected YES Connect iPU and HUB HUB and PC with a network cable correctly Inspect HUB iPU and PC individually because any of them might be fault 302 Troubleshooting Si72 301 After Installation 2 9 RS485 1 TxD RxD RS485 2 TxD RxD LEDs are off Trouble contents Supposed Causes Troubleshooting Troubleshooting RS485 1 TxD RxD RS485 2 TxD RxD LEDs are off In the normal condition they will blink when the devices for RS485 are connected while they will be turned off if the devices are
227. hical Report a Select Period One day One month Date 2001 de a25 Draw Graph Print Graph Export Data Select Graph C Two days C Period lt lt Prev Next gt gt Setup Graph Exit Name Chiller Outdoor Temp Comment Chiller Water in Out temp Date 2001 06 26 Chiller 1 Water in type Analog max 16 98 C min 547 C ave 109302 C Outdoor Temp type Analog max 32 22 C min 2423 C ave 27 8756 C Last selected point Name Chiller 1 Water in Value 12 58 C Time 18 55 0 5 6 5 Printing a graph To print a graph click on the Print Graph button The graphic will be printed on the system printer 206 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 6 6 Exporting a graph data To export a graph data in the CSV file format which can be opened with text editor or Microsoft Excel for example click on the Export Data button The following dialog displays Choose the folder input the file name and click the Save button Save As Ei E swen amn o a a el Kishu Save as type csv Files csv Cancel Open as read only The CSV file contains information about the Graph Name Comment the period From To It also contains information about every member management point Point Name Point ID Point Type Unit Note Point Type 1 Equipment Di Do Dio 2 Pulse Pi 3 Analog Ai
228. i is as follows Outdoor air temperature of 20 C to 40 C 2 C Outdoor air temperature of 40 C or higher 3 C Supposed Causes m The test run of iPU has not been conducted properly m The thermistor connected to DIII Ai is dismounted m Breaking wire of the thermistor Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred The test run of iPU has not been conducted properly Conduct the test run for iPU again The thermistor connected to DIII Ai is dismounted YES Connect the thermistor with the connector of X1A in DIII Ai Breaking wire of the thermistor YES Check on the resistance value of the thermistor removed from the built in PCB in DIII Ai When a breaking wire or short circuit is detected replace the thermistor Check that the microcontroller normal LED green is blinking Inthe case that it does not blink check the power supply voltage and if the voltage is normal replace the DIII Ai 310 Troubleshooting DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD DAIKIN EUROPE NV Head office Zandvoordestraat 300 B 8400 Oostende Belgium Umeda Center Bldg 4 12 Nakazaki Nishi 2 chome Kita ku Osaka 530 8323 Japan Tokyo office Shinjuku Sumitomo Bldg 6 1 Nishi Shinjuku 2 chome Shinjuku ku Tokyo 163 0235 Japan For further improvement specifications or designs are subject to change without prior notice
229. ic User Interface This part of the configuration process performs setting for customizable buttons and screens 90 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Important Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application First login in intelligent Manager with the special privilege of the user Service refer to the section Login in intelligent Manager of this document for procedure then Right click in the title screen the popup menu appears intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help Login Ming Pt Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Ning System dump Back Help Guide 20017 9 27 Thu iz eS T 14 59 DAIKIN z Serice apen List Main i Back atart Open list Stop Detailed info Setup Report con Point Information Detailed into New Screen Button Sea eras Remove Setup Screen Name Report rite Screen Background File Attribute Component Arrangement Management Point Attribute Setup Screen Jump New Free Layout Screen VR Free Layout Screen Setup Restore Fire No Background Remove Free Layout Screen Edit Made Or a d C imf Type i oo INDUSTRIES LTD Buzzer a Basic Screen Setup OLE Type ee ae M Rener Edit Save Initial Data Cancel Save hitial Data for Demo BMS Client Setup xj BMS Client Execution module Report TenantR ep
230. ify the commissioning data and modify the attributes of the management points 2 When all the points attributes have been entered e in the Initialization File frame click the Save button and specify the path to a initialization file extension ini e in the Management Points File frame click the Save button and specify the path to a configuration file extension bpd the Transmit data to the iPU confirmation box displays to have the information downloaded to the iPU click the Yes button then confirm and then input the IP address of the iPU when the transmission completion message appears click the OK button i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 79 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool i72 301 or to have the information only stored on the PC for example in the case of the intelligent Manager Demo Click the No button 3 Click the Exit button and confirm double step confirmation procedure Note Repeat the above procedure for each iPU switch it Off then On to update its internal settings 5 3 1 2 Modifying a management point e Select the management point from the list and click the Edit button e Proceed as explained from step 1 5 3 1 3 Deleting a management point e Select the management point from the list and click the Edit button e Click the Delete button the confirmation message box appears e Click the Yes button 5 3 2 Configuring the Indoor Unit points Click and i
231. ime of the first operation Click the OK button to proceed with the operation or the Cancel button to cancel it The control group will then be displayed in the control group structure Control Group Configuration 1st Floor 2 D3Dio 1 and Floor 2 Fire Signal ard Floor 2 E Levell Esti 4th Floor 2 mn Levell Est Digital Inputs ae Ne Leyell Est3 Digital Qutputs oe ae Level1 Est4 Digital Input Output 0 e Leveli isti 7 a Level Wat Leveli Yysta Levell wist4 Level Est1 Level Est Level Est3 Level Mort Level NMor2 Leyel Mors Leyel Vvstt Level WWst Leyel Wyst3 Level3 Estt LeyelS Est Level3 Est3 Level3 Shart eel tt Gee i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 243 Operation Details 244 Select the group from the control group structure and click the Select Icon button to select the icon lcons List Icons List Seneral pur fseneral purpose Circle VR indoor unit HR Fan coil Fan Top Fan Bottorm Fan Lett Fan Right Fan Purp Cancel Si72 301 The management points belonging to this group are selected from the list of available management points and added by clicking the Add lt lt button To remove a management point select the management point to be removed from the management group content list and click the Remove gt gt button Control Group Configuration Groups Group Content Available Ming Points 1st Floor p 2nd Floor Z ard Fl
232. indows 2000 registries editor Open the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows NT Current Version WinLogon key Add two String values REG_SZ type DefaultPassword The administrator login password DAIKIN on delivery time i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Installing the intelligent Manager system Caution If the value of the DefaultPassword is not identical to the password set for the administrator the automatic logon will not perform 4 3 2 3 Automatic start up pev JE t I Exploring Startup olx Fie Edt View Tools Help All Folders Contents of Startup Cursors Create Shortcut x Type the location and name of the item you want to create a shortcut to Or search for the item by clicking Browse Command line i Downloaded Program Files A Fonts Help 3 History of Inf F Installer Java j k E Media SS 9 Msagent Anange Icons i E msdownld tmp ine up Icons Bi Occache i n ikii Fagas Paste Shortcut i a Profiles Undo Delete H Administrator Recycle Bin p All Users a i ioi E Desktop EEN i BD Start Menu Briefcase Browse Paste Nests Cancel Browse K Ei IRRIG i ae Bitmap Image looker S Yv1 00 fa e My Bnercase aii E EEr WordPad Document i E c mja i P iA Rich Text Document VAV exe Z jhad i i Test Document 5 A VAY demo exe SetupDCU i x inZ
233. ing i WJ sen g f This nil overite zara in PU Pe seling Ihe daily repzt coza A 5 Er rinse BY OUT then Da ly Repu Ecil Mansae ne I Puir wia Ula lean diese Tom ISU zania De al Oro Jp L al Ad D cdi Com cnes nase ta s Lawer ret ancrol seting ED Ava A ES rammt data o PL ae Tiam at ale hu 1 PL 4 Cheek x Loadirg d t rll lt cketc cxictin za Cancel ths al bow ep Fiberi pu x Usncs I Cpznosicaceny The points data displayed in this tool are stored in the iPU file extension bpd that can be loaded and saved on the iPU but as well saved on the PC hard disk for backup As well complementary data not displayed are loaded and saved in the initialization file extension ini that can be loaded and saved on the PC hard disk only Therefore when proceeding this step both files must be loaded and saved Start the VRV Setup tool and login then click the Management Points Setting button the setting screen displays Note When performing configuration with no iPU connected office pre configuration or demonstration version always update the initialization file by loading it before and saving it after the bpd file in the Initialization File frame click the Load and Save buttons and select a file VRV ini or Demo ini i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 77 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool 5 3 1 1 Creatin
234. ing the PC Installing Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 or 2000 Important Perform installation of the OS as described in the Microsoft installation manual For Windows NT 4 0 if the installed version does not contain the service pack 5 then install it separately As well the Internet Explorer Service Pack 2 should be installed The OS options for optimum efficiency of the intelligent Manager are as follow e hard disk use NTFS format and create partitions e C 2047 Mb e D remaining disk space e OS administrator name and password as it will be used for intelligent Manager e Screen properties 800x600 pixels Installing Microsoft Additional Modules Important Perform installation of the OS as described in the Microsoft installation manual when using the Report and Report Setup of PPD Data Management and Graph Graphical Report modules the intelligent Manager must be running as data is retrieved from the intelligent Manager Database Server If the client doesn t connect to the database then copy the files ComDIg32 0CX MsChrt20 0CX MsComCtl OCX and MsWinSck OCX from the intelligent Manager bin folder to the C System32 folder for Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 the C System folder for Windows 98 End of installation when starting the Report Report Setup of PPD Data Management or Graph Graphical Report modules if Windows displays an error message box modules not found perform as explain below
235. ints Setup screen displays Configure the Management Points Attributes then click the Close button Please see operation manual for details of operation When login in Service mode more Management Points Attributes can be customized See below for details 6 2 2 Configuring the Scheduling Programs 88 A scheduling program is a function for automatically controlling the equipment of the intelligent Manager system according to a calendar Up to 128 scheduling programs can be configured Please see operation manual for details of operation i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual i72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application 6 2 3 Configuring the Interlocking Programs An interlocking program is a function for automatically controlling the equipment of the intelligent Manager system when a specified input condition occurs Up to 100 interlocking programs can be configured Please see operation manual for details of operation 6 2 4 Configuring the Emergency Stop programs An emergency stop program is a special kind of interlocking program to stop the equipment of the intelligent Manager system safely on reception of a specific signal type Up to 8 emergency stop programs can be configured Please see operation manual for details of operation 6 2 5 Automatic Change Over Serves to configure the function that change the operation mode of a group of indoor units according to the room t
236. ints will appear listed as displayed in the above screen This shows how both management points and management groups can be collected within a management group Henceforth the list within a management group may be displayed and opened in the same way The points of the group list are displayed intelligent Manager Fie Menu Operation Help 3 ajaja x al 9 Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide Mng point list Indoor Units 1st 2nd Floor 2001 10 11 Thu 17 51 1st 2nd Floor Brun M Stop Error W Com Error IE Maintain 12 gt E Main Filter sign Lewell Est Lewell Wist 1 Lewel2 Est NI nS Automatic o p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C p Setup 27 C control uw Let Level1 Wst2 Level2 Est Cool heat ae pe aooo option p Setup 27 C gt Setup 27 C gt Setup 27 C zj LiE2 Liv VE Levell Est3 Lewell Wst3 Lewel2 Est3 p Setup 27 C gt Setup 27 C gt Setup 27 C L1E3 Lewel1 Est4 gt Setup 27 C Level1 Wst4 Level2 Nor1 gt Setup 27 C The state of a management point is shown by the color of its icon Red Running Green Stop Green blinking Emergency stop Yellow blinking Malfunction Blue Communication error Gray Under maintenance CC gt Setup 27 C Level2 Nor2 6 HET St ma Setup 27 C Start Level2 Nor3 stop a Detailed info gt Setup 27 C
237. ion In case of updating an existing configuration always load data from iPU before editing and saving else some cumulated data will be lost Ai Trend Running Time ON OFF Count etc Note To configure the Management Points at least Master iPU must be connected 5 3 1 Fundamentals This procedure performs definition of the management points supported by the intelligent Manager system The types of points are Indoor Units I U indoor unit model supported by DIII Net protocol Outdoor Units O U Outdoor unit model supported by DIII Net protocol General Purpose Digital Input Output points D3Dio DIll Net adapter to exchange binary data dry circuit closed or open with external system Internal Digital Input points Di iPU terminal to receive binary data dry circuit closed or open from external system Internal Digital Output points Do iPU terminal to send binary data dry circuit closed or open to external system Internal Pulse Input points Pi iPU terminal same as Di to receive measurement from external meter power meter etc Analogue Input points Ai sensor sending analogue values to the iPU via an external sequencer connection to iPU is RS232C Pseudo Analogue Input PAi analogue information from Indoor Unit points Note Support of the Dill net Analogue Input point D3Ai is under planning 76 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the
238. ion in the section 3 Starting and Stopping operation of intelligent Manager Step 2 backup the database This operation can be performed either by using an external device CD writer serial connection to another PC etc and will not be discussed in details in the present document Please refer to your support engineer for advice Step 3 start the ezDBMaintenance exe module located in the same folder as intelligent Manager VRV exe module as shown below Database Maintenance Tool Ea Data previous from specified date are deleted Please inputthe date 2000 san 15 Database Folder Dvr cance Step 4 input the parameters as shown above e Database Folder the path of database folder absolute path is recommended e Date all the items until the day BEFORE this date will be deleted Then click the OK button The confirmation dialogue displays as shown below Step 5 carefully check the date and size of both deleted and remaining data i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Database Maintenance e To change the parameters click the Cancel button The previous dialogue displays again as shown above i Database Maintenance Tool There are data from 20007 57 9 to 2000 911 inthe databases When data previous from 20007171 are deleted the databases size are as follows Curent 1 7MB After delete 1 1wWB Please push the Delete button to delete data from the databases Please push the Cancel
239. ip Microsoft Data Link J Bms A VAVSetup exe Wave Sound Db Microsoft Excel Worksheet E Pd 4 n v a Creates a new empty shortcut WinZip File Sard z iter File name vrv exe FE Start E Exploring Startup Microsoft Excel SetupPc 5 31 PM Files of type Programs Create Shortcut Ea Select a Title for the Program Select a name for the shortcut Type the location and name of the item you want to create a shortcut to Or search for the item by clicking Browse Cancel lt Back Cancel lt Back To ensure that the intelligent Manager programs start up automatically when the computer starts up a shortcut to the main application of intelligent Manager VRV exe has to be created and stored in the StartUp menu 1 With Windows Explorer open the folder C Winnt Profiles All Users StartMenu Programs Startup 2 Click the mouse right button and select the entry New Shortcut 3 Using the Browse button select in the folder of the intelligent Manager the main application VRV exe and click the OK button 4 Click the Next gt button 5 Click the Finish button Check that the shortcut to intelligent Manager has been added 4 4 Setting up the iPU Operating System Important Perform the installation of sub iPUs first Connect only one iPU to the hub at a time during OS installation Note At this stage of the engineering procedure the IP address of all iPUs should be 192 168 0 1 the change to sub iP
240. l Management point name icon list display Control group list display Screen scroll function Operation time display Integrated switching number display History display malfunctions alarms control Operation time integration Switching number integration Meter reading through Pi port on Measurements IPU Power proportional reading Management Operational history management Generation of daily monthly and yearly reports VRV power proportional distribution Data Storage Report If exceeding the stated number of outdoor units DIII NET Expander Adapter lt DTA109A51 gt allows easy system connection as long as restrictions are observed Print output Data storage 4 Design Guide Si72 301 Functions 3 2 Basic Functions 3 2 1 Monitoring Design Guide Air conditioner status monitoring Air conditioners that can handle Daikin DIII NET Cumulated value upper limit monitoring Continuous operation time limit monitoring Power failure monitoring 1 Air conditioner status monitoring Air conditioners compatible with Daikin s DIII NET Allows you to know the detailed operating status such as running stopped status temperature setting operating mode the occurrence and content of errors and filter sign for each air conditioner targeted for monitoring The occurrences and the contents of errors are displayed in the abnormalities history area When an error occurs on an air conditioner targeted for monitoring the
241. l Gr Layout Schedule Interlock DEnIMAg a mp hr Guide Ming point list Indoor Units 1st 2nd Floor 004A OH Thuy 16 4 Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock DEEL a mp ka Guide Mng point list Digital Outputs zorn on Thu fe Ist 2nd Floor nee Next lllun Wi stop Error W Com error B Maintain gt a ain aini Manj Levell Est1 Levelt Wist1 Level2 Est1 Level2 Nor2 Main ee o Setup 27 C a Setup 27 C a a p 27 C T a p 27 C LIEI iwi Levell Est2 Levell Wist2 Lewel2 Est2 Lewel2 Nors a a a Setup 27 C ga Setup 27 C LIE L2N3 Detaled nia Sen Levelt Est3 Levelt Wst3 Level2 Est3 Level2 Wst1 Pe Ox Ox bla Os A Levell Est4 Levelt Wist4 Level2 Nort Level2 Wist2 Restore Fire a an a Setup 27 C ae fe 2 PwrLimit Buzzer Report Restore Fire Pwr Limit Buzzer Click the Stop button to stop the automatic circular sequence 5 2 Displaying Management Groups A management group is a group of management points collected together for ease of management e A management group is able to collect together both management groups and management points thereby making it possible to constitute multi layered management groups e A single management point may belong to more than one management group e You are able to create new ma
242. lates of checklists are provided Flow of A C Project Business Workflow of intelligent Manager 1 Intelligent Manager adopted gt time flow gt Pre conditions 7 Issue purchase order Step 1 Purchase order list IPU PC UPS networking 7 Draw up project DIII networking diagram etc Step 2 Engineering data Construction work etc 8 Check wiring Step 3 On site installation y 14 Ordinary test run and adjustment Step 4 On site commissioning End of procedure 15 intelligent Manager test run Step 5 Checking intelligent Manager 17 Completion delivery Step 6 optional Training The detailed procedure for some steps has been described in specific documentation of intelligent Manager in which case they will not be fully covered in the present document Please refer to the indicated manuals for details whenever required 8 2 Main Procedure Steps 8 2 1 Step 1 Purchase order list Preparation of the list of equipment to be purchased for intelligent Manager system 8 2 1 1 Pre conditions e Order Received Project Control Sheet Number of indoor outdoor units for number of iPUs capacity of UPS and wiring equipment 8 2 1 2 Procedure and Result Purchase Order checklist see template in Appendix 3 1 description of the requested equipment e iPUs configuration i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 105 Workflow Overview Si72 301 Nb of iPUs Wiring e Power cable e Ethernet
243. lligent Manager sites mirroring of the History function Watchdog PC in office Monitoring PCs on sites On line Receiving call The intelligent Manager on sites monitoring PCs periodically call the Watchdog remote PC and send the alarms Filtering of alarms sent is configurable on each site Please refer to the intelligent Manager Watchdog Operation Manual for details of Watchdog functions on the remote PC Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual i72 301 Introducing intelligent Manager Remote Options 1 2 intelligent Manager Remote To operate the intelligent Manager system monitoring PC from a remote computer The operation is similar with the sub PC but the network communication is achieved by using the RAS Remote Access Service of Windows Several sub PCs can be configured however only one can connect to the master PC at a time Remote PC in office Monitoring PC on site intelligent Manage File Meru Operation Help a itelligent Manager r Login Mng Pt Girl Gr Jump Back Login Mng PL Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Guide Mng pointlist 2001 4 1 1 Wed 18 02 Wirun M Stop Error Wil Com Error ill Maintain D amp Do1 Internal Di1 20014 4 11 ved 18 02 Rex rn E Stop Error Ml Com Error il Maintain 1 2 gt RSA ACS D3Do1 Internal Dil Dalal a e o Z NoName NoName NoName E addi epo D 3
244. lly starting indoor units in cooling or heating mode in order to keep room temperature within a preset interval BMS client setup when Service Login only stand alone application can be launched from within intelligent Manager tenant data management etc Graphical environment when Service Login only Background setup the default background image of the working area Visual Navigation setup background screens and active components allowing visual navigation and operation of the system 6 1 Login in intelligent Manager 86 This procedure can be performed by anyone who owns a user name and its password Start intelligent Manager Click the Login button the Login screen displays Select an user name and enter the corresponding password i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application Note The operation available for this user has been set up by an administrator user beforehand intelligent Manager Login with Service special privilege first click File Menu Operation Help a Mag Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help the upper left and lower mie right corner areas then DAIKIN Logot P Wain the Cancel button the Present Status Logoff Open list users list includes the User Password entry Service YRV System Network Solution DAIKIN INDUSTRIES L
245. lp 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C 27 C rey Bl a Pooooooocooooooo0o0oo0o0oo0ocso Print OK lal xl sig el 47930 3 Basic Setting Operation connected with intelligent Manager are represented by Management The a ipments Poin ely unde sta a sank may so ation they are bundled into aca Groups whic organized into e like ture comparcile with files in folders storedin a chest or in a compute r Operating a Management point is easy as described below Management points function zl Tok Oaa ung Siom Tp Bak Functions The onboard help function provides aid when users do not understand operation procedures and when trouble shooting It provides support for even beginners 29 Functions 30 Si72 301 E Graphical Report Displays minute changes in easily understood terms via graphical expression The intelligent Manager ECO21 can provide graphical displays of all the operational and measurement data and coherently express changes and comparisons that would otherwise be difficult to grasp with mere tables Depending on the particular purpose at hand the Graphical Report can be switched back and forth between the Table Report Flexible configuration to display n esa ae x eT
246. lt lt button If the setup is satisfactory click the OK button The interlocking program setup is cancelled by clicking the Cancel button 234 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details The previous Emergency Stop Program setup screen see below will be restored SHEMET WETANEO iia SEH monnmanom Setting up the Release Mode Automatically emergency stop signals are automatically released when they are switched off i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 235 Operation Details i72 301 Manually once all emergency stop signals have been switched off the specified program may be released manually Emergency Stop Program Settings Fa Pump Input Output Modify Release mode Stop Automatic Manual C Listed Points Unlisted Points Set up the specified Output Emergency Stop method Depending on the Emergency Stop option selected all listed output points or all output points other than those listed are stopped Listed points specifies all the output management points to be stopped Unlisted points all output management points other than those listed are to be stopped If the setup is satisfactory click the OK button The Emergency Stop program setup is cancelled by clicking the Cancel button The previous Interlocking Emergency Stop Program setup screen will be restored When activated the registered Emergency Stop program executes To execute the program
247. m z Base Calendar al JE Pwr Limit Buzzer Select the name of the schedule to be copied and click the Copy button Name Setup x i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details The name setup dialog box will then appear Enter the new schedule program name and click the OK button intelligent Manager Ena test Clock 1 Clock 2 5 8 9 Deleting a Schedule An existing schedule may be deleted in the following way intelligent Manager Ena test 2002 10 Clock 1 2002 10 Clock 2 2002 10 Select the schedule to be deleted and click the Delete button A confirmation dialog box will then appear Click the OK button to delete the schedule i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 3 Ejs h dal el WETENEO Iho SEH HERON mx anf 225 Operation Details Si72 301 A schedule cannot be deleted when it is enabled First disable the schedule intelligent Manager a aas l xal Blo SHEME 2002710 DEENECINTO DEJETE SEIH eet etd e REBOOT The schedule has been deleted 5 8 10 Renaming a Schedule 226 A schedule may be renamed in the following way i 2002 10 2002 10 2 10 Cocks Select the schedule to be renamed and click the Rename button The name setup dialog box will then appear Enter the new name and click the OK button i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301
248. mes and temas aecears 287 Model names and specifications or the like are subject to change without prior notice for further improvement so be sure to confirm the following catalogues and engineering data Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 275 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 1 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 1 1 Introducing Intelligent Manager Watchdog This manual explains how to operate the intelligent Manager Watchdog application Si72 301 This application runs on a PC in office referred below as the Watchdog PC to receive mirroring of the items of History reffered below as records from one or more intelligent Manager sites referred below as the Monitoring PCs by use of telephony facilities referred below as Modem for further details about intelligent Manager operation Watchdog Watchdog PC in office Messages Help Site Time Name ID _ PORT ADDR 2001 6 22 18 34 46 2001 6 22 18 34 53 2001 6 22 18 34 53 2001 6 22 18 34 56 2001 6 22 18 34 56 2001 6 22 18 34 46 2001 6 22 18 34 56 Level1 East1 Emergenc Fire Signal Emergenc Fire Signal Levell Eastt Fire Signal 1 1 1 1 00 59 1 19 59 119 1 59 1 1 1 00 1 19 On line Start 01 195 Fire alarm Start 01 395 Fire Release Stop Start Stop Receiving call This manual comes as a complementary document of the intelligent Manager Operation Manual Please refer to it Monitoring PCs on sites
249. mmable gas is generated Ambient temperature and humidity conditions of location of setup 10 35 C 20 80 RH intelligent Manager Monitor System PC Printer Display UPS 0 50 C 95 RH iPU Separate our air conditioning power electrical lines and the communications lines for control a minimum of 50 mm In other cases separate from the power lines to meet the following conditions Distance of Separation of Power Lines and Communication Lines for Control P Ower IDE cuca abel Daikin Air Conditioners Other Equipment Max 10A Min 300 mm Max 50A Min 500 mm Max 109A Min 1000 mm Max 220 V Min 50 mm Exceeding 100A Min 1500 mm 6 2 Summary of Attachment e Always attach inside a locked electrical equipment box or somewhere that cannot be opened without the use of a special tool so that indoor equipment cannot be easily tampered The location should not allow the equipment to be subjected to the influence of electromagnetic waves or to be exposed to dust Minimum depth dimension necessary for setup is 100 mm e The figure at right shows the minimum spacing between equipment when setting up consecutively and the wall e Attach as shown in the following figure Up T Z E Always attach in the vertical direction Attaching horizontally will cause failures so do not attach in that direction 42 Design Guide Si72 301 Design Precautions 7 Design Precautions 7 1 Rate Calculation A g Integrating watthour meter
250. mode changing temperature settings or enabling disabling the remote controller are possible when the management items in the control group are DIII NET compatible air conditioners iManager File Menu Operation Login Mng Pt Back 2000 5 170Aed 13 06 usr ain Open list GroupStart GroupStop Detailed info Group setup lnfottiiaugn HEL Fire _ 4 oe Th a as Buzzer E o e E pl a anal 5 Operating Time and Start Stop Cumulated Count Display The following data can be confirmed as the cumulated information display Start stop count Start stop count upper limit value warning value Operating time cumulated Operating time upper limit value warning value Cumulated Information Display Addition Information Addition Information Management point name The num Number o Number of Runtime Warning ti Time ratio 0 Oh Level1 Est1 L1E1 Level1 Est L1E2 0 Oh Level1 Est3 L1E3 0 Oh i Levell Est4 L1E4 0 Oh Displayed in red when a Level1 vst1 L11 0 Oh Level1 vWst2 L1vv2 0 Oh warning has been Level1 vWst3 L1vv3 0 Oh Level1 Wist4 L14 0 Oh issued Start Sto Start Stop Count Start Stop Managem Count P Warning Value Ratio ent Item oun Displays integrated information of the management item currently displayed on the screen Displays integrated information of all management items A Mng Pt
251. mp o z Mempo Temp 280 Temp 280 Temp oS Nest Mirun 1 Stop Error W Com Error B Maintain Pwr Limit Buzzer m The system components management points or control groups are displayed and dynamically refreshed on a background image plain or elevation view That appears as Attributes same information as cells of a management point operation state room temperature etc lcons same icon as in a cell of a management points or control group in this case the same color states and actions as corresponding cell are supported start stop detailed information such as setup etc Buttons Navigation links to other free layout screens Design Guide Si72 301 Design Guide E Timer extension action off after 2 hours By indoor unit By schedule c AC1 NoName Action Setup New program Available Mng Point Ctrl Group NoName Present Status I Timer Extension Status Stop Filter Sign Operation Mode Cooling 270C al Suc Temp Operation gt Filter Sign RC restriction y SA by F Clear Set C Star Stop Start Stop OperationMode Set P l Set C Prohibited Auto C Fan C Dool f Heat es Sf ip Only C Setpoint Permitted Fan Speed Temp Set p I Set Pe P m Operation Mode Permited L poossssmm m H 7 t C Prohibited il wA E Steg nt L Set Temperature In Maintenance G Pormi
252. mpression out 60 m Device errors Location Save password Cancel CRE 1 Framing 0 Timeout 0 Hardware overruns 1 Alignment 0 Buffer overruns 0 Reset Details Hang up Cancel e On the PC screen double click the My Computer icon then double click the Dial up Networking icon the Dial up Networking dialogue displays 284 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual Si72 301 intelligent Manager Remote e Select an existing phonebook entry to dial or Create a new phonebook entry to dial if not created already click the New button then follow the New Phonebook Entry Wizard e Click the Dial button the Connect to dialogue appears e Enter the User Name and Password as they have been set up in the User Admin of the monitoring PC then click the Ok button e Wait for the connection to be made then the Remote Access Service Monitoring window displays e End of procedure Note an error message can appear on dialing time when the line is engaged as shown below Error Connecting to iManager Remote El Ei AN Dialing 0 00161 Error 676 The line i busy i Cancel More Info Important Always make sure to the site that the RAS Service is running on the site PC before making a connection on the office PC Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 285 intelligent Manager Remote i72 301 2 2 2 Operating the intelligent Manager application After the RAS connection has been perf
253. n Windows NT Workstatii ie L Phone Numbers Server New phone number Phone numbers Check all that apply T am calling the Internet New Phonebook Entry Wizard That s it Send my plain text password if that s the only way to connect Piess Finish to save iManager Remote T The non Windows NT server am calling expects me to type login information after connecting or to know TCP IP addresses before dialing Up F Down J Delete M Move successful number to the top of the list on connection ee ga Dial Up Networking Monitor RIES Phonebook entry to dial Connect to iManager Remote baka Status Summary Preferences iManager Remote TTT er ae Device iPanasonic TO BXF56KIV90_K56flex CC Enter a user name and password with access to the More remote network domain Condition Connected to iManagerR emote Device response Unavailable Phone number preview Line bps 12000 Duration 00 10 23 foot 6 User name Administrator Device statistics Bytes in 1 339 701 Bytes out 24 942 Dialing from Password Connection statistics Bytes in 1 386 130 Bytes out 62 506 a Frames ir 1 446 Frames out 1 384 Bomain Compression irc 3 Compression out 60 I Save password pe i CRC 1 Framing 0 Timeout 0 Hardware overruns 1 Alignment 0 Buffer overruns 0 Cancel Reset Details Hang yp
254. n order to be available these functions must be activated in the PC Setting dialogue see section 5 1 Configuring the PC data for details 6 2 8 1 Power Limit Control This optimizes power consumption based on a target power by changing settings of indoor units set temperature and Start Stop The function can be temporarily deactivated from the System Setup menu as shown below accessible only from the mouse right button click when logged in as Service as explained in 6 1 Login in intelligent Manager System Setup xj Watchdog Fillter The checked item is notified W System Error W Equipment error IY Equipment warning W Communication error IY Emergency stop J Power failure Power Limit Control Prediction Fart Running Status Running Temporary stop Z DS Please see operation manual for details of operation 6 2 8 2 Eco Mode This switches indoor units Off and On intermittently and modifies the capacity of outdoor units Please see operation manual for details of operation 6 3 Configuring the Users The users who operate the intelligent Manager system need to login and have customized profiles to access authorized actions This procedure creates of these users and profiles Note Administrators only can perform this procedure An administrator is an operator whose profile includes authorization to Regist Users Please see operation manual for details of operation 6 4 Customizing the Graph
255. nagement groups at will and modify them Please refer to 5 10 1 Configuring Management Groups p 238 e A management group is only able to manage collective layers of management points and cannot be used for individual monitoring and operating Click the Management Points button from the menu buttons i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 177 Operation Details Si72 301 intelligent Manager Bl Bis a a intelligent Manager wenn A Se Ge 8 mar SPENSI DEIENECINTOT Seth ReAOTL q ad 5 2 1 State Monitoring List The state of management points Start Stop Malfunction may be understood from the list displayed As the monitoring of equipment is not displayed in the group to access it click the button corresponding to the group to be checked 178 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details intelligent Manager 3 eels pea Rn Sep ever Meon erer Narn a RESO i d Click the group button to enable the Open list button Then click the Open list button to display the list within the group The management groups will appear listed as shown in the above screen Click once more on the sub group and Open list buttons intelligent Manager Next Mun M Stop Error W Com Error lll WETaNEO IiTGy EHO i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 179 Operation Details Note 180 Si72 301 The management groups and management po
256. nce mode pineg St Schedule Interlocking User Info Status table Mu Itiple Language se i sign clear Fan direction Op e Enalish 1 Set Point etc a ngs j l French l PE 4 italian l E Serl I J German eo 4 I i Spanish I A L Indication Chinese I Manage group Cell display out Automatic Controls Control group Cell display tik ta Schedule J eVisual Navigation Interlocking I G raphical display standard Emergency stopr i Table e Eco Mode Other Power Limit Control 4 I Auto change over Security r Sliding temperatu re External 30 users Max Flexible access Authority i kit required History I Measurement e Temperature limit realtime Gale coved datai 3 Power Failure control Set point limitation i Accurate operate time Multiple PC accessible from eNumber of switching times different PC s l 3 Consumption power Fapa OnLine Help I Lee perature MEE Compatibility with Windows 2000 l Outdoor temperature I 4 A N 4 mo Mme eee eee eee eee eee eee Design Guide 23 24 Functions 3 3 Upgrade ECO21 ver2 Functions Si72 301 3 3 1 Maximizing energy efficiency while maintaining room comfort E Power Limit Control Enables systematic management of A C power consumption Providing control via prediction of A C operation in order to limit power consumption to the set targ
257. network cable NO Power supply switch of iPU is turned off YES l Turn on the power supply switch of iPU NO Check for software setting 296 Troubleshooting Si72 301 After Installation 2 3 Can Not be Connected to iPU Software Setting Supposed Causes m Incorrect setting for IP address of iPU m Incorrect setting for IP address of PC E Incorrect updating of iPU OS Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred OS of iPU is installed Installation of iPU OS has been failed Reinstall the OS IP address of iPU can be read out with iPU setting tool YES IP address of iPU read out with PC setting tool differs from the IP address of iPU NO Co Gat IP address of iPU correctly with PC setting tool NO Network address of PC differs rom that of iPU Input PC network address as same as iPU s NO Reinstall iManager Alive LED of iPU blinks with a constant interval NO YES Search IP address of iPU Check on malfunction of hardware Troubleshooting 297 After Installation 2 4 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware Malfunction Supposed Causes Troubleshooting 298 m Disconnection of network cable m Defective HUB m Defective iPU Si72 301 Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect co
258. nfiguration 1 1 Start the VRV setup tool PC Settings in the option frame uncheck the checkbox Ignore Auto Shutdown the checkboxes Shutdown Mode and Powerdown Mode state are free 1 2 Start the VRV setup tool iPU Settings in the Power Supply Signal Polarity frame select the option A Type contact or B Type contact of UPS Power Failure Signal corresponding with the UPS specifications refer to the UPS documentation for details Connect Di 1 to UPS output terminal see in UPS documentation which terminal corresponds to Power Failure or On battery signal 3 4 5 Start the VRV Setup Tool Management Points Setting Create a Do management point on internal Do 1 or Do 2 Set its following parameters see illustration bellow 5 1 Common Hide from Client Data checked to hide it from the client database for Tenant data management 5 2 Other Operation in Power Supply Mode Always Possible 5 3 Contact User Mode Shutdown with this option this management point is not visible on intelligent Manager screens Test power failure 6 1 Unplug the UPS power supply 6 2 Check on the main screen of intelligent Manager that that the layout of the Power State icon changes to Power Failure and that the alarm displays in the real time display area 6 3 Wait for the auto shutdown timeout please see the elapsed time in the relevant figure above about 0 to 2 minutes needed by the iPU for initial backup before s
259. ng i Interval 1 sec Pulse constant i Rate fi Pulse width C 10msec 100msec Ver 5 0000 Cancel Mne Point Attributes xj PU Nb Portnb fo PriType Ai Mng PLID 1 Name NoName Short Name NoName Icon ip 126 Ret Er Common Monitoring Analog oo s9YIIIIIIIII Unit installation place NoName Interval s min Unit string 772 Type Compo BUs BA BUS UpperLower limit monitor W _ Save no reaction zone o W Save to station Lower limit monitor Upper limit monitor I Save to rotation DB on PC Lower 0 Upper 0 Min val 0 Max val 100 None Def None Def C Monitor Monitor Monitor History Monitor History Ver2 0 Rew6 Caneel i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool 5 3 8 Configuring the Analogue Input points Pai Click and input the tabs Mng P butes xJ 7 Common see above iPUND I Pnt Type Pseudo Ai Mng FtID 1 i Name Room Temperature ShortName Rrvemp kconiD 12 Rer Br e Monitoring see above Common wontorma _Anaiog i Unit Installation place NcName e Analogue same as Ai except OO E Target Point 1 r Target Point e Select the point from which taking the value Pont 7 Teef Sue Temp r UpperLawer Limit moniterina Save ur uun zone 3 s Save tn iPU Save to rotation OB or PC oir omit Upper Limit Lower u Upper n
260. ng up the IPU Connections cccccccsseececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseaaees 137 1 3 Configuring the DIStriDUTOM wcs2 2ec0besc2ieuiebeddeleto didtossiewletancieaiiedieeeey 137 2e NOOS nre a uteudatontd wate die shie atte bidasbeve ua cgahived wean nesieats 145 Model names and specifications or the like are subject to change without prior notice for further improvement so be sure to confirm the following catalogues and engineering data Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual 135 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution i72 301 1 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution 1 1 Overview Note In this chapter the term distribution stands for power proportional distribution This function distributes the power used by outdoor units between the connected indoor units and equipment The power consumption of the outdoor units is measured on Pulse Input management points The relative power consumption of the indoor units is calculated from their operation time and mode level headed with model related coefficients The figure bellow illustrates the wiring capacity and constraints for the distribution function lt Important gt oo Internal Pil can not be used on the Master iPU A reserved for power failure signal Internal Pi2 Internal Indoor Indoor Indoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor unit unit unit unit unit unit 1 2 64 1 2 10 Indoor Indoor lt Important
261. nmainally satin 27004 Path for saving DWRVPV oo Raat gas Seta mace Fleese Make the holde fo saving i Primay FC aa i Opliun ifu i ey C Renote PC F Shutdown node oe F Powerdow mode S aion seting I WatchDos cnoe Shutdown F Astonatic Change Over p awe F Sliding Temperature Riggs alae I Temperature Lirrit Ver nnn Exi wie eu Affects the registries offthe PC an which this toal is renn ng Calculate Required Volume a iia ponts AND Loading dala will delets existing cata Confirm exit Date 365 days Calculete i Cancel OK f Cancel ree neye OK Cancel Important In the Registries frame first click the Read button and confirm to load the current settings from the PC You can click the Load from File button and specify the path to a initialization file extension brg or and input as follows when necessary e Type the Execution Path if left blank the current directory of the executable module is used else BackSlash should be use as folder separator in path location folder of the binary files of intelligent Manager VRV exe and VRV Demo exe i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 73 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool i72 301 Important 74 e Type the Master iPU IP Address should be 192 168 0 1 except for the demo mode 127 0 0 1 e Select the PC Master Remote option should be Master Remote only for PC running the separate option intelligent Man
262. nnector AN Caution or parts damage may be occurred Alive LED of iPU blinks with a constant interval YES Can be connected by replacing the network cable NO YES NO Can be connected by replacing the HUB NO YES Alive LED of iPU does not light up NO YES Replace the network cable Replace the HUB Check on the setting of PC and iPU iPU is defective Installation of OS has been failed Reinstall the iPU OS Troubleshooting Si72 301 2 5 Some of the Air Conditioners Have Communication Error Supposed Causes Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Power for indoor unit is not supplied Disconnection of D3 wiring Disconnection of network cable of iPU Faulty D3 port AAN caution indoor unit on the same D3 port has YES All indoor units on the same D3 port have communication error YES NO All indoor units on the same iPU have communication YES NO After Installation Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector or parts damage may be occurred Supply power for indoor unit D3 port may be damaged or D3 wiring may be disconnected D3 wiring may be disconnected Network cable of iPU may be detached or disconnected or iPU may malfunction A problem with D3 wiring quality is suspected Inspect the problem with D3 checker or the like 299 After Ins
263. not connected There are two RS485 communication ports LEDs mentioned above are for sending and receiving m Wiring to devices for RS485 is not correct m Power supply to devices for RS485 is not turned on AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred Wiring for the devices for RS485 is incorrect YES Wire correctly ower supply for YES devices for RS485 is turned off Turn on the power supply Contact with your nearest supplier 303 After Installation Si72 301 2 10 RS232C 2 TxD and RxD LED is off or Lights up Trouble contents RS232C 2 TxD and RxD LED is off or lights up The LED blinks with a certain interval when the device is connected with modem for Airnet and communicates normally Although the LED is connected with modem since it does not perform communication Continuously it may sometimes be off Lighting off of the LEDs of RS232C 1 and 3 are regardless of the operation of this device because the LEDs are not used Supposed Causes m Power supply for modem is turned off Communication cable between iPU and modem is disconnected Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred power supply for modem turned Connect the power supply cable communication cable between iPU and modem
264. nput the tabs Mne Point Attributes y xj e Common see above PU Nbi Port fi Address 1 0 Pnt Type Indoorunit Wing PLID 1 e Monitoring see above Name NoName snort Name Noname icon oos Ret aay itori Indoor Other Measure see above Common Monitoring l Measure r Restriction of remote control volume of wind Indoor f Permission of Start Stop J amp None Def W Permission of Only Stop 2step Restriction of Remote Control can user Start Stop Stop C aston Restriction of setpoint v Permission of Set point Wind Direction T Cooling only change the Set Temperature or the Operation Mode F Permission ofsetting temp Disablewet of Tar oc upf TT oc ________________ Enahleg Volume of wind possible value refer to model S T Heng i i i i of a remote control group Lo 127 of uP 127 oC Wind Direction possible value refer to model E ee Restriction of set point Min Max Set Temperatures allowed ee fi ti I monitor of alarm warning opera On P Heating Mode Optimization Check boxes for Ver2 0 Rev50 Cancel e Child Units if this is slave in a Remote Control group e Validate Auto Operation operator can select Automatic Operation Mode change automatically according to Set Temperature refer to model e Validate Set Point operator can change Set Temperature e Monitor of Alarm Warning Error codes of Dill net
265. nt Engineering Manual are those requiring Service login as explained in 6 1Login in intelligent Manager below because operator should not know about this special login It configuration procedures are the users login password needed to login in intelligent Manager as well as users authority the Management Groups these groups will be used to organize the management points in a tree like structure for easily understanding the site configuration and status the Control Groups these groups which could have been configured previously with the engineering tool as explained in 5 3 10 Configuring Control Groups above will be used to configure the automatic control programs Scheduling calendar based automatic control Interlocking automatic control triggered by change of input conditions Emergency stop programs specific type of interlocking for automatically shut down the system partly or totally on notification by specific alarm signal fire breakout and power shutdown the graphic user interface perform customization of the working environment Energy saving Power Limit reducing energy consumption below a target power trend Eco Mode reducing energy consumption on a time based operation limitation Automatic Changeover switching operation mode according to room temperature Sliding Temperature avoid cold chock by changing cooling set temperature depending on outdoor temperature Temperature Limit automatica
266. nt Manager Watchdog Note A virus detection software can be installed if desired However we take no liability for any loss etc resulting from the use of this software 62 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual i72 301 Introducing intelligent Manager 1 3 The Engineering Procedure Engineering comprises two procedures e Installing intelligent Manager Wiring Networks D3Net Ethernet and UPS Installing the PC software Installing intelligent Manager software Setting up PC OS printers and modem if any auto logon utilities Setting up iPU loading OS e Configuring intelligent Manager makes use of specific tool software as well as the intelligent Manager application Step 1 with the intelligent Manager engineering tool Setting initial data of the iPU and of the PC registering the management points Step 2 with the intelligent Manager application setting the management and control groups the automatic control programs and the graphic user interface options i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 63 Requirements Si72 301 2 Requirements 2 1 General Requirements The PC in which the intelligent Manager is to be installed must fulfil the following requirements Standard CD ROM drive At least 14 monitor Keyboard and mouse Sound device if the buzzers are used 2 2 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Main Application The main application requires the following Processor
267. nt Manager to prevent mis operation or unauthorized handling The following shows authorization levels that can be set Can inspect reports daily monthly annual Can set reports daily monthly annual Subordinate Centralized Control Can set centralized control Cannot operate Setting User Registration Can register users and set authority Cannot operate Maintenance Mode Can set maintenance mode Cannot operate 2 Individual Control Allows manual individual operation of starting and stopping of management items Operations for starting and stopping switching the operating mode changing the temperature settings switching enable disable of individual remote controllers and for resetting of the filter sign are possible when using DIII NET compatible air conditioners Items pressed later have priority with regard to management items defined by the schedule control and interlocking control 3 Collective starting stopping and settings for control group Registering a plurality of management items to a control group allows manual starting and stopping for all equipment Operations for starting and stopping switching the operating mode changing the temperature settings switching enable disable of individual remote controllers and for resetting of the filter sign are possible when using DIII NET air conditioners Items pressed later have priority with regard to management items defined by the schedule control and interlocking control
268. ntelligent Manager ECO 21 can be easily connected to existing LAN networks users can reduce installation costs Master PC Supplementary Sub PC Master Slave Slave iPU iPU iPU Maximum System Plan o p gt Ethernet E WatchDOG Large scale maintenance systems can be run at low costs The system can receive error messages from air conditioners in more than one building or structure via public phone lines This allows the user to configure an appropriate maintenance system over a broad area at the lowest of costs Watchdog telephone remote monitoring eTransmit Malfunctions etc Configurable retry e Alternative phone Nr eRemote monitoring ePrinter File backup e Multi sites intelligent Manager File Menu Oper ation Hep E zal ES Te B a 3 z xal Bl Tagin Ting FL CHT Gr Schedule menok Gata Mng System Jump Bak uide 6122 Fr Site MU JEJ Jae all Site 1 Master E Remote intelligent Manager Flexible management of air conditioners equipment from a multiple number of buildings It enables flexible monitoring and control of remote air conditioners equipment via public phone lines Air conditioners equipment in more than one building can be managed f
269. o remove from the registered area click the Remove lt lt button Select the order of the buttons select the button screen from the reserved screen list and click the Up button to move the button to the top To move the button to the bottom click the Down button Finally click the OK button T Screen jump Screens List P Mng point list F Indoor Units PF Digital Inputs PF Digital Outputs F Meters F 1st 2nd Floor F 3th 4th Floor P Cutdoor Units PF Analogue Inputs F Digital Input Output G Control group list Gland Floor x F Mng Gr 3 Ctrl Gr F Free Layout S System Register Sea Auto Alternatian Register Start i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Screens Alternation x Screens Lit Alternating Screens List P Mng point list P Indoor Units P Digital Inputs F Digital Outputs P Outdoor Units P Analogue Inputs P Digital Input Output G Control group list G 2nd Floor G 3rd Floor G 4th Floor G 1st Floor Gl DinitalInnuts Zl P Mng Gr G Ctrl Gr F Free Layout 5S System Time Interval a sen 5 SEG Au sec ok fp Cancel g Slj aar 175 Operation Details The buttons are generated Click the respective button to jump to the corresponding screen intelligent Manager Si72 301 File Menu Operation Help P k Login Mng
270. od Operating is performed in order of the group list 5 10 12Sliding Temperature Note 258 Serves to configure the function that change the Cooling Set Temperature of a group of indoor units according to the outdoor temperature as shown on the figure below Sliding Temperature Operation Overview Set Temp Max Min Min Max Outdoor Temp This function requires a separate sensor for the outdoor temperature Operational Procedure Sliding Temperature x Groups Group Contents Available Mng Points External Temperature Create Delete Group Attributes Activation C Enable Disable Name group 1 Outdoor Temperature Mng PointExternal Temperature Ref Outdoor Temperature Range 24 pc 30 i ke Set Point Range 22 fe 28 ke PrintExport Cancel omea e Create the group e Enter the group name e Add Remove indoor unit members of the group e Select the outdoor temperature management point Ai e Select the min and max for Outdoor temperature i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Set Temperature e Enable the group Click on the Print Export button to print all groups settings on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file Note Up to 8 groups can be created for this function each group registering up to 128 management points 5 10 13Min Max Temperatur
271. od type or range or after modification of the current selection click the Draw Graph button to update the display graphic e X Axis scale is 1 mark amp 1 label hour in case of a one day or two day period 1 mark amp 1 label day in case of a one month period or free period more than 2 days and less or equal to 31 days 1 mark amp 1 label 2 days in case of a free period of more than 31 days and less or equal to 61 days 1 mark amp 1 label 4 days in case of a free period of more than 61 days and less or equal to 122 days 1 mark amp 1 label 7 days in other cases i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 205 Operation Details i72 301 e Analog values are displayed using lines for every type of period e Pulse equipment and indoor units are displayed using bars for period of longer than 2 days and lines for period shorter or equal to 2 days e Displayed values See table below For analog points trend value is displayed for period less or equal to 2 days For period longer than 2 days daily average value is displayed For other type of management points daily value is displayed for every type of period Daily value Daily value Daily value Daily value Equipment Indoor Unit Daily value Daily value Daily value Daily value 5 6 4 4 Displaying a point value To display the exact value of a point at a given time click on the point of the curve you want to know the exact value as shown below fi Grap
272. odule on the UPS creating of this point is not necessary I tried to start an indoor unit from iManager but could not because the Start button is grayedout The indoor unit is set to slave unit of the remote controller group An indoor unit which is a slave unit of remote controller group cannot operate The icon of the indoor unit is red but the indoor unit does not start Maybe the D3 address is different between the indoor unit and the management point of the indoor unit Assign the same D3 address both indoor unit and the management point changed the attribute of a management point with Mng Point Tool but it is not changed when I see on the iManager Did you restart the iPU after you sent the management points data which is modified the attribute by Mng Point Tool CRC displayed error code MA when the iPU was connected to D3 net Error code MA is displayed when two or more centralized controllers are connected to one D3 net Please remove the connector for setting master control from either iPU or CRC 293 Before Installation Si72 301 can start stop an indoor unit from iManager but cannot start stop from remote controller In the case of Start Stop of the Remote conttoller restriction is set to prohibited the indoor unit cannot be started stopped from the remote controller Please confirm the setup dialog of the management point The setpoint cannot be changed from remote
273. of all indoor units Calculation example 1 Count for errors in 8 day Tenant A B 0 5 Wh x 8 days x 5 units 0 02 kWh Tenant C 0 5 Wh x 8 days x 3 units 0 012 kWh total 0 032 kWh 2 Assuming that the reads on watthour meters are as follows W1 read on watthour meter 490 kWh W2 read on watthour meter 200 kWh total 690 kWh 3 Finally it is concluded as total error 0 032 690 x 100 0 0046 50 Design Guide i72 301 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution w1 Count conclusive total for indoor unit 1 5 w2 Count conclusive total for indoor unit 6 8 iPU counts the power consumption as the following conditions 1 6 for the standards So the gap to be raised from these conditions may cause the error Since these errors vary depending on the surrounded situations the worst error value can t be drawn out from the computing 1 Combination rate of indoor units connected to an outdoor unit 100 2 Outdoor temperature 35 C 3 Indoor unit s suction air temperature 19 C 4 Piping length 5m 5 Level difference Om 6 Pipe diameter 022 2 Design Guide 51 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution i72 301 10 2 2 The way to reduce errors 52 The error 1 can t be reduced however this error is small and negligible therefore so it can generally clear troubles if excusing the reason caused to tenants The way to reduce the error 2 will be describ
274. of each indoor unit s capacity the total tolerance as a result of proportioning between the power consumption by each outdoor unit and the indoor unit within the same system becomes larger Therefore if the power group has been set in a lump sum style when plural watt hour meters are installed the value on the watt hour meters and the proportioned results of corresponding outdoor units are almost the same in their total however there is a large tolerance when the value of each watt hour meter is compared with the proportioned results of corresponding outdoor unit For Power Proportional Distribution the power consumption is calculated by an assumption based on the standard condition described below as a model case Therefore the tolerance will be caused depending on the actual installation condition environmental condition operation condition This is the content explained in D BACS design guide Standard Condition 1 Outdoor unit is based on a model of 10HP Example RSXYP10K 2 3 4 Length of piping is 5m 5 Height difference is zero meter 6 7 53 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution 54 m Remarks Reference data of actual example are shown below Power group in a lump sum style kWh Wattmeter Electric energy Electric energy at each port 7292 37 7 3 193 92 pout E C pu 5 307 05 245 0 782 517 1027 1031 82 05 Group setting for each watt hour meter kWh
275. of the telephony facilities refer to the documentation of the device constructor and Microsoft Windows telephony facility Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual 151 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 4 Intelligent Manager Watchdog This configuration is performed in 2 steps Si72 301 e Step 1 on the monitoring PC configuring the intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier that will periodically call a specified intelligent Manager Watchdog and send him predetermined history records e Step 2 on the Watchdog PC configuring the intelligent Manager Watchdog that will receive history records from one or more intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier instances Note A Watchdog PC can watch several sites i e being called by several intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier instances However an intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier instance can call only one intelligent Manager Watchdog 4 1 Configuring the Monitoring PC 4 1 1 Configuring the TAPI device See detailed procedure above 4 1 2 Enabling the Watchdog function Start the intelligent Manager configuration tool VRV Setup Open the PC setting screen Click the Read button check the Watchdog box click the Write button Exit PG Setting tool Use this tool on PC which performs software such as master PC Basic information Execution path Master iPU P address The demonstration mode is System mode Primary PC C Remote PC aut
276. omatic Stop Restart cce 172 A LOGGING IN LOG GING OUN assein aia dead chaess 173 Al OOGING Mierea eee ebook edi baed ho tet hade nettle Gols 173 42 OGG ING OUl cena a a 173 5 Operation Details eseis a a a 174 5 1 Moving Between SCIreens ccccsccccsseeccsseeecceseeccceueeeceueeessseessanseessaas 174 5 2 Displaying Management Groups c csecccceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeecaeeeeseeeessees 177 5 37 Displaying GOntrolG FOUDS srir i ee ate ase L 190 5 4 Malfunction Display and History Management cccsseeesseeeeeeees 194 5 5 Emergency Stop Interlocking Control in case of fire cecceee ees 196 5 6 Graphical REPO aiee n a inne paceebeacadeeenivens 197 57 MANAGING Dalaerers a a wmdaenag aes 207 58 Seting the Schedule 2ccidasteteccedcediesdl eee Seite Mdiideelele bab oebeedidedeindded 215 5 9 INTEMOGKING FUNCION piacicdecids aan a a dicieadete RE 227 De OSV SIM COINS ai n a 237 6 1 Energy Saving FUNCIONS srine tet a a 260 5 12 Visual Navigation ssie elaine ian asien enh tectaeieiaeentiadeuuede 267 6 Database Maintenance ccccccccsscceeeeceeeseeeseseseseeeseesseesseesentenseens 270 72 TTOUDISSNOOUNG isicreitieateietstencs a a 213 ii Si72 301 Part 6 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual ccsssssseseesssees 2 9 1 Intelligent Manager Watchdog ccccceeceeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeneeeeaes 2 6 1 1 Introducing Intelligent Manager Watchdog
277. omatically setto 127 0 0 1 datahase size po MByte calculate L from fileiSave to file of setting information Save Load PC info registries write Read Affects the registries ofthe PC on which this tool is running 152 Reset 2001 1 Of 411 4 28 The verification data for power proportional division Number of collection 31 A daily report is saved as PdvLog dat Path for saving Please Make the holder for saving Option info Shutdown mode Iv WatchDOG Jv Free Layout J Power Proportional Distribution M Power Limit control J Eco mode Iv Automatic Change Over fv Sliding Temperature fv Temperature Limit Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual Si72 301 Intelligent Manager Watchdog 4 1 3 Configuring the intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier Start the intelligent Manager WatchdogNotifier WatchdogNotifier exe in the bin directory and perform as explained below Watchdog Notifier Time Name D PORT ADDR CODE Site Name Daikin Systems amp Sol Phone numbers 0 0755 Secondary 0 090 Primary Werl 0 Rev16 Important Calling period Calling Parameters aad mind ES Dial Reply Setup Device Force Dial Fifa z ae silos Max Capacity AU mn 1 100000 fioo eres 1 100 Water mark 1 100 70 Retry period 4 30 sec Nb of Retry 1 100 Ro Ro ie P Data pack size WM 2 5 Default 1 2
278. onsultation and registration editing of Schedule consultation only is possible Registration schedule is possible Interlocking Control Consultation and registration editing of Interlocking control consultation only is Registration interlocking control is possible possible Emergency Stop Consultation and registration editing of Emergency stop consultation only is Registration emergency stop is possible possible Emergency Stop Forced release of emergency stop is possible Operation cannot be performed Release History Operation Consultation and setup of history is possible History consultation only is possible System Setup System setup is possible Operation cannot be performed Centralized Control Centralized control setup is possible Operation cannot be performed Setup User Registration User registration and authority may be set up Operation cannot be performed Under Under maintenance mode may be set up Operation cannot be performed Maintenance Mode Register Power Limit Consultation and editing of Power Limit Power Limit consultation only is parameters is possible possible Register Eco Mode Consultation and editing of Eco Mode Eco Mode con sultation only is possible parameters is possible Screen Authority It is possible to set up an authority able to open all screens or an authority able to open only those screens as specified in the screen registration Even if a screen may be opened if the operation authority for that screen has
279. ontrol Groups menu button 2 For each control group Click the icon of the control group the border color turns purple Click the Collective Start button of the action menu then check that the color turns red after a few seconds depending on the number of points in this group the delay may be longer Click the Open List button of the action menu the management points screen of the control group appears For each management point of this control group Check that the color of the icon is red Wait for confirmation from the E I that the point checkup is performed on his side Click the Back menu button the groups screen displays Click the Collective Stop button of the action menu then check that the color turns green after a few seconds depending on the number of points in this group the interval may be longer Click the Open List button of the action menu the management points screen of the control group displays For each management point of this control group Check that the color of the icon is green Wait for confirmation from the E I that the point checkup is performed on his side Click the Back menu button the groups screen displays As well as the color of the icon supplementary checkup of the points of this group can be performed depending on the criteria explained above in Checking the Management Points 6 7 3 Checking the Scheduling programs Important This procedure checks each scheduling program T
280. ontrollers on DIII NET air conditioners and corresponds to various controls and operations Start Stop 3 settings possible Disable remote controller enable only remote controller stop enable remote controller Operating Mode Select either enable disable remote controller for this operation Temperature Adjustment Select either enable disable remote controller for this operation Design Guide Si72 301 3 2 3 Display Screens Directory Screen Composition Management Group Management Items Display Control Group List Display Operating Time and Start Stop Cumulated Count Display Detailed History Display Schedule Display Interlocking Program Screen Fire Emergency Stop Program Pt Tt Pt tt tte Facility Equipment Setting Screen 1 Screens Directory Login List of Multiple Hierarchies Management Items List Control Group Management Items List Control Group Management Items List Control Group Control Group List Management Items List Control Group Schedule Settings Link Control Program Settings Emergency Stop Program Settings Reserved Screen Automatic Circulation Link Program Report Settings Data Control Report Display System Settings Move Screen Emergency Stop Fires Detailed History Display Design Guide Functions Management Group Settings Control Group Settings Login Settings Central Control Settings Buzzer Settings History Settin
281. oor ca 4th Floor ae Digital Inputs 2 Digital Outputs 2 O ave teem i 3 Control Group Edit List Attributes Create Group Delete Group Printfexport Set Attributes Time Interval Select leon When a management point is registered it will be displayed as in the screen above Sequential Start Stop intervals may be set up for Start and Stop D3Dio 1 Fire Signal Levell Est Levell Est Levell Est3 Ferri Levell Estd Level Vstl Level Vst2 Levell Vst3 Level vstd Level Estl Level Est Level Ests Level Mlord Level Mor Level Mors Level Vstl Level Wist Level2 Wsts Level3 Estt Level3 Est Level3 Est3 Level3 Shart Level3 Shar2 Level3 Shara Level3 Shard Level3 VVstl Level3 Wist Display Made w All C Unregistered Type tf All Equip i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual S i72 301 Operation Details Select the group to be set up and click the Time Interval button to display a dialog box Then set the sequential Start Stop intervals Control Group Configuration x Groups Available Ming Points 1st Floor DSDio 1 2nd Floor Fire Signal ard Floor Levell Estl 4th Floor Levell Est Digital Inputs Levell Estd Digital Outputs Leveld VVstl Leyell V st au Levell Vsts Levell Wist4 Level Est1 Level Est Level Ests Level Mort Level More Level Mors Level2 VVstl Ferm Level Wist Level2 Wsts Level3 Estt Level3 Est Level3 Est3 Level3 Shart Level3 Shar2
282. or Unit 46 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 47 Stop Cooling oita Undoor Unit 48 Stop Cooling iiasal Undoor Unit 49 Stop Cooling SRR Undoor Unit 5 Stop Cooling iiia Undoor Unit 50 Stop Cooling TARR Undoor Unit 61 Stop Cooling ae Undoor Unit 52 Stop Cooling aiita Undoor Unit 6 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 60 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 61 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 63 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 64 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 65 Start Cooling 28 0 C LIndanr I init GG Ctart Cooling 90 nor eFlexible point configulation Ming Point Attributes x iPUNb Ponne 1 Name NoName Short Name NoName Icon In 103 Rer amp Common Monitoring Measure Indoor Other o Address i fo Pnt Type Indoorunit Mng PtID 1 i Restriction of remote control p Volume of wind gt validate of Change over WV Permission of Start Stop None Def Margin 3 oc 1 0 7 00C V Permission of Only Stop C 2step j C 3step Restriction of set point V Permission of Set point f Cooling M Permission of setting temp Lo 27 oC up 127 oC lr I Heating The child unit of a remote control group Lo 27 oc up 127 of IV valid auto operation 127 1270C IV valid set point M monitor of alarm warning Heating Mode Optimization Ver1 4 Revi Check box to enable Heating Mode Optimization Complete points information File Menu Operation He
283. ord set up However a password is required for the auto logon Please create a password if necessary default value in the present manual is daikin 4 2 2 Installing the intelligent Manager software 4 2 2 1 Installing the common intelligent Manager software Important LZH SFX 2 60 w32 0020 x E Wer1 016 fo Start Menu s fa Set Class Ay oxo CANCEL C geere LZH SFX 2 60 32 0020 Ea EWWerl 016 io Start Menu s _ Sz HASSA Extracting directory _ orgy canceug the name of the installation folder should not contain special characters etc neither spaces use underscore _ instead as this would prevent some functions to operate correctly 1 Insert the resource CD ROM in the PC in MS Windows Explorer double click the file iManagerEnglish exe 2 Type the target folder name ex D intelligentManager The files and sub folders of intelligent Manager are extracted and copied to this directory Create a folder and en tries in the Start Menu Please refer the Appendix A for detailed installation procedure i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 67 Installing the intelligent Manager system i72 301 3 Double click the file osN exe in MS Windows Explorer 4 Type the target folder name ex D intelligentManager The file of the iPU operating system is extracted and copied in this directory It will be used later for installing the IPU 4 2 2 2
284. ore ports voltage as required on the field 10Base T cables category 5 for PC hub Hub iPU for each iPU Note we recommend reliable makers 3Com etc 108 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview The UPS must meet the following requirements Required Features recommendation Capacity 200 250W 30 min 50W for each additional iPU Voltage as required on the field I O connector for connection with master iPU Cables to connect the I O connector to the master iPU Di Power failure signal from UPS Do UPS shutdown signal from iPU Control software Note we recommend reliable maker APC with PowerChute control software For each iPU Required Features recommendation Power cable DIII networking cable Note Required Ethernet networking cables are listed in networking equipment The Watt Hour Meter if Power Proportional Distribution optional function is used must meet the following requirements Required Features recommendation 1 pulse 1 kWh PWH iPU connection cable Note one WHM is required for each power group as explained in the Proportional Distribution Engineering Manual i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 109 Workflow Overview Si72 301 8 3 2 Engineering data 8 3 2 1 List of connected machines The precise layout of this file has to be checked with the VRV Selection Program HD test User Name 5 FR 999 2 32 FR 1 2 32 BU 1 1 999 000000000
285. ore than one management points may be set up simultaneously Furthermore setup of management point units is possible in a lower layer screen As the operation method is identical to that of management point lists please refer to 5 3 Displaying Control Groups p 190 First select the control group whose setup is to be modified Click on the GroupSetup button to display the setup dialog box The items that may be set up will vary according to the management points belonging to the control group If the management points in the control group belong to only one type of equipment Daikin DIII Air conditioner equipment with Start Stop capability or other equipment the respective dialog box will be displayed in each case and setup is possible Adr Conditionner Setup 1st Floor Present Status status otop Filter Sign Operation Mlode Cooling FC suc Temp a Operation T set Filter Sign Ta M cear A erolpetat holmes RC restriction start stop Operationhlode E Prohibbed e Stop Orly ff Permitted ee Atte e han fleet fo Setoont Operation Mode ermited E Prohibited set Temperature ff permitted m Prohipited In Maintenance M Temporarily it E E Timer Extension l Set a Dip Of If there are two or more types of management points belonging to a control group the other equipment setup dialog box will be displayed and setup will be possible only within a common ran
286. ormat file Note Up to 8 groups can be created for this function each group registering up to 128 management points Important In order to ensure a correct operation always register in a same group the slave in door units i e without Cool Heat Selector with the master indoor unit i e with Cool Heat Selector of the same refrigeration circuit Always register the slave indoor units after the master indoor units because the selection method Operating is performed in order of the group list 5 11 Energy Saving Functions These functions automatically control the indoor and outdoor units to lower power consumption There are 2 possible controls methods e Power Limit Control recommended for high demand season i e summer optimizes the power consumption trend and adjust set temperature of indoor units to remain below the target consumption 260 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details e Eco mode calendar based stops indoor units intermittently or lowers capacity of outdoor units to lower the power consumption intelligent Manager a ajej 2 xa Bio F WHET NSE Setpoint Disabled zjin sjinjaj vanade SEW Pill Stale DEIANECINTOT Note When only the Eco Mode is activated as setup during initial engineering the button icon is changed as shown above 5 11 1 Power Limit Control This limits based on target power measured on a pulse meter The setup is carried out in two
287. ormed start the intelligent Manager Remote application Refer to the intelligent Manager Operation Manual for details Exit the intelligent Manager application before closing the RAS connection 2 2 3 Closing the RAS connection Click the Hang Up button and confirm as shown below ga Dial Up Networking Monitor Status Summary Preferences Device Panasonic TO BXFS6K V90 KS56flex COR Condition Connected to iManager Remote Device response Unavailable Line bps 12 000 Duration 00 01 37 Device statistics Bytes in 812 Bytes out 2999 Connection statistics Bytes in 812 Bytes out 2 999 Frames in 21 Frames out 4 Compression in 0 Compression out 0 Device errors CRC 0 Framing 0 Timeout 0 Hardware overruns 0 Alignment 0 Buffer overruns 0 Reset Details Hang up Cancel 2 3 Troubleshooting When connection is impossible check the configuration on the site PC is the Modem correctly installed and configured is the RAS service correctly configured Check the condition on the Office PC is the modem properly installed and configured are the login parameters correct 286 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual Si72 301 Notes 3 Notes 1 Illegal reproduction of this document or of any part therein is strictly prohibited 2 Any part of this document may be changed in the future without prior notice 3 Every effo
288. ot use the hub uplink hub to hub connector Important Check that the Ethernet connection LED on each iPU is ON Check that the Ethernet connection LED on each PC is ON Check that all the connected LEDs of the hub are ON If all these conditions are not met check the wiring 3 3 Wiring the UPS The Un interruptible Power Supply device provides power to the monitoring PC or to the iPU for a limited time when the normal power supply fails and until the intelligent Manager programs followed by the PC itself shutdown safely and smoothly Please refer to the Appendix C Power Failure Management for details 66 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Installing the intelligent Manager system 4 Installing the intelligent Manager system 4 1 Contents of the CD ROM The intelligent Manager resource CD ROM contains the following folders and files File iManagerEnglish exe installation application that will copy the folders and files to the PC File oSN exe installation application that will copy the iPU os file to the PC 4 2 Installing the Software 4 2 1 Installing the PC software Important 1 Install Microsoft Windows 2000 or else Windows NT with service pack 5 and convert the drive format into NTFS one or two partitions 2 Install the MS Internet Explorer application needed because includes some software components used for network communication purpose On delivery the intelligent Manager system has no passw
289. p content Important This dialogue set up the period when the power is NOT proportionally divided Therefore unchecked boxes as well as the special days of the calendar mean that the division is carried out all day 5 8 Setting the Schedule e Time schedules may be defined in advance so that control of the equipment Start Stop operation mode switchover as well as temperature setup and permission prohibition of remote controller can be carried out automatically Schedule programs are registered in weekly blocks and the type of operation to be performed on every day of the week is specified Moreover holidays and special days over a one year period 13 months may be specified within the schedule program in the Yearly block these can be shared between programs by using Base Calendars Operation method during special days and holidays may also be specified in the same way as the operational schedule of any day of the week i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 215 Operation Details i72 301 e Up to 128 schedule programs may be registered Please be careful that a higher number of schedule programs make start up procedure of the intelligent Manager system last longer e The appropriate authority is required to set up a schedule program e Please refer to 5 10 3 Configuring user Login p 245 Without this authority consultation only is possible When a scheduled operation is carried out it is reported and saved in the history record
290. point list Indoor Units L dst 2nd Floor 3th 4th Floor D3Dio 1 External Tempe ExtTermnp Fire Signal Fire Indoor Tempera Inthernp Digital Inputs Levell Estt L1E1 Digital Input Output Parsee r Add evell Es Meters Level Estd Lied Digital Outputs Levelt Wstt Lavi z Analogue Inputs Levell Wist Livy Levell Vst3 LVS Levell vstd Liv Level Est LYE Level Est LYE Level Est3 LYES Level Mort LIM Level Morz L22 Level Mor3 LaNa Level VVstt Lav Levyel Wist Loy Level WVist3 Lawa Level3 Est1 L3E1 Level3 Est Display Mode Level l Level Darg e e fe All C Unregistered Edit Group Type i All Indoor unit Create oroup Delete Group Set Attribute PrintfExport 20 we Outdoor Units Ferri G Group oy barr Si72 301 The management points belonging to this group are selected from the list of available management points and added by clicking the Add lt lt button To remove a management point select the management point to be removed from the management group content list and click the Remove gt gt button i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details When a management point is registered it will be displayed as in the screen below HM anagement Group Configuration Management Groups Structure Management Group Content Available Mng Points Mng point list Indoor Units OsDia 1 03D
291. posed Causes m Incorrect setting for IP address of iPU m Incorrect setting for IP address of PC m Incorrect updating of iPU OS Troubleshooting AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred OS of iPU is Installation of iPU OS has been installed failed Reinstall the OS IP address of iPU read out with PC setting tool differs from the IP address of iPU NES pe IP address of iPU correctly with PC setting tool NO Network address of PC differs from that of iPU i Input PC network address as same as iPU s NO Reinstall iManager Alive LED of iPU blinks with a constant interval YES Search IP address of iPU NO Check on malfunction of hardware 306 Troubleshooting Si72 301 2 13 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware Malfunction Trouble contents Supposed Causes Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Can not be connected to iPU Hardware malfunction E Disconnection of network cable m Defective HUB m Defective iPU After Installation AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred Alive with a constant interval NO Alive LED of iPU YES LED of iPU blinks does not light up YES be connected to iPU by replacing the network cable
292. r calendar and week schedule With the execution schedule you can change anytime to correspond to the remaining hours to run and other specially made schedules 5 Interlocking control Automatically starts and stops equipment that has been set according to the change in operating status of specified equipment or the occurrence of abnormality There are 2 types of input conditions that can be specified Start Stop Status and Error Using interlock control allows for starting and stopping sequentially This function is available with almost connected points i e indoor units interlock key controls remote controllers etc A maximum of 50 input condition management items and a maximum of 50 start stop output management items can be set with 1 interlock program A maximum of 100 interlock programs can be defined The application of a plurality of interlock programs for input and output with the same management items is possible Example of Interlocking Programs Indoor unit Link Inputs signal from lighting equipment and turns OFF air conditioning of rooms where all lights have been turned OFF Key Control Link Inputs signal from key control device and turns OFF lights and air conditioning of areas from which keys have been returned 6 Emergency stop control for fires The system performs the necessary determined actions rings buzzer prints to printer display fire sign stops air conditioning equipment etc to notify of
293. r else blank e Check the Power Proportional Distribution box if this function is activated for configuration details see the sections 5 1 Configuring the PC data and 5 3 2 Configuring the Indoor Unit points e Check the Power Limit Control box if this function is activated for configuration details see the section 6 2 8 1 Power Limit Control e Check the Eco Mode box if this function is activated for configuration details see the section 6 2 8 2 Eco Mode e Check the DST box if Daylight Saving Time is effective in the country and in accordance with the current local regulations e Type the Time BIAS e Select for Start and Finish the Month Day and Hour e Enter the Periodical Backup times hour and minutes up to 4 backups every day default value is 0 midnight only i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 75 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool i72 301 Click the Save button and confirm to backup this data in an initialization file extension bid then confirm to transmit them to the iPU Caution In case of updating an existing configuration always load data from iPU before editing and saving else user configuration data will be lost Important Perform configuration of sub iPU first Connect only one iPU at a time during iPU configuration Note Repeat the above procedure for each iPU switch it Off then On to update its internal settings 5 3 Configuring the Management Points Caut
294. r failure Returns each management item to its start stop status prior to the power failure 2 Execute Scheduled run Determines start stop status the status that should be for operation of the time of the recovery according to the execution schedule and outputs a start stop instruction 3 Force Stop The start stop status is stop 4 Force Operation The start stop status is start 5 Recover Remote Controller Returns the remote controller enable disable to the status prior to power failure No other instructions are output Other than 5 above the operating mode and temperature setting output the value of the intelligent Manager setting Settings change when the power is restored if the equipment was running with a remote controller setting that differs to the intelligent Manager prior to the power failure Regardless of the power recovery mode a link operation that was applied prior to the power failure will restart after power is restored after approximately 10 minutes after power is restored 8 Centralized control of air conditioners intelligent Manager allows for centralized operation of DIII NET air conditioners Performs detailed control by allowing operation of start stop switching of the operating mode changing of the temperature setpoint enable disable remote controller operations and resetting the filter sign Enable disable remote controller operations Limits operations from individual remote c
295. r notice for further improvement so be sure to confirm the following catalogues and engineering data i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 61 Introducing intelligent Manager i72 301 1 Introducing intelligent Manager 1 1 About the Present Manual This manual describes the engineering procedure of the DAIKIN air conditioning monitoring and control system intelligent Manager intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help 3 xa xaj o Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Ming System Jump Back Help Guide 20014 925 Tue 11 19 DAIKIN si aln Open list Stari Slop Detailed ina Setup Report O 4 YRV System Network Solution Restore Fire AR DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD MUM Bumer o dadd 1 2 The Composition of the intelligent Manager System The intelligent Manager system is composed of e software intelligent Manager main application usually called intelligent Manager intelligent Manager Database Server intelligent Manager Demo Server installation only for simulation intelligent Manager Remote separate option on remote PC only intelligent Manager Watchdog separate option on remote PC only e hardware the iPU except for the intelligent Manager Demo the monitoring PC usually called the PC the installation PC usually the monitoring PC can be used the modem for the separate options intelligent Manager Remote and intellige
296. r refer to the actual value of your version Telnet 192 168 0 1 _ ol x Connect Edit Terminal Help UxWorks login d bips Password gt flashll size date time name 1811916 APR 10 2000 16 24 18 os 17299 HAY 16 2000 12 12 31 all bid 17238 HAY 18 2000 18 21 08 init bid 28767 HAY 18 2000 18 08 38 HanagerData bpd 728128 HAY 19 2666 66 66 48 program sch 89416 MAY 23 2008 11 55 18 pdy_urf dat 9584 HAY 09 2000 18 08 52 ErrHist dat 124 HAY 09 2000 18 09 66 bipsContext dat 2568 MHAY 18 266868 18 24 18 progran eng 1648 68 MAY 18 2608 16 32 52 program ilk 481288 MAY 22 2808 23 55 28 pdu_hst dat 25128 MAY 15 28068 15 11 43 pdvu_prop dat value x8 5 E e 2 C Close the connection Click Connect Disconnect and exit Telnet e 3 Swith the iPU Off and then On again this is to save the os file in the iPU memory End of the iPU OS installation procedure Note Repeat the above procedure for each iPU 72 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool 5 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool This part of the configuration procedure makes use of the VRVSetup exe engineering tool which is in the Tools sub folder of the installation folder It performs configuration of the data in the monitoring PC and the iPU This data includes the intelligent Manager system configuration by using Management points The
297. r to be available this function must be activated in the PC Setting dialogue see section 5 1 Configuring the PC data for details Important Some of the configuration parameters are saved in the ini file Please refer to the section 7 1 Saving below to save this file after customization has been performed Caution Always keep the size of the ini file below 2 Mb Otherwise intelligent Manager operation could be affected 6 5 1 1 Background screen file e Becomes the background of the Visual Navigation Format is WMF Windows Meta File e A general purpose software such as Visio is required for creation of the drawings The background size is a rectangle with a ration 1 X 1 5 horizontal The Visual Navigation screen components consist of icons buttons and auxiliary information arranged on this background 6 5 1 2 Icons e Icons display the status of management points and control groups e Automatic arrangement of icons is carried out in cells please refer to PC instructions about icon display status e The icon assigned to a management point can be selected arbitrarily 94 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual i72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application 6 5 1 3 Auxiliary information e Display supplementary information about management points e The information displayed can be different depending on the type of management point e The information displayed is automatically refresh
298. re settings switching of enable disable of individual remote controllers resetting of the filter sign clearing of the failure warning and settings for being under maintenance are possible when using our DIII NET compatible air conditioners Items pressed later have priority with regard to management items defined by the schedule control and link control Setting Screen for Other Facility Equipment that can be Started and Stopped Equipment Setup Dio 0 Diol Present Status Status stop Repeat Mode M Set l Repeat EEE Operation M Set C Start f Stop Under Maintenance In addition to start stop operation supported by all facility equipment our DIII NET air conditioners can be started and stopped with the repeat mode In this case the outputs start and stop instructions in determined time intervals to make the starting and stopping states of the facility obey the intelligent Manager instructions regardless of the local operation Design Guide 17 Functions Si72 301 3 2 4 Measuring Measuring Cumulated Running Time and Cumulated Start Stop Count Automatic Inspection of Meter 1 Cumulated Running Time and Cumulated Start Stop Count Cumulated running time and cumulated start stop count are possible on all facility equipment that should be monitored This is a standard for equipment maintenance Can set as data for calculating electrical costs according to the use of the equipment
299. re shift of each group is indicated Present Status Disabled Control Level 0 Shift amount e A B C D E F G H foo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo 5 11 2 Setting up Eco Mode Click the Eco Mode Setup button and select one of the two control classifications as shown below 5 11 2 1 Setting up Intermittent operation control This intermittently switches Off and On registered indoor units based on a calendar as shown below 3 groups of indoor units can be defined to be stopped for a ratio of 10 to 40 evenly within a 30 minutes cyclical interval during the calendar based seasons Eco Mode E4 ontro Classification Stee IG E OUTER E control Hisabled Bisabled Enable Disable Exec Condition Control Setup r Control Schedule 1 poi TL TL Feb Pa t_ Schedule 2 Period 1 1 12 r ar 10 stop control inant amp m gt gt a Qa ef eal tel all oe a el mommo m LLELLE Disabled Disabled 0 eee OH o m N Fa Deepens sssnnny NAGNSE5 58 5G 4 7 x R DEBDTBCHOBBCBCBGBS NNNHHVSSSaaaa aoe cr orrom E lt z By Ds zo o a QB iri Enable Disable Register Mng Pt Print Gther Contro Group PrintExport Cancel Cancel Operational Procedure e Execution conditions Setup the calendars 2 seasons avail
300. reely change their department charges and accounting books under their own responsibility x Tenants Name Code four comments free editing Nb of points Add Tenant Save Setup Modify Tenant Exit Remove Tenant Name Comment Comment2 Comment 3 Comment4 Points 6F Office 4 BF Office OF Meeting Room 10F Office Total 18 Design Guide Si72 301 Functions Tenant Report x Tenant r Period pan yyyy mm dd Exit period From Boor BA Retrieve Day To po e 31 _Export Data Indoors units PPD Equipments Meters Names Operation hh mm Switching Nb Power kWh 6F Office 1 rata 130 373 6F Office 2 15 371 6F Office 3 337 592 SF Office 1 99873 SF Office 2 40 911 8F Office 3 0 493 OF Meeting Room 1 K 62 198 OF Meeting Room 2 126 44 OF Meeting Room 3 178 013 OF Meeting Room 4 215 982 10F Office 1 3 469 10F Office 2 18 366 10F Office 3 57 621 10F Office 4 191 573 3 2 6 Reports Emergency Signal Input Report I O with Other Emergency System 1 Emergency Signal Input Allocates a dedicated input board for fire signal input Di on iPU main unit The emergency stop program using this as the input signal function has priority over other controls See Fire emergency stop control 2 Report I O with Other Emergency System The application of link control enables key management control that uses the input of a signal from the key management device and the
301. rgeted for emergency stops Fire Occurrence Screen intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help Login Ming Pt Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Guide 2000 9 1 8 Mon 50 DAIKIN cost Main openlist BETAINE ATG Semp Repor O21 w VRV System Network Solution Restore Fire E es as Buzzer DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD The fire icon on the bottom right hand side of the screen will change to red when the emergency stop signal is input Normally the report signal is input from the fire system intelligent Manager is not a fire prevention certified product 16 Design Guide Si72 301 10 Facility Equipment Setting Screen DIII NET Air Conditioner Setting Screen Air Conditionner Setup Levell Est1 LIE Present Status status start Filter Sign ie Running Mode Cooling 27 C Temp 20 0 C Operation Filter Sign W Set f Start i Stop L csar Operating Mode d W Set a Ata t Fan Cool Heat m Setpoint RC Operat Perm Prohib M Set Stat Stop C Prohibited Stop Only Permitted Oper hlode f Permit Fan olume Temp Adjust f Permit Probhib Prohib os s Under Maintenance Earr REEE SER Temporarily Mot MonitoredControled Functions Each of the operations of start stop switching of operating mode changing of temperatu
302. ribution Commissioning Manual i72 301 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution 1 3 3 6 Calculating the power groups data Click the Start and Stop calculation buttons Caution When stopping the calculation of a power group the calculated data of the last day will be cleared when starting the next calculation Note The groups under calculation are displayed in red color 1 3 3 7 Checking the calculation result This procedure allows inspection of the calculation result of a power group items Click the Confirm button of the top menu DCU Trial Confirm initialize Date Setup Unit Setup Gro Monitor Bips 1 Exit ae sao E ae indoor 110 20000501 20000574 Retrieve fot a haa aa Daytime Nighttine Exception Period 53611 KWh 0 000 KWh 0 000 Kh Present Calcvdated During Stop 0 000 knf 0 000 HN During Stop 0 000 h Value Average Proportional Division Rate 038 Operation Time 2714 min Thermo ON Time O min Fen Operation Time 45 tr N tt it 0 0 0 0 0 0 eoooceccos ice Storage Onty Daytime 0000 KWh Nighttime 0 000 Kh Puse Manpi2 200q0sm 2000574 Totel 000 kh NightPart 000 KWh Exception Period Totei 0 00 Kh Pulse Temporary Consumed Power xi Outdoot Unit Temporary Consume ower moomo tacos una 1400 Calculation Perlod Exception Period Daytime Nighttime Total Total e000 kwh 0 000 town 0 000 Kvn 0 000 Kw J 000C kwh
303. rlap with other schedule programs Click the Create button to create a new schedule program The name setup dialog box is displayed as shown below Hame Setup Enter the schedule name to be created onto the name setup screen Check the contents entered for errors and then click the OK button i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 217 Operation Details intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Guide 9 Data Mng System Jump Back Help 2001 10 11Thu 1 18 02 iA ust Main Schedule Interlock Activation C Enable Disable Open et Renewal date Edit _ test 2002 10 Blatt Clock 1 Create ston Copy Delete Rename Edit Execute Schedule PrintExport 6 4 Restore Fire r System z 4 Base Calendar Pwr Limit Buzzer Selection Ed Si72 301 Output Selected PrintExport t Print Out All PrintlExport Export ___AllPrinexpot List PrinvExport Cancel The schedule program list in the above figure shows the previously entered schedule Select the desired schedule to be set up on the annual calendar from the schedule list using the mouse Schedules either one schedule all schedules or the list only can be printed out to the system printer or exported into CSV comma separated format files 5
304. rom one location making it easy to reduce system management costs and bring consistency to the system environment eRemote Control amp Monitoring Data Management etc eBased on Windows RAS Remote Access Server Master PC local Remote PC 27 Functions Si72 301 3 3 3 In addition various functions provide the user with comfort and enhanced laborsaving 28 management E Automatic Changeover Increases comfort and saves on labor required in managing system operation The intelligent Manager ECO 21 measures room temperature and automatically changes over between cooling and heating modes depending on the set temperature This provides comfort by enabling selection of the appropriate mode and takes the human factor out of changeovers Flexible group configuration Fle Mani Operation Filp i 3 selection methods g L Sls ink Sol Q Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide Connection completed Now starting PC system Ver2 0 Rev58 2001 11 15 Thu System setup ely Main Version Information x Other Settings Management Paints 10F Office 4 Automatic Control Automatic Change Over Sliding Temperature Restore etting o mje ce mace Temperature Limit z Pwr Limit Buzzer Group Attributes Note Z r Activation When adding indoor units without Cool Heat selector in a oe C Enable
305. roup for the common areas constituted of the indoor units of these common areas one group for each tenant constituted of the indoor units Internal Digital Input points and Internal Digital Output points of this tenant one group for the Internal Pulse Input points 2 Control groups one for each building constituted of all indoor units of this building one for each building constituted of Internal Digital Input points of this building one for each building constituted of Internal Pulse points of this building one for each room constituted of all indoor units Internal Digital Input points and Internal Digital Output points of this room one for each tenant constituted of all indoor units Internal Digital Input points and Internal Digital Output points of this tenant Only system engineers can perform this procedure A system engineer is an operator whose profile includes authorization to access the System Setup screen To perform groups configuration Login in intelligent Manager under system engineer user Click the System menu button the System Setup screen appears Click the Management Group button the Management Groups Configuration screen appears Configure the management groups as explained below then click the Close button Click the Control Group button the Control Groups Configuration screen displays Configure the control groups then click the Close button Click the Management Points button the Management Po
306. rt automatically on reception of a power restore input signal Therefore in the case of a non intelligent UPS even if the power is restored within the 10 minutes period the monitoring PC will shutdown and has to be restarted manually Therefore the intelligent Manager completes the shutdown procedure and does NOT restart automatically e No UPS As the intelligent Manager system provides an automatic periodical backup function from the iPU to the PC it can be used without UPS However in the case of a power failure the data since the latest backup until the power restore are lost These data are e Equipment running time e Equipment switchover accumulation e Power proportional distribution for billing separate optional function Therefore the use of UPS is strongly recommended especially regarding collection of data for billing i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Shutdown Resume Procedure The different states of the intelligent Manager system are described in the diagram below Case 1 non intelligent UPS Shutdown Procedure Power Normal state UPS ON TEG Save iPU data Wait 10 min i in Stop intelligent Manager Shutdown PC Wait 3 min Power Turn UPS ON Restore Restore iPU state No interlocking control 10 min Restart PC amp intelligent Manager Turn UPS OFF Controlled by the iPU These parameters are
307. rt has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document However please do not hesitate to contact us in the case of any missing erroneous or unclear information 4 We take no liability for any loss etc resulting from customer misuse of our products failure to comply with the instructions contained in this manual repairs or modifications carried out by a third party other than Daikin etc Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 287 Notes Si72 301 288 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual Si72 301 Troubleshooting Part 7 Troubleshooting 1 Before NStAN AON sax vetacettare eevee tates oat echt aia ei renee eee 290 2 After MAST AOA cscs sieste shes scy etree svat a Daeg keller testes hata ania 295 2 1 iManager Can Not be Started ccccccccssseceeceseeeesseeeeeeeseeeeesseeeees 295 2 2 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware ccccccsseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 296 2 3 Can Not be Connected to iPU Software Setting ccceeeeeeeeeseeees 297 2 4 Can Not be Connected to iPU Hardware Malfunction 008 298 2 5 Some of the Air Conditioners Have Communication Error 299 2 6 CPU Alive LED is Turned off or Lighting Uf ccseccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 2 a ge ext 0 HE eee ene re tae ee ee ee eee eee 301 2 8 Ether RCV LED Does Not Light cccccseceecseeeeceeeeeeseeseesseneeeseees 302 2 9 RS485 1 TxD RxD RS485 2 TxD RxD LEDs are off 303 2 10 RS2
308. rver E NetBIOS Interface E Remote Access Service DEMNSYRA INF is reviewing bindings m mver Toucan un ig module from non 3lom NICs This module cannot be removed Removing the NIC will also remove this module Dial out Protocols l NetBEUI M TCPAP M IPX Cancel Network Configuration RAS Server NetBEUI Configuration m Dial out Protocols F Regal Allow remote NetBEUI clients to access M TCP IP C IPX This computer only Server Settings Allow remote clients running aoo Configure TCPvIP Configure Allow remote TCP IP clients to access Ea M IPX Eonfiaure E Entire network C This computer only Encryption settings C Allow any authentication including clear text C Require encypted authentication Requie Microsoft encrypted authentication Use DHCP to assign remote TCPAP client addresses Use static address pool Ix o I Require data encryption E Begin 132 168 0 101 End 192 168 0 104 Excluded ranges EET Io z 7 lt Remove IF Allow remote clients to request a predetermined IP address Add gt Configuring intelligent Manager Remote Network aix Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings Network Protocols NetB EU Protocol Y TCP IP Protocol Add Remove ae Update Description 4 nonroutable protocol designed for use in small LANs Close Pance Si72 301 Mi
309. s can be defined for the capacity to be lowered for a ratio of 40 or 70 within the daily interval during the calendar based seasons Eco Mode ixi Management Points Selection Xx Available Paints Selected Points Name Shortn kse System 001 s5001 Add Enable Disable Exec Condition Control Setup es Close 2 Rem Listed Points Al Indoor Urb amp Equipment OMer Cantral Group oren Execution Condition x Outdoor unit capacity control Eco Mode group Enabledi Number 70 restricition control Disabled 0 40 restricition control T Schedule 1 Period 4 IE MAR j ELE a1 HJE Timezone 10 00 nso ere Period 1 pfa 12 e ar Timezone 10 00 nso Enable Disable Register Mng Pt Prinvexport Cancel Print Export Cancel Operational Procedure e Execution conditions Setup the calendars 2 seasons available with daily activation period and check their box to Enable them then click the OK button Click on the Print Export button to print all calendars settings on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file e Control setup select each of the 2 available groups and Register management points of outdoor units which capacity will be lowered Enable the groups click on the Print Export button to print all groups settings on the sys
310. s effective from the next log in mea Login Setup User Information Name new Password Remarks Authority l Start Stop Setup l Setup Central Ctrl l Regist Schedule l Regist Users Reg IntLock Ctrl Inspection Mode Registered Users List For logout ust l Reg Ermey Intlock Regist Pwr Limit Ctrl l Emcy Stop Release Regist Save Energy Control Operate History l Setup System Screen access restriction All screens can be opened Regist Screen Delete The authority set up becomes effective from the next log in Once a new user has been registered the user name password remarks authority and screen restrictions may be set up i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Enter the user name and password Check the check boxes to indicate those items for which authority setup will be granted Login Setup Registered Users List User Information For logout usr Name Tenant 1 Password daikin Remarks Address Authority W Start Stop Setup Setup Central Ctrl W Regist Schedule Regist Users i Reg IntLock Ctrl T Inspection Mode l Reg Emey Intlock Regist Pwr Limit Ctrl l Emcy Stop Release Regist Save Energy Control W Operate History W Setup System Screen access restriction ne Delete All screens can be opened Regist Screen The authority set up becomes effective from the next log in cance If the user is to be grant
311. s in lines must be respected Internal Do Name Short Maker Equip Equip Installa i Port type Port No Address name name name model tion r 2 place S es ee ee ee a ee E a es ee ee es Internal Di Name Short Maker Equip Equip Installa i Port type Port No Address name name name model tion 1 place Power Power 1 1 Failure Failure A R a a a T a a a E EG e a a E a a Name Short Maker Equip Equip Installa i Port type Port No Address name name name model tion y 1 o E e e C S e aa d o i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 111 Workflow Overview Si72 301 S ee a ee ee ee ee ee gs et C PE a a Name Short Maker Equip Equip Installa iPU No Porttype Port No Address name name name model tion 4 place gt O Os e E i a E E n es Ee ee a a a ee a E a Se es Ce ee a E e E E a ee a a E a C EE S T C e a e KR Notes Name must be unique amongst all points Short Name can be dupplicated however not recommended Maker Name Equipment Name free Equipment Model serial No can be used instead Installation Place free IPU 1 4 Port Type 1 DiPi 2 Do 3 AiAo 4 D3 5 Lighting equipment 6 Outdoor unit O Other Port No 1 4 Address 0 63 insert lines if necessary 8 3 2 3 2 Management Groups Fill a data sheet for each group as shown bellow Management Group Child of Group Cell size Large Regular Small C
312. s procedure the power consumption in the space where the airconditioner is not used at all is counted constantly every month However as this airconditioning system is a multi system in case that one outdoor unit is shared to another tenant the count output can be seen in lower value rather than the crank case heater s power consumption registered because the crank case heater doesn t actuate when another tenant operates the airconditioner 49 Explanations of Power Proportional Distribution i72 301 10 2 Count Accuracy 10 2 1 Cause of error System example Watthour meter with output Power supply 3 phase d Power supply single phase I it maa ai OO i gt i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Toner ey Tenant A Tenant B Tenant C Legend C Read on wattmeter Indoor unit s address lt Case of arising error gt WD we Count conclusive total for indoor unit 1 8 gt gt Refer to the REASON WD Count conclusive total for indoor unit 1 5 we Count conclusive total for indoor unit 6 8 gt Refer to the next page WD W2 Count conclusive total for indoor unit 1 8 The reason to get and the error size E REASON iPU counts every one hour s power consumption Though fraction in case of computation occurs at this time it is computed after leaving off a 1 W figure to avoid the risk for the owners As a result the error by the leaving off occurs by 0 5W hour in average value
313. sable It must be supported by WindowsNT Require A4 size paper We recommend makers such as IBM Compag or Dell etc We recommend makers such as HP Canon etc In the case of an alternative maker correct operation should be checked before shipment Capacity 200 250W 20min Voltage as required on the field 4 Control Signals UPS Power failure signal from UPS UPS shutdown signal to UPS 5 AC power lines APC SU700 SU1000 Series Relay I O module AP9610 Multi port HUB 4 or more ports Network 10Base T cables category 5 Equip T A required distance and a number We recommend makers such as 3com etc The cable for networks is required Hub should be used even when one iPU is connected to PC Ba 33 6kbps communication speed and reception function are required We recommend makers such as 3com etc Required for remote monitoring However For Air Net use we recommend it to be included as a standard 9 1pulse 1kWh output is required 40 WHM iPU connection cable As specified in the D BACS system design guide e 1 pulse to 1kW or 10kW pulse width must be within 40 400m sec e Output relay must be mercury or electronic type only e No voltage output Required for power proportional division r 41 Dill network cables othe Design Guide As specified in the D BACS system design guide 33 System Architecture
314. sain nal Pil Indicator 0 a NoName Operation on the sub PC is identical as on the master PC except the functions of the System menu which are not available on the remote PC Therefore refer to the intelligent Manager Operation Manual for details of functions Note installation of the intelligent Manager Remote the installation of a modem on the PC in office and the setup of intelligent Manager on sites to support RAS Service must have been performed beforehand on the monitoring PCs and are not covered in the present manual Please refer to the intelligent Manager Engineering manual and the intelligent Manager Remote Options Engineering manual for installation on site and in the office Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 283 intelligent Manager Remote Si72 301 2 2 Starting and Stopping the intelligent Manager Remote The RAS connection must be established manually before starting the intelligent Manager Remote and stopped after 2 2 1 Starting the RAS connection ea r E Accessories Dial Up Networking Programs Documents New Phonebook Entry Wizard alg Dial Up Networking Dial Up Networking connects you to remote networks Settings using your modem ISDN or other WAN adapter This G The phonebook is empty wizard helps you create a phonebook entry that stores the settings needed to connect to a particular remote Find Press OK to add an entry network Name the ne
315. se points will be organized into management groups and control groups in the step 2 of the configuration They will be used by the operator to perform monitoring and control of the system Note If a configuration has already been performed it is possible to reuse it Refer to 8 Loading a Configuration below for detailed explanation It is then possible to modify the loaded configuration 5 1 Configuring the PC Data Start the VRV Setup tool and login Then click the PC Setting button to display the setting screen PI MEATF TRF RHETT Bes fan Aiea FILZ Trib iManage 001 brz ESEA Info of PO setting Files bre gt Fertil M RDRAM LEUTRCIR Loadirg data will delete exisling data r k Cancel gt Exi of PC setting tool FT c Note The password of the setup tool is provided on delivery and cannot be changed CAUTICN This toal is res2rved for use with servicing authority only Plezse do NOT use in any other case as operation safety could NOT be longer quaranted Passvwurd La Use this tool 3n 2C which performs software such as master PC Ver1 0 Revie Bssic information r The verificstion data Sector path DRY for power proporional divisio Master iPUIP adcress 192 168 0 1 Numer of zollecton a 3 A dally repan s saved as Pdy_og dat Tae demonstration mode is att
316. send requests to the intelligent Manager server 5 1 Configuring the Remote Access Facility This procedure is performed both in step 1 on the monitoring PC and in the Step 2 on the remote PC Therefore it is described only once with differences indicated when necessary Network Control Panel File Edit View Help Identification Services Protocols Adapters Bindings Network Services Accessibility Add Remove Console Data Sources Options Programs ODBC w Ag Find Fast Fonts Internet Options gt amp Mouse Multimedia o Regional SCSI Adapters Settings ss Telephony UPS 30 object s 4 Java Plug in Keyboard Modems Printers 3 System PC Card Parts PCMCIA g Services Sounds Network Server QuickTime 32 Tape Devices Remote Access Setup x Port Device Panasonic TO BXF SEK VS Cancel Network Type Modem urimoder Add Remove Configure Clone Configure Port Usage x Fort COMI Cancel Device Panasonic TO BXF5S6K 90_K56flex Port Usage Help Dial out only Receive calls only Dial out and Receive calls Pott COM1 f i Device Panasonic TO BXFOSK YS0_K56flex Cancel Port Usage Help Dial out only Receive calls only Dial out and Receive calls Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual E 3Com Diagnostic Communication Module E Computer Browser E Microsoft Peer Web Se
317. separate computer Q19 Is iManager compatible with a central controller A Yes Q20 Does the iManager master computer need to be dedicated computer A Yes Q21 What is the maximum distance for the cable between the iPU and the kWh meter A 200 meters Q22 Can we connect a second HUB to the iManager system for a longer connection A Yes but the power of HUB must be supplied by a UPS Q23 Do need to connect kWh meter to every outdoor unit A No although this will depend on the system design Q24 What is the accuracy of the Power Proportional Division A That will depend on the system configuration although you should be able to be close to 97 Q25 Can connect one kWh meter to the whole installation A Yes provided that all the groups are of identical size and configuration Design Guide 59 Questions amp Answers Si72 301 Q26 Is iManager display operation real time A Yes Q27 What is the maximum length of cable from the iPU and the modem A Serial connection a few meters It is recommended to use the serial cable provided with the Modem Q28 If the D Ill expander cared is used can this data still be monitored by AIR NET A No The Units under control on the D III expander card cannot be monitored by AIR NET as this same data line is used for AIR NET 60 Design Guide Si72 301 Part 2 Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 1 Introducing intelligent ManaQel cccccc
318. setting screen Enter the port No of the Pulse Input point used to measure the power consumption and the pulse weight weight of an pulse in kWh After inputting these data click the Check button to verify their validity and then the Save button to transfer them to the IPU 84 i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool Note You can also import an existing configuration of PPD parameters settings click the Load button and specify the path to a management points file extension dse Information Display Information check rem Tool selection Engineering tool Power Limit control Prediction parameter Setting tool Information check Ea ox EAES Puses H e ew a iPU1 dse DemandsE Param Fiest ase Caneel Ej i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 85 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application i72 301 6 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application This part of the configuration procedure makes use of the intelligent Manager main application Therefore detailed operation procedure for some of these configuration steps is explained intelligent Manager Operation Manual The detailed procedures explanations in the prese
319. son isiin e NE einer A eee 33 4 1 Requirement Spec and the Recommendation of Other Equipment 33 4 2 Confirmation of Watthour Meter cccccccccecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaaees 37 Sa ANING IMa GE ete re tar wa E ia ee haw Sedna wt ia deca aetna enccesemhaddies 38 5 1 System Connection ccccccccseccccesececcseeeecceseeesceeecssseeeseeseessaeeesssenees 38 See WAG DIAA Mr i ceeiatit r A usec ler tenn akasenne incense 40 5 3 Wiring Specifications cccccecccccsececcseeececeeeeesaseeesceseeesceseescoseeescaess 41 Os SOTO WD isoen nar odeeustaenteotad Saves 42 Gl Precautions TOF SCID xesecc2iti2cpsareetisonciactenastentawenlntinmeettaieeanaentedeauieas 42 6 2 Summary of AttachMent ccccccsssceccsseeeceeseeceeeseeceeseeeseeseesseseeessagees 42 T Desin PICCAULONS saseicrese eves ectonsceicrateceeacs sete cansended aie ase ecseukeoneteseaies 43 PN WRALEGalCUlAlOM eecenc es cotati tet stacenncetene R dor cate mete eees EN 43 7 2 Setting of Each Electric Power Group cccccsssseeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeesseaeeees 44 7 3 The Reason Why VRV Heat Recovery Must Not be Included 45 3 Connection Other than VRY susie eE NEEE 46 Bul SVSICI EXAMS Y sic cozaccsaceloncs eran tenet a a ae 46 82 TREQUIFEMENIS 225 cacteteteate cee etaaetom a 46 9 Conditions and Method to Exclude Calculation for SPSCIHIEM Indoor OMI sia idiaarreuciadrccevawsncteyeusiner bitearanesewententan s
320. ss Emergency stop manual release red shaded Signal OFF automatic release ers _ ____ Emergency stop Normal state Signal ON Emergency stop Waiting for release greyed out in progress Emergency stop wy white red Signal ON compulsory release To execute release select activated Emergency Stop program and click Release button Emergency Stop Release List Releas Program name Release Power Fire 45 Buzzer 5 6 Graphical Report 5 6 1 Introduction The purpose of the Graphical Report function is to visualize graphically the daily evolution of pulse value and equipment or indoor unit running time The graphical Report function makes also possible the graphical visualization of trend and daily value of analog management points In addition the function also makes possible printing of graphics and export of graphics data under the CSV format for further processing i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 197 Operation Details Si72 301 5 6 2 Starting the Graph function Click on the Data Mng button of the intelligent Manager software to display the Data Management screen In this screen s Option frame click on the Graph button to launch the Graphical Report function The Graphical Report function s main screen is as shown below if tt Graphical Report 5 6 3 Setting up Graphs When using the function for the first time it is necessary to setup Graphs e A
321. ss is used per unit The factory default is 1 00 However when using the settings below in 2 to use multi purpose sensors two addresses are used per unit For example if the address is set to 2 10 using the DS1 and DS2 settings 2 10 and 2 11 are thereby used and Cannot be set on other AC units If the setting is for using the multi purpose sensors do not set DS1 and DS2 to 4 15 The multi purpose sensor detection data cannot be properly monitored by I Manager Dipswitch settings for each address X 2 O 2 03 Ths ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF HSA eee S Cm Cm Cm Cm Cm CH CH Cm zx DI NET Address 1 K 2 EX B 0 ON OFF a oe when DS1 attached Cm D S2 The switch at the i A very end of DSI The m Symbol indicates switch knob position should always be set off 2 DS3 and DS4 sensor related settings DS3 should only have its Setting changed if locally procured sensors are being used When using locally procured sensors Set the third switch from the front on The factory default settings are for not using multi purpose sensors NB When using multi purpose sensors cut the jumper line G at the same time as the settings are being done There is no Need tO Change the factory default setting for DS4 ON OFF DS 3 ec It should always be OFF Cm It should always be OFF Ca When using multi purpose sensors it Shoul
322. t e If even any of the mechanical or electrical type conforms to the above a to d it can be used If the specifications are not coincident there is a possibility that the following imperfections are caused if the output pulse unit is not 1kWh pulse It results a large difference between the reading value of watthour meter and the total value of distribution of electric energy For the charge calculation the number of pulse input is counted and the power consumption of the outdoor unit is monitored therefore for example if the large value 10kWh pulse is inputted the electric energy calculated is the value of one tenth 1 10 times If the pulse width is not within 40 to 400 milli sec If it is less than 40 milli sec the pulse input cannot be detected and the result of calculation is smaller than the real value In addition if more than 400 milli sec more than 2 pulses is detected for 1 pulse input and the result of calculation is large than the real value If use of contact other than mercury relay If it is a general relay the pulse may not accurately be detected due to relay chattering Confirm the following items for the construction process Construction of pulse signal line is kept away from power cables For this pulse signal line the voltage DC24V should be applied from the intelligent Manager side It should be constructed separating from the power cables Max distance to be 200 m
323. t C Other EL isable reas a E Op Mode C Control Group Analog z W Oter Multiple C Timer Extension On C Timer Extension Off OK Cancel From the available management point or control group click on the management point or control group to undergo schedule control In the above figure this is Tenant Air conditioner 1 Click the Add gt gt button to display the action Click on the added management point or control group Select the action to be set up and set up the execution time using the buttons Repeat this operation to set up the schedule for Monday When the schedule is completed click the OK button Click the Cancel button to cancel the setup The schedule content is shown above The schedule for Monday has been set up Repeat the same operation to set up other days To set up the same schedule on other days of the week click on the day to be copied followed by a click on the Copy button A dialog box will appear Click on the day to be copied to i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 221 Operation Details For example click the Tuesday button Day to copy Mon Copy to Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Holiday Special Cancel Tuesday has been set up with the same schedule as Monday Si72 301 Repeat the same operation to copy the schedule to other days of the week Schedule Settings Yearly schedule Setup 200
324. t Ctrl Gr Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back Help Guide 2001 9 27 Thu 14 59 Service Main Open list Start stop Nam E Detailed infa Shon Name Si Set Start Stop Label Group Meter J Modify F Modify Start Stan Currect Value Stop Stop New Value 0 AJC Setup Label 1oC Set Point Interval T Modify I Modify Other p VWwatt Hour Meter 1 VWatt Hour Meter 2 WHM 2 Attribute Ctrl Group Cancel Management Point Attribute Edition Detailed info Setup Report Icon Point Information Mew Screen Button Remove Attribute Component Arrangement ELE Repar Management Point Attribute Setup Screen Jump New Free Layout Screen VR Free Layout Screen Setup Remove Free Layout Screen Restore Fire wa eel Is rk Solution Edit Mode On Edit Mode Off Ternperatu Suc Temp V Enabled Set point Temp Sucction Temperature Additional Information M Modify T Modify M Hide VemperaIN temp p Show Temperature Set point Setup when stop Show Pi value F modify DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD System setup Basic Screen Setup Sound Files Setup BMS Client Setup Save hitial Data Save hitial Data for Demo F Show Cancel 6 4 2 BMS Client Setup This
325. t Group combines management items to make a group for easy management Controls for all of the equipment in a group are performed in control groups Allows division of facilities targeted for monitoring into any group for the monitor screens Allows constructing multi hierarchic configurations to any depth in the order of Management Group List gt Management Group List gt gt Management Item List Management Group List Screen SEIH Motiiauaty Px I i Ka 0 te i N Select the group and press Open List to shift to lower level management Management Item List Screen Color of Icon Lets You Know the Status The color of the icon lets you know the status of the management item Red Running Green Stopped Green Flashing Emergency Stopped Yellow Flashing Error Blue Communications error Gray Under maintenance Also the filter sign cooling selection authorized targeted for automatic control link and schedule target marks are also displayed Design Guide 11 Functions Si72 301 4 Control Group List Display The Control Group binds the management items for batch control Select the control group and press the Run All or Stop All button to control the starting and stopping in control group units A maximum of 100 management items can be registered in one group and a maximum of 100 groups can be registered Also operations for switching the operating
326. t Points ccccsccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 76 5 4 Configuring Energy SAVving cccccssscccssecceceeeeeceeeeeesseeeesseeeesseeeeessanees 84 6 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application c cccccseceeseseeeeeeeeeeees 86 6 1 Login in intelligent Manager ccccccseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeteeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeneenes 86 6 2 Configuring the intelligent Manager Organization cccseecesseeeeeeees 87 6 3 CONTIQUFING ING USES ixcnec hse ee eieree recedes eke et ied eee eee eieciees 90 6 4 Customizing the Graphic User Interface cc ccccccecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 90 6 5 Configuring the Visual Navigation cccccccsssececsseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaaees 94 6 6 Saving the Configuration cccccccssseccseeeccceeeeecceneecceeeeesaueesseseeessaeees 99 6 7 Checking the Configuration cccccccccsseeeccseeeeceseecceeeecsseesseneeessagees 99 7 Saving and Loading a Configuration ccccseeecceeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeseees 104 Tal SANMING dudes shin cuchclatechosncaeaantedimmnnc cet alee a EEEO 104 Zs MQ ACI re ctenterd ccleaner tan cba mete E a een use 104 Bic WOKO QVEIVICW srera te cltelatd le das Seem sens ueaeddannutatensieduenmedees 105 Gel WMVOCUCIION sceccti ai actee ities cee alae a een akth etal ads 105 8 2 Main Proced re Sle DS ccteetiverccdesacnnetictetcctaancdteee a NN 105 Go TEmMplale S fice
327. t hand side click the scroll bar if necessary and clicking the Remove lt lt button If the setup is satisfactory click the OK button The interlocking program setup is cancelled by clicking the Cancel button i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 229 Operation Details i72 301 230 The previous interlocking program setup screen see below will be restored Output is then registered Click the Modify button in the Output1 frame Interlock 3 Available Mng Point Ctrl Group Action Detection conditi P Mng Point G Ctrl Group T Name Short n Operation _ P D3Dio 1 D3Dio 1 Start z evell Est1 UEI Start St D3Dio 1 Switching state Level2 Est1 Level2 Est2 EEA Level2 Est3 L2E3 Level2 Nor1 m Output 2 VOT Oete Level2 Noar3 Level2 VVst1 Level2 W st2 Level2 VV st3 eE _ _ _ _ ees y aahi Ty Name Shorna Instructions _ Ty Name Shortna Instructions _ Listed Points All C Equipment C Stop C RC Enable RC Disable C Fan C Cool C Heat Setpoint i c JB Analag C Indoor Unit C Other C Control Group Start Time Interval sec 0 10 200 30 C Custom 0 El Start Time Interval sec 60 C10 C 20 30 Custom 0 aE OK Cancel C Timer Extension On Timer Extension Off OK C
328. t one look Users are able to ascertain any abnormalities or malfunctions pertaining to the operation status or setting of a multiple number of air conditioners via list displays This enables the user to manage the system in an appropriate and expedient manner Current Screen All Mng Pt E Online Help No need for manuals Through the intelligent Manager ECO21 system you ll receive attentive support for all your needs er File Menu Operation Help a ae Be _ Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr ca Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Jump Back 2001 4 11 ee 18 02 Guide Mng point list Mne point list Nest Wirun Stop Error ICom Error B Maintain 1 2 gt new D3Do1 Internal Dil Man jokk NoName NoName NoName D3Do2 Internal Dol RK ooo NoName NoName NoName D3Do3 Internal Do2 Report jokk k NoName NoName NoName A08 D3Do4 Internal Pil jokk aS ad Indicator 0 al NoName NoName NoName jokk gt a B CE gt a lo Aje all Indoor Unit indoor Statistics Di Do Dio Pri Undoor Unit 33 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 34 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 35 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 4 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 40 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 41 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 43 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 44 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undoor Unit 46 Start Cooling 28 0 C Undo
329. t perform configuration as illustrated bellow recommended model UPS made by APC with the PowerChute control software The values of steps A to D are compulsory PowerChute plus Stopped UPS On Batlery Utility Power Restored Low Battery Condition UPS Batlery le Diecharged Return From Low Battery Communication Established Losi Communication With UPS Comm Lost While On Battery Administrative Shutdown System Shutdown Starting System Shuidown Complete Shutdown Cancelled UPS Output Overload Overoad Condition Solved UPS Enabling SmartBoust UPS Enabling SmartTrim Adona for Selected Event B F Log Event I Notify Administrators Op line F Nolby Users Options F Run Command File Options F Send E Mail Options System Shutdown Starting T Page Users Options Command File P Shotbown Server Optom d iman binjhips shutdawen exce Reset To Default Actions Wait 0 Seconds Before Executing Tesi Cancel E Sytem Logging Conmigo sion Disonosics Hebb APC SMART JP 1000 130 120 170 110 110 ibe 100 I s0 a0 Bo 102 7 WAG AADO 18 54 70 Cor nunicaton established 1400 195704 User initiated UPS self test passed Applicaton Shutdown Parameters Iw lable Application Shutdown Shutdown Delay 180 seconds e 1 Intelligent Manager system configuration Utility Voltage OutpulVollage Battery Capacity 130 100 PowerChute plus Started F E
330. t the Tenant from the drop down list 4 Export the data in csv format then making use of a worksheet editor manipulate the re trieved data at will select copy paste save in an other worksheet etc After retrieving the data of each tenant for the period click the Exit button to close the application 5 7 3 Setup of Power Proportional Distribution If this optional function is present in your configuration the power used by the outdoor units can be divided between the indoor units and equipment as initially configured in the engineering procedure By using this dialogue it is possible to determine when this proportional division should be performed or not e Exclusion time zones time zones in which power division is not calculated proportionally may be set up on any day of the week e Regardless of exclusion time zone setup special days may be set up on the calendar in this case the whole day is calculated regardless of normal setup Click the Power Proportional Division Setup button i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 213 Operation Details 214 The screen will appear as shown below Electric Power Proportional Division Si72 301 special Fee Days Normal Pattern 2001 year Oct E Special Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 10 45 6 6 11 12 4 15 18 19 1 e a a5 rfe s 0a i Exclusion Period Normal Pattern Print Export Exclusion Time Zones usual format
331. t the monitoring PC and the iPU to the hub with Ethernet cables Do not use the Uplink connector of the hub if there is no hub use a crossed type Ethernet cable to connect the monitoring installation PC to the iPU 2 Check that the iPU power is OFF then put to connectors to close each of the jumpers JP5 and JP6 Please refer to iPU hardware document for jumpers location This will clear the flash memory of the iPU 3 Switch the iPU power ON and Start Hyperterminal on the installation PC to connect it to the iPU select the COM1 option 4 Push the lt Enter gt key twice to display the self test procedure of the iPU Type 9 on the installation PC to stop it PC iPU Connections from step 1 to step 4 are made by RS232 1 HyperTerminal 3 1311 1 3 1 11 J111 Ver 2 0 sated st 19Aug98 Copyright DAIKIN Industries CO LTD 2 eXq Marching Address complememt 4 Bthernet yv KERNEL WIND version 2 4 Copyright Wind River Systems Inc 1984 1995 CPU DATRIN AirConditioning Facilities Interface Memory Size 0x1000000 BSP version 1 1 0 VOD 9600 aT i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 125 Workflow Overview Note Caution Note 126 Si72 301 5 Click the PC start button point to Programs Command Prompt Go to the location of the OS soft on the source CD ROM or else a floppy disk or folder on the installation PC and perform the following steps to send the
332. tallation Si72 301 2 6 CPU Alive LED is Turned off or Lighting up Trouble contents CPU Alive LED is turned off or lighting up It will be blinking in normal condition Supposed Causes m Power is not supplied m Program is not installed correctly Troubleshooting A Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred Is power supplied Turn on the power supply Is the program installed correctly Install the program again Contact with your nearest office of supplier 300 Troubleshooting Si72 301 After Installation 2 7 Ether Link LED is off Trouble contents Supposed Causes Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Ether link LED is off It will light in normal condition m Power supply for HUB is turned off Communication cable between iPU and HUB is disconnected m Specification of the communication cable between iPU and HUB is incorrect AN Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector Caution or parts damage may be occurred AC adapter of HUB is dismounted YES Supply power to HUB Network cable between iP and HUB is disconnected Connect iPU and HUB with a network A cross cable is used for the network cable between iPU and HUB YES Change the cable into a straight one Malfunction of iPU or HUB is suspected HUB may be fault if the LED can light w
333. tarting shutdown timer 6 4 Check that intelligent Manager shuts down 6 5 Check that Windows NT shuts down 6 6 Check that the PC switches OFF if available in the BIOS of the PC Test UPS shutdown 7 1 Wait for 3 minutes more 7 2 Check that the iPU internal Do switches ON 7 3 Check that the UPS shuts down Test power resume 8 1 Plug the UPS back 8 2 Check that the UPS starts again 8 3 Depending on the settings done in 4 3 2 Automatic Start in Windows 2000 Check that Windows NT and intelligent Manager restart automatically e 9 End of test procedure i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Workflow Overview Important In this case 1 the PC will restart only if the UPS is able to perform accordingly when the power has resumed by hardware terminals Please check these characteristics in the UPS documentation ca imamaioo wng Puio 10 ice gaea 6 UPS OFF a m Mr i n eara mme memara weess ooet mel OOOO Settings of internal Do for instructing non intelligent UPS to shut down Depending on the UPS functions terminals of other signals low battery overload etc could be connected to internal Di management points of the iPU to inform about the state of the UPS In this case management points should be created accordingly i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 131 Workflow Overview Si72 301 Case 2 intelligent UPS software controlled e Firs
334. te Controller ON OFF controller Schedule timer B intelligent Manager and C BACnet gateway A Difference among Centralized Controllers Central Remote intelligent Manager BACnet Gateway Controller ON OFF controller Schedule timer Star Stop Yes Yes es Operation Mode Yes Yes es Commana Set Point Yes feos es State Rem Ctir Authority a e o pe ooo Monitoring Room Temp suction No feos em fee Ta Nb otMatGrous a a emoa 256perGateway O l O Connect to A C Management Center _ to A C o S rma oe Yes Yes Nooo management of So amp Idem Purpose Characteristics one DIII NET line monitoring board for Support for RS232C up to 4 Dill net line amp BACnet Q13 Can iManager be connected to the BACnet A No BACnet is limited to the object list with is not enough for the mass data for the full control of VRV therefore iManager was developed Q14 Does iManager software have an expiry date A No Q15 Can the history file be saved as a file A Yes but the data can only be viewed by iManager Q16 Can iManager be connected iController A Yes it is techically possible However due to cost issues this is not feasible Q17 What is the maximum distance for the cable between the HUB and the iPU A 150 meters Q18 Can the iPU be directly connected to the PC A Yes with the use of a crossover connector however we strongly recommend the use of a HUB for in the case of testing with a
335. te new auxiliary Information os 2 3 Create new button Seca to 2 4 Delete for the 3 above mentioned components Be 2 5 Modify parameters idem Fenton 2 6 Adjust Arrangement idem New Screen Button Remove Attribute Component Arrange ment 1 Create new screen Management Point Attribute Setup Screen Jump Visual Navigation screen and Title Screen only New Free Layout Screen Free Layout Screen Setup Remove Free Layout Screen Edit Mode On east e 3 Edit Mode ON OFF Visual Navigation Screen System setup Basic Screen Setup Sound Files Setup BMS Client Setup 1 1 1 3 Delete a Visual Navigation screen Save Initial Data Save hitial Data for Demo 6 5 2 1 Creating a Visual Navigation screen Select the entry 1 1 in the pull down menu and enter the name of the screen Screen Name Setup Dialogue Name Setup Enter screen name 6 5 2 2 Modifying the attributes of a Visual Navigation screen Select the entry 1 2 in the pull down menu and select a screen Please refer to section 6 4 5 Associating a background picture for operation details Screen Information Screen Information Dialogue Screen Name WMF type WMF type background Selection Selection Open S r Screen Name zee lt mE Sal 2nd Floor Ma l Slect file Screen Background File C NojBackground fe rpi Type BaF WF m po Files of type WmntFies wmf Cancel wien E OLE
336. ted l Set ee UE J Temporarily Not Monitored Controled Prohibited Cancel Check box to enable the Timer Extension Functions Action P 00 00 NoName peration Start Execution Time Hours o Minutes lo Action Start C Stop C Fan C Timer ExtensionOn Timer Extension Off C RC Enable RC Disable C Cool C Heat C Setpoint i oc OK Cancel Action to enable the Timer Extension This function is beneficial for example in the event of forgetting to switch off the building A C when leaving in the evening This has the potential to save energy E Printout displays of main functions printer amp csv file eFor all main function ePrinter eFile csv Table View Indoor Unit indoor Statistics Di Do Dio ri Mng pointname status Mode Temp _ Set Point Filter Sign 2 Q Undoor Unit 33 Start Cooling 28 0 C te Undoor Unit 34 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 35 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C Q Undoor Unit 4 Start Cooling 28 00 2C 8 Undoor Unit 40 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C Q Undoor Unit 41 Start Cooling 280 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 43 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 44 Start Cooling 28 00 327 C 6 Undoor Unit 45 Start Cooling 280 C 27 C 6 Undoor Unit 46 Start Cooling 28 0 C 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 47 Stop Cooling RRS 27 C 0 Undoor Unit 48 Stop Cooling
337. ted PrintiExport F 2 Name Short et eer 3 ER D3Dio 1 rinvExport 0 Level1 Est2 L1E2 Fire Signal Fire f Export 0 Level1 Est3 EVES Level2 Est1 EE oP Level1 Est4 L1E4 Level2 Est2 L2E Digital Inputs Os Level1 VVst1 L11 Level2 Est3 2E3 Cancel Digital Outputs D Level1 Vst2 L12 Level2 Nor1 L2N1 Digital Input Output OF Level1 Vst3 LIW3 Add Level2 Nor2 L2N2 Level1 Vst4 LIA Level2 Nor3 L2N3 Ze Level2 VWst1 L2VV1 Level2 Wst2 L2WW2 Level2 VWst3 L2WY3 Level3 Est1 L3E1 Level3 Est2 L3E2 Level3 Est3 HE3 gt gt Level3 Shar1 L351 Level3 Shar2 Screen Group Registration Rem Level3 Shar3 Se xl Level3 Shar4 Level3 Wett Law p Screen group name L3yvy 2 L3V 3 L4E1 ael4 Est2 L4E2 x lje Down Dp Down Display Mode Arrangement n ize Cell Arrangement m Control Group Edit All C Unregistered Cell Size g Large Z Automatic Setti List Attributes Create Group Delete Group Print Export Type utomatic setting GAL C Indoorunit Regular o F C Small 4 Fel Line 4 le Column Set Attributes Time Interval Select Ic Equip C Other Default attributes of new groups can be preset as shown above Click on the Create Group button to display the group screen registration dialog box i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Screen Group Registration Pyoupt SS Ej Enter the group name and click the OK button A warning box will appear at the t
338. ted in the Protocols tabulation e Check the TCP IP box this protocol is needed for intelligent Manager e Click the Ok button the Network Configuration dialogue disappears Else configure the dial out options as explained below e NetBUI e Check the NetBUI box only if this protocol is installed on the PC listed in the Protocols tabulation e click the Configure button the NetBUI Server TCP IP Configuration dialogue of the protocol displays e Select the Entire Network access option e TCP IP e Check the TCP IP box this protocol is needed for intelligent Manager 156 Watchdog amp Remote Engineering Manual i72 301 Configuring intelligent Manager Remote e click the Configure button the RAS Server TCP IP Configuration dialogue of the protocol displays e Select the Entire Network access option e Select the Use Static Address Pool option e Enter in the Begin and End IP addresses the lowest and highest addresses of the remote PCs e Add remove Excluded Ranges in order to allow access only to the relevant PCs for each excluded range e Enter in the From and To IP addresses the lowest and highest addresses of the range to be excluded then click the Add button or e Select an range from the list then click the Remove button e Select the Encryption Settings option default should be Allow any authentication including clear text e Click the Ok button the dialogue disapears e Click the Continue button
339. telligent Display detailed information Setup air con equipment Display cumulated data Manager VRV System Network Solution Menu buttons Fire state release Power failure state DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD CMC Pune Buzzer state stop Ea History display Display detailed history History real time display This consists of menu buttons action buttons the message window and the working area Menu buttons buttons used to call up various functions They are operational at all times and in any screen menu Action buttons buttons used to govern operations such as start and stop Message window the window in which history abnormalities are displayed in real time Working area the area in which the functions called up by the menu buttons are displayed The pull down menu may be used to execute the functions of menu buttons and action buttons Action Buttons An action button is enabled only when it can be operated according to a selected management point control group or management group When it is not operational it is displayed in light gray thereby indicating the operation s disabled state gray out An action button can be clicked but not operated without operation authority a warning will appear When an action button is clicked and an operation applied to an air conditioner or equipment start stop setup a confirmation dialog appears to prevent incorrect operation this dialogue display can
340. tem printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file click the OK button e Enable the selected control classification e Click the Close button 5 12 Visual Navigation This function allows visual navigation through the site equipment 5 12 1 Fundamentals The system components management points or control groups are displayed and dynamically refreshed on a background image plan or elevation view They appear as e Attributes same information as cells of a management point operation state room tempera ture etc e Icons same icon as in cell of a management point or control group in this case the same color states and actions as corresponding cell are supported start stop detailed information setup etc e Buttons navigation links to other Visual Navigation screen i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 267 Operation Details Si72 301 l intelligent Manager Main Screen SHEMEN siali WETANEO ITGy Set ry F ERON Button Information Icon intelligent Manager 1st Floor Screen sorasta sarena reserar seses PF GMP TF i 8 asserere pespereeserene SHEMET DetaNeaimo aT sep T 268 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 12 2 State Monitoring This is performed by the icons and attributes Attributes can be of a management point only see 5 2 1 State Monitoring List p 178 and 5 2 5 Table view Fun
341. tentmtusaths 62 1 2 The Composition of the intelligent Manager System ccccccseeees 62 1 3 The Engineering Procedure cccccccecccecceeeseeecsecsecuseceeeceeecseeseeesass 63 2 FACQUIFCMENIS serotonien pre nea Rre Eei 64 2 1 General REQUIFEMENTS Seese a 64 2 2 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Main Application 64 2 3 Specific Requirements for the intelligent Manager Demo 006 64 3a VINO acera ah iuee deste uicienateedes 65 3 1 Wiring the IPU COnne tions cccccccsecceseececeececeeeeesaesesseeeesaeeeseeeetaes 65 3 2 Wiring the Ethernet Network cccccccesccecceeceeeceeeceeeceeceeecseeseeenaes 65 SO Wingate WPS seen E R 66 4 Installing the intelligent Manager system cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeees 67 4 1 Contents of the CD ROM ccccccscccceseeeeceeeecceeeeesceeseesseeeessseessaaees 67 42 Installing hess OTWal Cesc ee ad nteenedeteaeaendtacet oes 67 4 3 Setting up the PC Operating System cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeees 68 4 4 Setting up the iPU Operating SySteM cccccccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeees 71 5 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step I the VRV Setup Tool sirsa a a 73 51 Conligunngihne PC Data cscscietoaee cere c a then beaten iaecneetoe 73 5 2 COMMGUFING Wie iPU Data sco x onriss speed it dase se Paas eur aie tea tach aaiecahavearvonnieests 75 5 3 Configuring the Managemen
342. the Modify Graph button fi Modify Graph x N O Modify Graph 5 Bae Available Management Points Add r Graph Content Mng Point Name Mng Point Name Unit Grahame O O 10F Office 2 h gt gt 10F Office 1 h DOO Ee 10F Office 3 h Outdoor Deg Graph Operation 2 10F Office 4 h 10F Office 5 h lt lt 10F Office 6 h 10F Office 7 h Rem OF Office 42222 h OF Office 6 h OF Office 7 h in 1 hi Graph Name NoNamett h Graphi NoName 3 h Office h xz Displayed Types i ARENA All Indoor Unit Operation test Equipment Other OK Cancel Perform as explained in 5 6 3 1 Creating a new Graph p 200 to modify the selected graph parameters After modifying parameters click the OK button to save the graph new parameters or click the Cancel button to leave the parameters unchanged 5 6 3 3 Deleting a graph To delete a graph first select it in the list and then click the Delete Graph button A confirmation dialog displays as shown below Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel it x New Graph Modify Graph Delete Graph D Graph Name Comment Cd Ps 2 Graphi Operation test 1 Graph2 Delete graph EA Do you really want to delete the graph Graph 2 OK Cancel es No 5 6 3 4 Exiting Graph Setup tool Click on the OK button to save the modifications of the Graphs by updating the Graphs setting file Click the Cancel button if you which to
343. the Power Step 1 kW small demand 10 medium demand or 100 kW large demand e Enter the limits of the Summer Period from beginning of first to end of last month e Enter for each necessary time interval Power Values for summer and other seasons daily Time Zone click on the Print Export button to print all power limit data on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file Click the OK button 5 11 1 2 Setting the control parameters This procedure set up the control groups priorities and actions set temperature of indoor units according to power demand raise in cooling mode lower in heating mode 8 control groups are composed of indoor units are available and 8 levels of action are already configured in intelligent Manager 262 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details e Level 1 2 shift set temperature by 2 degrees e Level 3 4 shift set temperature by 4 degrees e Level 5 6 shift set temperature by 6 degrees e Level 7 8 stop the indoor units Thermostat Off Levels correspond to the power consumption trend compared with the target power consumption When the trend is aiming above the target the level is incremented and action of this level is taken for each group Operational procedure Click the Validate button to activate deactivate the control e Initially click the Setup button and perform settings of groups as explained below control must be
344. the knocked ut hole here are large and small hole bushings so choose one that is the right size AS Shown in the figure above pull the power wiring through the right hole and the other wiring through the left hole e AHo0o0T roo xX 2 3 How to connect the multi purpose sensors and settings a ca ther brand multi purpos to connector X2A e sensors to the device ther than the supplied Outdoor temperature sensor it is also possible to connect This Section describes the wiring when connecting the multi purpose sensors If you are not using the multi purpose sensors do not perform the wiring connection Use sensors with an output of DC 0 5V Wire as shown in the diagram DIE Ai The sensors and extensi An extension harness is Pressure tools are needed when extending the harness When connecting multi pu the jumper line in the pr t and change the dipswitch settings See 2 and G in 2 5 for settings To DI Ai X2A on Wiring Should be procu required as the included rpose sensors it will be inted board assembly in red locally DAM101A51 harness is Only 10cm long necessary to cut the device Multi purpose sensor DCO 5V To multi purpose sensor Attach the Side of the sensor to the black line and the white line crimp s tyle terminal to the G side of the sensor 7 Crimp s
345. the power frequency must be selected before setting up the units either automatically or manually a dialogue box displays for this purpose Please refer to the actual site conditions to select the relevant value Caution The power frequency cannot be changed after selection In case of wrong selection exit completely from the engineering tool and restart 1 3 3 4 1 Setting up Automatically e Click the Automatic Setup button the engineering tool browses the data base and displays the result of the search in the Detection Result dialogue box e Click the Begin Setup the tool affects the data base coefficients to the detected units 140 Power Proportional Distribution Commissioning Manual i72 301 Configuring the Power Proportional Distribution Note As the coefficients can not be overwritten click beforehand the Clear button to reset them if necessary 1 3 3 4 2 Setting up Manually If some units models were not detected they can be set up individually e Select the unit from the list e Click the Modify Setup button the Manual Setup dialogue displays e Enter the coefficients of the unit e If coefficients of an existing model are to be reused e Click the Browse Database button the All Products List dialogue displays e Select a model e Click the Ok button the product list closes and the coefficients are displayed in their fields e Click the Setup Coefficients button the unit name is automatically replaced by the Manual Input l
346. then the ftp connection does not work If this happens reload the iPU OS follow the procedure from step 1 The default IP address of the iPU is 192 168 0 1 and will be modified when configuring the iPU i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Note Workflow Overview e 7 C type gt flashll and check the transmission time and the size of the os file it should be the same value as on the installation PC Telnet 192 168 0 1 Connect Edit Terminal Help UxWorks login d bips Password gt flashll 1809992 errr eee APR 10 2000 10 24 18 os 17299 HAY 16 2000 12 12 31 all bid 17238 MAY 18 26608 18 21 68 init bid 28767 MAY 18 26606 18 68 38 ManagerData bpd 728128 MAY 19 20800 66 66 48 program sch 89416 MAY 23 2000 11 55 16 pdv_urf dat 9584 MAY 89 26606 18 68 52 ErrHist dat 124 MAY 69 26008 18 69 66 bipsContext dat 2568 MAY 18 26600 18 24 18 program eng 1648 68 MAY 18 2000 16 32 52 program ilk 481288 MAY 22 26008 23 55 26 pdu_hst dat 25120 HAY 15 2000 15 11 43 pdu_prop dat value B 6x8 gt e 7 D Close the connection Click Connect Disconnect and exit Telnet End of the procedure Repeat the above procedure for each iPU i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 127 Workflow Overview Si72 301 Appendix C Power Failure Management Fundamentals The intelligent Manager is designed for continuous operation Therefore automatic shutdown is carrie
347. this document may be changed in the future without prior notice 3 Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document However please do not hesitate to contact us in the case of any missing erroneous or unclear information 4 No liability can be assumed for any loss etc resulting from customer misuse of our products failure to comply with the instructions contained in this manual repairs or modifications carried out by a third party other than Daikin etc i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 273 Troubleshooting i72 301 274 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Part 6 Watchdog amp Remote Operation Manual 1 Intelligent Manager Watchdog ccccccceeccsseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeenseeseeenaes 276 1 1 Introducing Intelligent Manager Watchdog c ccccseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 6 1 2 Starting and Stopping the Watchdog cccccccsseeeceseeeeceeeeeeaeeeessees 277 t3 Ferusing Records adieursate dunce aitemata tet eacecatacan thiamin amine ies Unee ieee 279 t4 Troubleshooting satiinah ives iccutatesntnet E aaa 282 2 Intelligent Manager Remote ccccccscessecseeeseeeeeeeeeseenseenseeseeeeaes 283 2 1 Introducing intelligent Manager ReEmote ccccseccseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeneeens 283 2 2 Starting and Stopping the intelligent Manager Remote 0008 284 2 3 WVOUDICSMOOMMOwisoczicsiiianieaccddinorsddettbtaliaieiatd N 286 a NO S esaress iat auciscueaains a a di
348. tial Data Creatio Hng Point Attributes m T Roneme tenigfire leet 81 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 1 the VRV Setup Tool 5 3 6 Configuring the Internal Pulse Input points Click and input the tabs e Common see above note that Pi are created with the default option Hiden from Database uncheck it to have it visible in Tenant Report function e Monitoring see above e Pulse Pluse Value adjust from the meter Unit String kWh etc Pulse Constant and Rate according to meter specifications Value Value x Constant Rate 1 1 or 1 10 is recommended Backup Interval fixed to 1 minute Pluse Width to meter specifications duration of the signal for one pulse 5 3 7 Configuring the Analogue Input points Ai 82 Click and input the tabs e Common see above e Monitoring see above e Analogue Installation Place location of the sensor Unit String C etc Bus Type see documentation of sensor device Upper Lower Limit Monitoring e Value overflow is reported in history or not e Value in reaction zone Save e Save in iPU only e Save in rotation database newest value overwrites oldest else data are saved in AC database Si72 301 Hng Point Attributes BIPSNb ff Ponne fo Pnt Type IntemalPi Mng PtID 1 Name NoName Shor Name NoName Icon cji 24 Ret 7 Common Monitor Pulse Pulse value 0 Unit stri
349. tion is saved in the Demo ini file 6 7 Checking the Configuration This procedure checks that all the management points and control programs defined in the configuration operate correctly Caution Before performing any action on any equipment secure authorization from the person in charge Important Two people are necessary for this procedure e the PC operator implicitly referenced below performs the operation on the intelligent Manager interface e equipment inspector referenced below as the E I he will check on the site if the operation performed on the intelligent Manager interface has actually been reflected in the targeted equipment They need a way to communicate telephone etc Note If trouble occurs during initialization refer to the Appendix D Trouble Shooting intelligent Manager initialization Login in intelligent Manager under system engineer user For each operation to be checked e Perform the operation then notify E I e Wait for report from the E l e Fill in the checkup form i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual 99 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application i72 301 6 7 1 Checking the management points Important This procedure checks each management point The actual checking criteria depending on the type of the points is explained below 1 Click the Management Groups menu button 2 For each management group e Click the icon of the management gro
350. to print the detailed information on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file Click on the Auto Ctrl Info button to display the dialogue with information of this management point related with automatic control programs schedules interlocking Click on the Print EXport button of this dialogue to print the automatic control information on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file To close the dialog box click on the Close button 5 2 4 Setting up equipment 184 Various setups can be performed only on management points for which there is a Start Stop Setup authority Refer to 5 10 3 Configuring user Login p 245 First select the management point whose setup you wish to modify The Level3 Shared1 in the figure below Click on the Setup button to display the setup dialog box The items that may be set up will vary according to the management points i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 2 4 1 In the case of Daikin Air conditioner DIII Air conditioner intelligent Manager a alas coe An air conditioner setup dialog box is displayed i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 185 Operation Details i72 301 Aur Conditionner Setup EJ Levell Est1 LIE Remote control Present Status operation checkbox Status Stop Filter Sign Operation Mode ooling 27 C suc emp B RC restrictress Start
351. up the border color becomes purple e Click the Open List button of the action menu e For each management point of this Management group Perform the checkup of this point type as explained below Perform recursively the checkup of the sub groups of this management group from step 2 For this procedure all management points should be first stopped their icon color is green If their color is gray yellow or blue then please refer to the Appendix D Trouble Shooting intelligent Manager initialization 6 7 1 1 Checking an Indoor Unit point Note e Click the icon of the indoor unit the border color turns purple e Click the Start button of the action menu then check that the color turns red after a few seconds e Wait for confirmation from the E I that the indoor unit has started e Click the Stop button of the action menu then check that the color turns green after a few seconds e Wait for confirmation from the E I that the indoor unit has stopped Depending on the requirements of the project other actions and parameters can be checked setpoint operation mode etc 6 7 1 2 Checking a Digital Input point e E I turns On equipment connected to the digital input point or else performs similar operation e Check that the color turns red after a few seconds then notify E l e E I turns Off equipment connected to the digital input point or else performs similar operation e Check that the color turns green after a few seconds
352. up x Tenant Setup Ei The setup file has been uploaded Cx Do you want to quit without saving setting jes Ho 5 7 2 5 Creating a report This module extracts from the intelligent Manager database the operational data for the management points of the tenant making use of the previously set up configuration i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 211 Operation Details S i72 301 Click the Report button to launch under Tenant Report module Tenant Report x Tenant yyy 4 mm dd E sit E Period From 2000 is gi C Retieve D en To 2001 fio gi Switching Nb PPower kwh Tenant Report x Tenant Period Export Data ae S pyy t mm A dd Exit ie Period From 2000 J di Retrieve C Day Ta 200 ho gi Indoors units PPD Ed ipments Meters Switching Nb Power kWh Se Levell Estl a065 266 Levell Este 8075 334 Levell Est3 7010 967 Levell Est4 8168 31 Save As x Save irr E bin ci l a Kishu Save as Ippe csv Files cev Cancel T Open as read only 212 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details For each tenant and each period perform as follows 1 Select a report type from the option and enter the appropriate period e Daily the date of the data to be retrieved e Period the date of the first and last day of the data to be retrieved and cumulated 2 Click the Retrieve button then the list of tenants displays 3 Selec
353. user Login p 245 Furthermore Start and Stop of individual management point are possible in a lower layer screen As the operation method is identical to that of management point lists please refer to 5 3 Displaying Control Groups p 190 intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a z Jal Slo a Login Mng Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System Back Guide 2001 1 Tra 18 22 Control group list next Next Mirun M stop Error MCom Error M maintain E Stop Error W Com Error P Maintain uae Main ist Floor Digital Inputs Open list Digital Outputs y Detailed info GroupSetup 3rd Floor a Repor i Oj w Restore Fire First select the control group to be started up p 4 Click the button Pwr Limit Buzzer If the control group contains a management point with Start Stop capability the GroupStart and GroupStop buttons operation will be enabled al Similarly if the GroupStop button is clicked the confirmation dialog box will be displayed ft GroupStart Please confirm GroupStop Please confirm aE aE Click OK to stop the operation and Cancel to cancel i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Click the GroupStart button to display the confirmation dialog box Click OK to start the operation or Cancel to cancel Group Setup By carrying out a collective setup of a control group m
354. ut management points and control groups of the program are not in the output condition in the example unlisted points should be in started state e 2 2 For each of the input management points of the program 2 2 1 Switch it ON see operation explanation below i Manager ECO21 Engineering Manual Si72 301 Configuring the intelligent Manager System Step 2 the intelligent Manager Application 2 2 2 Check that the program performs correctly the output management points and control groups of the program are in the output condition in the example unlisted points are stopped 2 2 3 Switch it OFF see operation explanation below 2 2 4 in the Control Group screens for each management point and control group of the program e check that they are in the output condition in the example unlisted are stopped or e Check that they resumed according to the option selected in the Resume Mode of the tabulation Other in its Attributes dialogue window currently only for management points of type Indoor Unit and General Purpose Digital Input Output 6 7 5 1 Checking the Power Failure Restore procedure This procedure performs checkup for alarm of both power failure and restore To check the power failure procedure e Unplug UPS power supply e Check that the monitoring PC buzzer sounds if applicable e Check that a Power Failure Alarm displays in the intelligent Manager History screen of the monitoring PC e After a
355. utputs stap DETaNEq ATG Ben Repon Oj A Fire Pwr Limit Buzzer 5 3 1 Monitoring Control Groups It is possible to monitor the states and malfunctions of the collective control groups Moreover control and state display of management point units is possible in a lower layer screen As the operation method is identical to that of management point lists please refer to 5 2 Displaying Management Groups p 177 Color of Control Group Icons 1 yellow blinking Abnormality detected in one or more of the management points within the control group 2 blue Abnormal communication detected in one of more of the management points within the control group 3 red No abnormality detected in the management points within the control group and at least one management point is operational 4 green No abnormality detected in the management points within the control group and they have been stopped Order of priority is 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 Note The attributes displayed with a control group room temperature etc are these of the top management point of the groups list i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 191 Operation Details i72 301 5 3 2 Collectively Controlling with Control Groups 192 Group Start Group Stop Collective Start Collective Stop operation can be performed only on control groups which contain management points for which there is a Start Stop Setting authority Please refer to 5 10 3 Configuring
356. uzzer Off Buzzer On can be turned Off if clicked v Alarm History Alarm Printer E Save to File Print page Printer Error History 40 A MV Saveto File Print Lines Page Control History al No Printer MV Saveto File f Print v Status Change History I SavetoDisk Print iv All Mng Points ino Rb Registration Cancel Si72 301 e Time modifications should be avoided between 23 30 and 2 30 as the Station is engaged in data management 254 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details Modifying Station time When time is put forward scheduled operations for the intervening period are skipped When time is put back control that has already been executed is repeated and the data collected before the modification is updated and managed When time is to be modified the Station time setup is performed once the programs of running control etc have been deactivated Data management setup in particular billing related matters should be completed before time modifications are made Major time modifications should be avoided This can lead to inaccuracies in billing management data daily report data etc To ensure accurate monitoring time should be correctly adjusted on a monthly basis particularly in the case of billing management Operational Procedure Click the Setup button to select method of time setup Time Setup Ei IPU Time 2001 10 11 Thu 16
357. ve button Click the OK button the Screen Selection screen closes Click the OK button will display the Password confirmation screen Enter the Current password and the New password twice Click the OK button to confirm 5 10 3 3Modifying a user 1 Select a user from the list the fields for input enable 2 Perform input as above step 2 5 10 3 4Deleting a user 1 Select a user from the list the confirmation dialogue box appears 2 Click the Yes button Click the OK button the Login Setup screen closes The modifications are immediately effective 250 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Operation Details 5 10 4 Editing Management Points It is possible to modify the following information contained within a management point e Name of management point e Short name of management point e Setup of maximum values of operation time and number of Start Stop System setup authority is required for operation Operational Procedure Select the management point whose information needs to be modified and click the Attribute to group to display the management point attribute modification dialog box Management Point Attribute Edition EJ Name Listed Points Short Name ExtTemp External Temperature 53 C All Indoor Temperature IntT a System 001 s001 mdoa Unit Limits WHMeter 1 WHM 1 imi WHMeter2 WHM 2 Current Value Limit C Equipment Operation Time 0 Hours Nb of Switch
358. vel3 Wstt Group Attributes Mote Activation When adding indoor units without Coolf Heat selector ina C Enable i Disable group be careful of registering in this same group the indoor unit with CoolfHeat selector of the same refrigerant Mame group 1 circuit Differential EB Bike Reference Method i Fixed Operating Average PrintfExport e Create the group Enter the group name Add Remove indoor unit members of the group with the referential one at first e Select the selection method between Fixed the first indoor unit of the group Running the first indoor unit in operation of the group Average average value of all indoor units of the group Enter the Differential temperature between Cooling and Heating Set Point e Enable the group canei Click on the Print Export button to print all groups settings on the system printer or to save them in a CSV comma separated format file i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 257 Operation Details i72 301 Note Important Up to 64 groups can be created for this function each group registering up to 16 management points In order to ensure a correct operation always register in a same group the slave in door units i e without Cool Heat Selector with the master indoor unit i e with Cool Heat Selector of the same refrigeration circuit Always register the slave indoor units after the master indoor units because the selection meth
359. vent o 1 4000 20 70 PowerChute plus Stopped m M Notiliy Administrators 00 Utility Power Restored Low Battery Condition F Notify Users Options UPS Battery ls Discharged Hetienn From Low Banery C Aun Command File Ups Communication Established Lost Communication With UPS l Send E Mail Cyne Comm Lost While On Battery 60 Administrative Shutdown l Page Users pnns System Shutdown Siasting i 40 Sytem Shutdown Complete Shut Down Server Options Shutdown Cancelled UPS Output Overload Faataitai Solved Reset Ta Dednalt Actions JUPS Enabling Smanttoost 102 7 VAC Events Actions for Selected Event 1005 UPS On Battery Begin Shutdown Sequence In 960 Seconds Ee feel UPS Shutdown Parameters UPS Low Battery Signal Time 02 minutes UPS Tum Of Delay 180 seconds UPS Wakeup Delay Time 060 seconds UPS Wakeup Delay Capacity TRE UPS Audible Waming Power Fail gt M Automatic Reboot Ea pe 1 1 Start the VRV setup tool PC Settings in the option frame check the checkbox Ignore Auto Shutdown the checkboxes Shutdown Mode and Powerdown Mode state are free 1 2 Start the VRV setup tool iPU Settings in the Power Supply Signal Polarity frame select the option A Type contact or B Type contact of UPS Power Failure Signal corresponding with the UPS specifications refer to the UPS documentation for details e 2 Connect Di 1 to UPS output
360. very indoor unit 1 unit communication data and the tabulation Summing up for an hour shall be a temporary Load every indoor unit to be supposed load In order to determine the power consumption of some air conditioner A it is required to determine the temporary load ratio distribution ratio of air conditioner A to the total temporary load of all the connected Calculation of distribution ratio air conditioners However the value to be determined here is a ratio and not the power consumption Temporary load of air conditioner A Distribution ratio of indoor unit At A AA Sum total of temporary load of all air conditioners If the electric energy pulse LkWh pulse inputted for an hour from the formal time is multiplied by the distribution ratio every indoor unit the actual electric energy used can be determined Electric energy used of air conditioner A Distribution calculation tDistribution ratio of indoor unit AuNumber of pulses for 1 hour With this formula the electric energy used for an hour of air conditioner A can be calculated and determined Then if the same calculation is made for all the air conditioners the distribution value for an hour of each air conditioner can be determined Electric energy used from distribution calculation of air conditioner A For 1 day used power distribution value the calculation result every hour 1 hour inr is Summed up For end of one day 12 00 am mid night is fixed
361. vings Even if an air conditioning system possesses an excellent energy efficient profile this is meaningless unless its operation is appropriately managed Precise operation management is the key to getting the most out of an energy efficient system The intelligent Manager ECO21 is Daikin s energy efficient air conditioning management system It maximizes the performance and characteristics of air conditioning systems and further improves upon existing energy efficiency What we have prepared for you is a highly sophisticated that only Daikin the air conditioning specialist could have made possible Functions and System l I Monitoring Data indication System Setting Operation Stopped Table Op time sw times Basic Setup 4 Operation mode filter sign Set point Graph tem peratu re Management Gr Editing Control Gr Editing q Fan speed etc User History Buzzer Daylight saving time I g Abnormality Clock 4 Malfunction Communication Error r etc _ AIR NET optional I i a A _ Remote Access 4 4 eRemote connection I I e WatchDOG Operation individual group a l estart Stop Printing I q I Setting History 4 ry A Operation mode Fan speed Start Statistics intelligent Manager 02 Remote Ct rl mode Setting info I EEE Maintena
362. w phonebook entry iM anager Remote Help Run I know all about phonebook entries and would rather edit the properties directly CUREK amp E Windows NT Workstati Shut D owr Cancel Phone Numbers New phone number Add Replace Phone numbers New Phonebook Entry Wizard That s it Daan easeasenonarenonaseas H 0 0016129 a Send my plain text password if that s the only way Press Finish to save iManager Remote to connect The non Windows NT server am calling expects me to type login information after connecting or to know TCP IP addresses before dialing pt Dor t Delete MV Move successful number to the top of the list on connection a Ese ee T Dial Up Networking 2x Em Dial Up Networking Monitor 24x Connect to iM anager Remote EES shee Summary Preferences e Phonebook entry to dial iM anager Remote r Device Panasonic TO BXF56K V90_K56flex CG Enter a user name and password with access to the remote network domain Condition Connected to iManager Remote Device response Unavailable Phone number preview Line bps 12 000 Duration 00 10 23 0 001 6 User name Administrator Device statistics Bytes in 1 339 701 Bytes out 24 942 Dialing from Password ere m Connection statistics DSSL Bytes in 1 386 130 Bytes out 62 506 Domain Frames in 1 446 Frames out 1 384 Compression in 3 Co
363. y Setup Time Setup Management Point Setup Auto Changeover Sliding Temperature Temperature Limit i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual 169 Basic Screen and Screen Directory i72 301 Note Depending on the organization of your system user login and function access restriction some functions shown in the figure below may be inaccessible Those buttons with functions that cannot be used are either grayed out or will display the warning below AN H138 You do not have the authority to perform this action Logoff 170 i Manager ECO 21 Operation Manual Si72 301 Starting and Stopping Operation of intelligent Manager 3 Starting and Stopping Operation of intelligent Manager 3 1 Starting Operation intelligent Manager starts up automatically when the PC power supply is turned on as shown below During the booting procedure a progression status window appears The Now connecting with iPU Please wait eee booting time is function of the configuration number of automatic control 1 Initializing database programs etc and can last from a few seconds up to more than one minute intelligent Manager File Menu Operation Help a Se xal ih Login Ming Pt Ctrl Gr Layout Schedule Interlock Data Mng System m Back Help Guide 2001 10 11 Thu 17 50 DAIKIN usr Main openlist VRV System Network Solution Restore Fire DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD C Buzzer

SERVICE MANUAL - Daikintech.co.uk

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents